JP6128157B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP 2009-261415 A

  Here, in the gaming machines such as the above-described examples, a configuration capable of suitably performing display control is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing display control.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 includes a display unit having a display unit,
Display storage means for storing image data in advance;
Display control means for creating drawing data based on setting the image data in a setting storage means, and outputting an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means; ,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display storage means stores moving image data in which a plurality of specific image data is created by executing a decoding process,
The plurality of specific image data is image data for displaying a predetermined individual image so as to move in a predetermined direction,
The display control means includes
A first set range control means to ensure that the first set range image is displayed by setting the range to be set in the setting storing section in the specified image data to the first set range,
Second setting range control means for displaying a second setting range image by setting a range to be set in the setting storage means in the specific image data to a second setting range different from the first setting range. When,
Equipped with a,
After the first setting range image is displayed by setting the first setting range for one specific image data, the second setting by setting the second setting range for the specific image data. When the range image is displayed, the predetermined individual image is displayed so as to move in the predetermined direction.
The first setting range control unit and the second setting range control unit are configured to apply the first setting range and the second setting range for each of the plurality of specific image data.
Displaying the first setting range image by setting the first setting range and displaying the second setting range image by setting the second setting range are performed on the specific image data corresponding to a predetermined display order. Thereafter, display of the first setting range image by setting the first setting range and display of the second setting range image by setting the second setting range for the specific image data corresponding to the next display order. Is performed .

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably perform display control.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board. (A)-(j) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for big hit generation | occurrence | production lottery etc. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the table setting process performed in sound light side MPU. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of a notice lottery table, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of a reach lottery table, (c) The structure of sound light side RAM is demonstrated. It is explanatory drawing for. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a control pattern table. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that a symbol is rock-displayed in a symbol display apparatus, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that a symbol is fixedly displayed in a symbol display apparatus. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating various parts tables. (A1)-(a3), (b1)-(b3) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the variable display time defined by a parts table. It is a flowchart which shows the pointer update process performed in sound light side MPU. (A)-(e2) It is a time chart which shows a mode that the effect for game times is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed with display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the task process performed by display CPU. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the drawing list. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing process performed by VDP. (A)-(f) It is a time chart which shows an example of the fluctuation | variation display mode of a symbol. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content on the display surface of a symbol display apparatus. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of a memory module, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of work RAM. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution object table for acceleration periods, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution object table for 1st high speed periods. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution object table for 1st low speed periods. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between the value set to the counter for 1st adjustment and the counter for 3rd adjustment, and the kind of symbol, (b) The value set to the counter for 2nd adjustment It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship with the kind of symbol. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution object table for acceleration periods, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution object table for 1st high speed periods. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the execution object table for 1st low speed periods. It is a flowchart which shows the command corresponding | compatible process performed with display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for normal fluctuations performed with display CPU. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a loop display effect. (A)-(d) It is a time chart which shows the flow of a loop display effect. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of a memory module, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of work RAM. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the table for character retention, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the table for character movement, (c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the table for backgrounds. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for character loops performed with display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for background loops performed with display CPU. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of a group display effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the moving image data for group display. (A1) to (a3) are time charts showing the relationship between an image update cycle and a cycle in which still image data can be used, and (b) and (c) drawing in the frame area to be drawn in the same decoded image data It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that the range to perform differs. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for group display effects performed with display CPU. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the decoding process performed in a moving image decoder, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for group display performed in VDP. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of an effective period display effect. (A), (b) It is a time chart which shows the comparative example of an effective period display effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of a memory module. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the band display table, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the blink display table. (A1), (b1), (a2), (b2) It is a time chart which shows a mode that an effective period display effect is performed using both the band display table and the blink display table. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for the effective period display performed with display CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the number display effect. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure for performing number display effect. It is a front view of the said inner frame which expands and shows the lower area | region of an inner frame. It is a flowchart which shows the process for counting performed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the output setting process of the measurement command performed in sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the measurement command corresponding | compatible process performed with display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for measurement display performed with display CPU. (A)-(c) It is a time chart which shows a mode that a number display effect is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for the increase display performed with display CPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of a memory module. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the image for 1st characters, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an effect image, (c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the image for 2nd characters. . It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that the range which draws in the frame area | region of drawing object in each image data differs. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the table for pseudo moving images. (A)-(d) It is a time chart which shows a mode that a pseudo animation production is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for pseudo animation production performed with display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for round production performed with display CPU. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating another example of a pseudo | simulation moving image production. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed with display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the task process performed by display CPU. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the drawing list. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing process performed by VDP. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that drawing data is produced with execution of a drawing process. (A)-(c) It is a time chart which shows a mode that a time corresponding | compatible effect is performed. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the symbol display apparatus in a normal period, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the symbol display apparatus in a preparation period, (c) In special period It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of a symbol display apparatus. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the display content of the symbol display apparatus when it becomes the start timing of a time corresponding | compatible effect in the condition where the effect for game times is performed. (A)-(h) It is a time chart which shows a mode that a time corresponding | compatible effect is performed in relation to the execution condition of the effect for game times. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of sound-light side ROM, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the data table for time corresponding | compatible effects. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of a memory module. It is a flowchart which shows the RTC corresponding | compatible process performed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the preparation period start performed by sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the command corresponding | compatible process performed with display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process in the preparation period performed in the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process in the special period performed by the sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the table setting process performed in sound light side MPU. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating another example of the display content of the symbol display apparatus in a preparation period. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the setting process for the preparation period start performed by sound light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the command corresponding | compatible process performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows another example of the setting process during the preparation period performed in the sound light side MPU. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific content of another preservation | save effect. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the comparative example of another preservation | save effect. (A)-(h) It is a time chart which shows a mode that another preservation | save effect is performed. (A)-(c) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific content of another preservation | save effect. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for another preservation | save effect performed with display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process during operation effective period performed with display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the operation corresponding | compatible production process performed by display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for another preservation | save display performed by VDP. It is a flowchart which shows the drawing data creation process for another preservation | save display performed by VDP. (A), (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific display content of an angle display effect. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure of a memory module. (A)-(i) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating various moving image data groups. (A)-(g) It is a time chart which shows a mode that angle display production progresses. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for angle display effects performed with display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the process for an opening performed with display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the decoding process performed by VDP. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the moving image corresponding | compatible table corresponding to A angle, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a switching reference table. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for angle display effects performed by VDP. (A) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of normal moving image data, (b) It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of special moving image data. (A)-(g) It is a time chart which shows a mode that special animation use effect is performed. It is a flowchart which shows the calculation process for special moving image use effects performed with display CPU. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for special moving image use effects performed by VDP.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11. . The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in front view. A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated backward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view.

  The gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device at the rotating tip, and has a function of locking the gaming machine main body 12 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened. The door frame 14 has a function of locking the door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened. Each of these locked states is released by performing an unlocking operation using the unlocking key on the cylinder lock 17 that is exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  A game board 24 is mounted on the inner frame 13. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 24.

  An inner rail portion 25 and an outer rail portion 26 are attached to the game board 24 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. The inner rail portion 25 and the outer rail portion 26 provide guidance means. As a guide rail, it is configured. A game ball launched from a game ball launching mechanism (not shown) attached below the game board 24 in the inner frame 13 is guided to the upper part of the game area PA by a guide rail. The game ball launch mechanism performs a game ball launch operation by manually operating the launch operation device 28 provided on the front door frame 14.

  The game board 24 has a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 31, a special electricity winning device 32, a first operating port 33, a second operating port 34, a through gate 35, a variable display unit 36, a special drawing unit 37, a universal drawing unit 38, and the like. ing.

  Even if a ball enters the through gate 35, the game ball is not paid out. On the other hand, when a ball enters the general winning port 31, the special electricity winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Specifically, with respect to the number of prize balls, when a ball enters the first working port 33 or a ball enters the second working port 34, three prize balls are paid out. When a ball is entered into the general winning port 31, 10 prize balls are paid out. When a ball is entered into the special electric prize device 32, 15 prize balls are paid out. Executed.

  The number of prize balls may be arbitrary. For example, the second actuation port 34 may have a smaller number of prize balls than the first actuation port 33, and the second actuation port 34 may be configured as the first actuation port. The number of prize balls may be larger than 33.

  In addition, an out port 24a is provided at the bottom of the game board 24, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 24a. In addition, the game board 24 is provided with a large number of nails 24b and various members such as a windmill in order to disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball as appropriate.

  Here, the entry ball means that the game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and not only the mode of discharging from the game area PA after passing through the opening, but also from the game area PA after passing through the opening. A mode in which the game area PA continues to flow down without being discharged is also included. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 24a, the general winning port 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35 are provided. Entering a game ball into is also expressed as a prize.

  The first operating port 33 and the second operating port 34 are unitized as operating port devices and are installed in the game board 24. Both the first working port 33 and the second working port 34 are opened upward. Further, both the operation ports 33 and 34 are arranged in the vertical direction so that the first operation port 33 is located on the upper side. The second operating port 34 is provided with a general electric utility 34a as a guide piece composed of a pair of left and right movable pieces. In the closed state of the utility wire 34a, the game ball cannot win the second operating port 34, and the winning of the second operating port 34 becomes possible when the universal power 34a is opened.

  A through gate 35 is provided on the upstream side in the flow-down direction of the game ball from the second working port 34. The through gate 35 has a through hole (not shown) penetrating in the vertical direction, and the game ball that has won the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after winning. As a result, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 can win the second working port 34.

  Based on the winning of the through gate 35, the common utility 34 a of the second operating port 34 is switched from the closed state to the open state. Specifically, an internal lottery is performed with a winning at the through gate 35 as a trigger, and a normal display of a general-purpose unit 38 provided at the lower right corner, which is a region where game balls do not pass in the game region PA, is displayed. In the part 38a, the change display of the pattern is performed. Then, when the result of the internal lottery is the electrification opening winning, the stop result corresponding to the result is displayed, and the fluctuation display of the general map display unit 38a is finished, the state shifts to the public power open state. In the public power open state, the general electric utility 34a is opened in a predetermined manner.

  The general map display unit 38a is constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner, but is not limited to this, and is not limited to this. A liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device , Or other types of display devices such as CRT or dot matrix display. In addition, as a pattern variably displayed on the general map display unit 38a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, or A configuration in which a plurality of colors are switched and displayed is conceivable.

  In the universal map unit 38, a universal map hold display section 38b is provided at a position adjacent to the universal map display section 38a. A maximum of four game balls won in the through gate 35 are reserved, and the number of the reserved balls is displayed by turning on the general-purpose display unit 38b.

  A lottery is performed with the winning of the first working port 33 or the second working port 34 as a trigger. The lottery result is clearly shown through display effects in the symbol display device 41 of the special figure unit 37 and the variable display unit 36.

  Specifically, the special figure unit 37 is provided with a special figure display unit 37a. The display area of the special figure display unit 37 a is narrower than the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. In the special figure display unit 37a, the variation display of the picture is performed by performing the big hit occurrence lottery with the winning of the first operating port 33 or the winning of the second operating port 34 as a trigger. And the display corresponding to the result of lottery occurrence lottery is performed as a stop result after the change display of a picture is performed. In addition, although the special figure display part 37a is comprised by the segment display by which several segment light emission parts are arranged in the predetermined | prescribed aspect, it is not limited to this, A liquid crystal display device, an organic electroluminescence display device , Or other types of display devices such as CRT or dot matrix display. In addition, as a picture displayed on the special figure display unit 37a, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types of colors A configuration in which is displayed is conceivable.

  In the special figure unit 37, a special figure holding display part 37b is provided at a position adjacent to the special figure display part 37a. A maximum of four game balls won in the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 are reserved, and the reserved number is displayed by lighting the special figure reservation display portion 37b.

  In detail, the symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and display contents are controlled by a display control device described later. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device having a display surface such as a CRT, and is a dot matrix display. May be.

  In the symbol display device 41, when the variation display of the pattern is performed in the special symbol display unit 37a based on the winning in the first operation port 33 or the winning in the second operation port 34, the variation display of the symbol is performed accordingly. Is called. That is, when variable display is performed in the special figure display unit 37a, the variable display is performed in the symbol display device 41 accordingly. Then, for example, in the game times in which the result of the jackpot occurrence lottery becomes the jackpot result, the symbols of a predetermined combination are stopped and displayed on the active line set in advance in the symbol display device 41.

  The display content of the symbol display device 41 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. 3 (a) to 3 (j) are diagrams individually showing symbols variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIGS. 4 (a) and 4 (b) are display surfaces of the symbol display device 41. FIG. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 3 (a) to FIG. 3 (j), a design which is a kind of design is composed of nine main designs with numbers "1" to "9" respectively, and a shell-shaped design. It is comprised by the sub-pattern which consists of. More specifically, the main symbols are configured by attaching numbers “1” to “9” to nine types of character symbols such as octopus.

  As shown in FIG. 4A, on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper stage, a middle stage, and a lower stage are set as a plurality of display areas. Each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 includes a main symbol and a sub symbol arranged in a predetermined order. Specifically, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in descending order of numbers in the upper symbol row Z1, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and one sub symbol is arranged between the main symbols.

  That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol row Z2, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending numerical order, and then between the main symbol “9” and the main symbol “1”. In addition, a main symbol “4” is additionally arranged, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In other words, only the middle symbol row Z2 is composed of 20 symbols by arranging 10 main symbols. On the display surface P, the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed in a variable manner so as to scroll in a predetermined direction with periodicity.

  As shown in FIG. 4B, on the display surface P, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is like that. On the display surface P, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right lowering line L4, and a right uppering line L5 are set. Then, the variable display stops in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and all the symbol rows Z1 are formed in a state in which a combination of symbols having the same number attached to any one of the effective lines is formed. When the fluctuation display of .about.Z3 is completed, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variable jackpot result which will be described later.

  In this pachinko machine 10, the main symbols assigned with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) correspond to “specific symbols” and are assigned even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8). The main symbol corresponds to “non-specific symbol”. When the 15R probability variation jackpot result is generated, the same specific symbol combination or the same non-specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed. When a normal jackpot result occurs, the same combination of non-specific symbols is stopped and displayed. In addition, in the case of an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result to be described later, the variation display of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is finished in a state where a predetermined symbol combination different from the same symbol combination is formed, and then, An explicit video is displayed.

  In addition, the mode of the display of the symbol variation in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbol columns, the direction of the symbol variation display in the symbol sequence, the number of symbols in each symbol column, etc. Can be appropriately changed. Also, the pattern that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-described pattern, and for example, only numbers may be variably displayed as the pattern.

  Further, based on the winning in one of the operation ports 33, 34, the variable display is started in the special symbol display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41, until a predetermined stop result is displayed and the variable display is stopped. Corresponds to one game time.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 2, when a big win is won in the big win occurrence lottery based on the winning to the first working port 33 or the second working port 34, the special electricity winning device 32 can be won. Transition to the open / close execution mode. The special electric prize winning device 32 is provided with a large winning opening (not shown) leading to the back side of the game board 24 and an open / close door 32a for opening and closing the large winning opening. The open / close door 32a is arranged in either a closed state or an open state. Specifically, the open / close door 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot be won, and can be switched to an open state in which game balls can be won when winning the transition to the open / close execution mode in the internal lottery. It has become. Incidentally, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode that shifts when a hit result is obtained. Note that, in the closed state, winning may not be impossible, but it may be configured such that winning is less likely to occur than in the open state. In the opening / closing execution mode, a display effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode is executed by the symbol display device 41.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13 having the game board 24 having the above-described configuration. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 42 so that almost the entire game area PA can be viewed from the front. The window part 42 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 43 is fitted therein. The window panel 43 is formed of colorless and transparent with glass, but is not limited thereto, and may be formed of colorless and transparent with synthetic resin, and the game area PA is defined through the window panel 43 from the front of the pachinko machine 10. As long as it is visible, it may be colored and transparent.

  A display light emitting unit 44 is provided above the window unit 42. In addition, a pair of left and right speaker units 45 are provided for outputting sound effects corresponding to the gaming state. Further, below the window portion 42, an upper bulging portion 46 and a lower bulging portion 47 bulging toward the front side are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction. An upper pan 46 a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 46, and a lower pan 47 a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 47. The upper plate 46a has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device provided in the back pack unit 15 and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism side while aligning them in a row. In addition, the lower tray 47a has a function of storing game balls that become surplus in the upper tray 46a.

  In the lower bulge portion 47, an area outside the lower plate 47a is provided with an effect operating device 48 having an operation portion manually operated by a player. The operation unit of the effect operation device 48 is manually operated by the player so that the effect content on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 is the predetermined effect content.

  On the back side of the inner frame 13, a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device are mounted. The back pack unit 15 is equipped with a payout mechanism including a payout device, a payout control device, and a power source / launch control device. Hereinafter, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

<Main controller 50>
The main control device 50 includes a main control board 51 that controls the main game. In the main control device 50, a trace box for giving a trace of the opening or a trace structure for leaving the trace of the opening is provided to the board box that accommodates the main control board 51 or the like. It may be. As the trace means, a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box are unseparably coupled, and a configuration of a coupling portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined part at the time of separation or an adhesive layer to be bonded at the time of peeling The structure which sticks the seal seal | sticker which leaves the trace of having been peeled by remaining so that it may straddle the boundary between several case bodies can be considered. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure which apply | coats an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between the some case bodies which comprise a board | substrate box can be considered.

  An MPU 52 is mounted on the main control board 51. The MPU 52 includes a ROM 53 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 52 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 53 is executed. A RAM 54, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated.

  The ROM 53 is a storage means (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that can be randomly accessed when reading a control program or fixed value data and does not require external power supply for storage retention. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of memory used as the ROM 53 is arbitrary as long as random access is possible. In addition, the configuration in which the control and calculation portion, the ROM 53, and the RAM 54 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip, and some functions may be configured as separate chips. It is good also as a structure currently mounted.

  The MPU 52 is provided with an input port and an output port. A power source / fire control device 57 is connected to the input side of the MPU 52. The power source / launch control device 57 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Then, operating power is supplied to the main control board 51 based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source. Incidentally, the operating power is supplied not only to the main control board 51 but also to other devices such as the payout control device 55 and the display control device 70 described later.

  A power failure monitoring board may be provided on the power path between the MPU 52 and the power source / launch control device 57. In this case, the occurrence of a power failure is monitored by the power failure monitoring board, and when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed, a power failure signal is transmitted to the MPU 52 so that the MPU 52 executes processing for a power failure. It becomes possible to do.

  Various sensors (not shown) are connected to the input side of the MPU 52. As a part of the various sensors, detection provided in a one-to-one manner with respect to a winning-corresponding pitching portion such as a general winning opening 31, a special prize winning device 32, a first operating opening 33, a second operating opening 34, and a through gate 35 A sensor is included, and the MPU 52 performs a winning determination (entering determination) for each entering part. In addition, the MPU 52 performs a jackpot generation lottery and a jackpot result type lottery based on winnings to the first operation port 33 and the second operation port 34, and also performs a reach generation lottery and a variable display time determination lottery for each game time. To do.

  Here, a configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 52 will be described.

  The MPU 52 uses lots of counter information during the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, display setting of the special symbol display unit 37a, symbol display setting of the symbol display device 41, display setting of the general symbol display unit 38a, and the like. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 6, a hit random number counter C1 used for jackpot occurrence lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining a jackpot type such as a 15R probability variable jackpot result or a normal jackpot result, Reach random number counter C3 used for the reach generation lottery when the symbol display device 41 moves out and fluctuates, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, the special symbol display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41 The variation type counter CS for determining the variation display time at is used. Furthermore, the universal electric utility release counter C4 used for the lottery of whether or not the electric utility item 34a of the second working port 34 is set to the electric utility open state is used. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in the lottery counter buffer 54a.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to “0” after reaching the maximum value. The information corresponding to the winning random number counter C1, the big hitting type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in an on-hold storage area 54b as an acquisition information storage means when a winning to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 occurs. Stored in

  The holding storage area 54b includes a holding area RE and an execution area AE. The holding area RE includes a first holding area RE1, a second holding area RE2, a third holding area RE3, and a fourth holding area RE4. In the winning history to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34, In addition, the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored as hold information in any of the hold areas RE1 to RE4.

  In the first reservation area RE1 to the fourth reservation area RE4, when a winning to the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34 is continuously generated a plurality of times, the first reservation area RE1 → the second reservation area RE2 The numerical information is stored in time series in the order of the third reserved area RE3 → the fourth reserved area RE4. By providing the four holding areas RE1 to RE4 as described above, up to four game balls winning histories to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 are stored and stored. . Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, but may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more. The execution area AE is an area for moving each value stored in the first holding area RE1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the special figure display section 37a. Is determined based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

  In detail about each counter, the winning random number counter C1 is configured such that “1” is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 599, for example, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to “0”. In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial random number counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34.

  The random number value for winning the jackpot is stored in the ROM 53 as a success / failure table. As the success / failure table, a success / failure table for the low probability mode and a success / failure table for the high probability mode are set. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the low probability mode and the high probability mode are set as the lottery modes in the jackpot occurrence lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers that win the jackpot is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers that will win the jackpot is 20. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number of random numbers to be won is arbitrary.

  The big hit type counter C2 is configured so that “1” is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 29, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to “0”. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34.

  In the pachinko machine 10, a plurality of jackpot results are set. The plurality of jackpot results are as follows: (1) a mode of opening / closing control of the special prize winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, (2) lottery mode in the jackpot generating lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (3) after the opening / closing execution mode ends. A plurality of jackpot results are set by providing a difference in the three conditions of the support mode of the second utility port 34 in the utility service 34a.

  As an aspect of the opening / closing control of the special electricity prize winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode, the occurrence frequency of winning in the special electricity prize winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode is relatively high. A frequency winning mode and a low frequency winning mode are set. Specifically, in the high-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing of the large winning opening is performed 15 times from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds elapses or winning in the large winning opening Continue until the number reaches 10. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening / closing of the big prize opening is performed twice from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 0.2 sec elapses or the number of winning prizes in the big winning opening Continue until there are six.

  In the present pachinko machine 10, in a situation where the launch operation device 28 is operated by a player, the game ball launching mechanism 58 is driven and controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA every 0.6 sec. Is done. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of one large winning opening is 0.2 sec as described above. That is, in the low-frequency winning mode, the time for opening a single big winning opening is shorter than the game ball firing cycle. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode of the low frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur.

  It should be noted that the number of times of opening / closing the large winning opening in the high frequency winning mode and the low frequency winning mode, the opening time limit for opening once, and the opening limit number for opening once are higher in the high frequency winning mode than in the low frequency winning mode. However, the value is not limited to the above value as long as the frequency of occurrence of winning in the special electric prize winning device 32 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode increases. Specifically, if the high frequency winning mode has a larger number of opening and closing times than the low frequency winning mode, the opening limit time for one opening is longer, or if the opening limit number for one opening is set to be larger. Good.

  However, in order to clarify the difference in privilege between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, a configuration in which a prize is not actually generated in the special electric prize winning device 32 in the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode. It is good to do. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, the product of the launch period of the game ball and the open limit number is set shorter than the open limit time for one release, while in the low-frequency winning mode, It is good also as a structure which sets the product of the launching period of a game ball and the open limit number longer than open limit time. In addition, even if the launch interval of the game balls and the opening time of one big prize opening are not as described above, in the low frequency winning mode, the latter is set to be shorter than the former. In particular, it is possible to easily realize a configuration in which no prize is awarded to the special electric prize winning device 32.

  The support mode of the electric utility 34a of the second operating port 34 is such that when the game ball PA is continuously fired in the same manner with respect to the game area PA, the second operating port 34 has a universal mode. The low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency at which the electrical service object 34a is opened per unit time is relatively high.

  Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric utility open state in the electric utility open lottery using the general electric utility open counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5 However, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the power utility 34a is in the open state is set more frequently than in the low frequency support mode. The opening time is set longer. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is won and the open state of the general utility 34a occurs a plurality of times, from the end of one open state to the start of the next open state The closing time is set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, a shorter time is secured as a minimum secured time after the next electric character opening lottery is performed after the electric character object opening lottery is performed than in the low frequency support mode. Is set to be selected.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize to the second operation port 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning the first operating port 33 than in the second operating port 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second operation is performed more than in the first operating port 33. The probability of winning a prize in the mouth 34 is increased. When a winning is made to the second operation port 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls so much. It can be carried out.

  The configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is set to the power release state per unit time as compared with the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration, for example, the electric component release lottery It is good also as a structure which makes high the probability that it will be elected in the electric character open state in. In addition, a secured time (e.g., based on a winning to the through gate 35 in the normal map display unit 38a) that is secured after the next electrification opening lottery is performed after the electrification opening lottery In a configuration in which a plurality of types of variable display time) are prepared, the high frequency support mode is set so that a short securing time is easily selected or the average secure time is shorter than the low frequency support mode. It may be. Further, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the secured time that is secured when the next electric winning combination opening lottery is performed after the first electric winning combination releasing lottery is shortened (that is, Apply one of the conditions or any combination of conditions among shortening the average display time and increasing the winning probability. Thus, the advantage of the high frequency support mode over the low frequency support mode may be increased.

  The game result distribution destination for the big hit type counter C2 is stored in the ROM 53 as a distribution table. As the distribution destinations, a normal jackpot result, an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, and a 15R probability variation jackpot result are set.

  The normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the jackpot occurrence lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. However, the high-frequency support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode when the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the shift. In other words, the normal jackpot result is a jackpot result for shifting the gaming state to the normal jackpot state.

  The explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the jackpot occurrence lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. is there. These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the jackpot occurrence lottery is a jackpot state win and the game shifts to a jackpot state. In other words, the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result for shifting the gaming state to the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot state.

  The 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the jackpot occurrence lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode. . These high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode are continued until the lottery result in the jackpot occurrence lottery is a jackpot state win and the game shifts to a jackpot state. In other words, the 15R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result for shifting the gaming state to the 15R probability variation jackpot state.

  Note that the normal gaming state in relation to each of the above gaming states refers to a state where the big hit occurrence lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode.

  In the distribution table, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 29”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and “10 to 14” corresponds to the explicit 2R probability variable jackpot result. “15 to 29” corresponds to the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

  As described above, since the explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result is set as the probability variation jackpot result, the modes of the probability variation jackpot result are diversified. That is, when two types of probability variation jackpot results are compared, the advantage for the player is that the 15R probability variation jackpot result, which is the high-frequency winning mode in the opening / closing execution mode and the high-frequency support mode in the support mode, is the highest. Although the mode is the low-frequency winning mode, the support mode has the lowest explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result that is the high-frequency support mode. Thereby, monotonization of a game is suppressed and it becomes possible to raise the attention degree to a game.

  As a kind of probability variation jackpot result, the opening / closing execution mode becomes the low-frequency winning mode, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the jackpot occurrence lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode is maintained in the previous mode. An implicit 2R probability variation jackpot result may be included. In this case, further diversification of the probabilistic jackpot results is achieved.

  Furthermore, as a kind of losing result in the lottery occurrence lottery, there is a special losing result that shifts to the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode and that does not occur the jackpot lottery mode and the support mode after the completion. Also good. In the configuration in which both the above-described non-explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result and the special outlier result are set, the switching execution mode shifts to the low-frequency winning mode, and the support mode is maintained in the previous mode. In contrast to the fact that the transition mode of the jackpot occurrence lottery mode is different, for example, in the case of one of the non-explicit 2R probability variation jackpot results or special outage results in the normal gaming state, It is possible to cause the player to predict which result actually corresponds to the result.

  The reach random number counter C3 is configured such that “1” is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches the maximum value and then returns to “0”. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated and stored in the holding storage area 54b at the timing when the game ball wins the first operation port 33 or the second operation port 34.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 41. Expected effects include a symbol display device 41 that can perform variable display of symbols, and in game times in which the opening / closing execution mode of the special electricity winning device 32 is the high-frequency winning mode, the stop display result after the variable display is specially displayed. In the resulting gaming machine, the player is assumed to be in the variable display state in which the special display result is likely to be obtained before the stop display result is derived and displayed after the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 41 is started. The display state for this purpose.

  Two types of expectation effects are set: the reach effect, and a notice effect for expecting a reach effect or a special display result before the reach effect occurs.

  The reach effect is a combination of jackpot symbols corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode by stopping the symbols for some of the symbol rows displayed on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. A display state is displayed in which combinations of reach symbols that are likely to be established are displayed, and in that state, symbols in the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol columns, and a reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image in the background image. In addition, there is included a technique for performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface P after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  Specifically, as for the reach effect, as a step before ending the variable display of symbols, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode is set on the preset effective line in the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a combination of reach symbols that are likely to be combined, and a symbol change display is performed by a final stop symbol sequence in a situation where the reach line is formed.

  The display contents of FIG. 4 will be described in detail. In the state where the symbol variation display is first ended in the upper symbol row Z1 and the symbol variation display is further terminated in the lower symbol row Z3, any effective A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbols having the same numbers on the lines L1 to L5, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the symbol variation display is performed in the middle symbol row Z2. It will be a reach production. When the high-frequency winning mode occurs, the main symbol with the same number as the main symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed on the reach line in the middle symbol row Z2. The symbol variation display is terminated.

  For the notice effect, in the situation where the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 after the symbol variation display is started on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, or in some symbol rows. In a situation where symbols are variably displayed in a plurality of symbol rows, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is included. Moreover, what makes a background image the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect, and what makes the symbol on the symbol sequence Z1-Z3 the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect are also included. Such a notice effect may occur at any game time when the reach effect is performed and when the reach effect is not performed, but is higher when the reach effect is performed than when the reach effect is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  The reach effect is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times that shift to the opening / closing execution mode. Further, in the game times that do not shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing with reference to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 53 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach effect. It is executed when On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to perform the notice effect is not performed by the main controller 50 but is performed by the sound emission controller 60.

  The variation type counter CS is configured such that, for example, “1” is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 198, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to “0”. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 52 determines the variation display time in the special symbol display unit 37a and the symbol variation display time in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time of the main process, which will be described later. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when the variation pattern is determined at the start of variation display in the special symbol display unit 37a and at the time of symbol variation start by the symbol display device 41. In determining the variable display time, the variable display time table stored in advance in the variable display time table storage area of the ROM 53 is referred to.

  For example, the universal power release counter C4 is configured such that “1” is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 250, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to “0”. The general electric utility release counter C4 is periodically updated and stored in the electric utility reservation area 54c at the timing when a game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the general utility 34a to the open state based on the stored value of the general utility release counter C4.

  A payout control device 55 is connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and a power source / launch control device 57 is also connected. For example, a payout ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 55 based on a winning determination result to the winning-corresponding winning portion. The payout control device 55 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 56 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 50. A firing permission command is transmitted to the power / fire control device 57 based on the operation of the firing operation device 28. Based on the launch permission command received from the main controller 50, the power / launch controller 57 drives the game ball launch mechanism 58 to launch the game ball toward the game area PA.

  Further, a special figure display unit 37 a and a general map display unit 38 a are connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and display control of the special figure display unit 37 a and the general map display unit 38 a is directly performed by the MPU 52. That is, at each game round, the display control of the special figure display unit 37a is executed in the MPU 52. In addition, when the lottery result indicating whether or not to open the electric utility item 34a is clearly indicated, the MPU 52 performs display control of the normal display portion 38a.

  Connected to the output side of the MPU 52 are a special electric prize driving unit that opens and closes the open / close door of the special electric prize device 32 and a universal electric component drive unit that opens and closes the electric utility item 34a of the second operating port 34. . That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 52 performs drive control of the special electricity prize driving unit so that the special winning opening is opened and closed. In addition, when the power utility 34a is opened, the MPU 52 performs drive control of the power utility drive unit so that the power utility 34a is opened and closed. Further, the sound emission control device 60 is connected to the output side of the MPU 52, and various commands for effects are transmitted to the sound emission control device 60.

  Here, processing executed by the MPU 52 will be described. The processing of the MPU 52 is roughly classified into main processing that is started when the power is turned on and timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 4 msec).

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the main process. In step S101, power-on wait processing is executed. In the power-on wait process, for example, the process waits without progressing to the next process until a predetermined time for wait (specifically 1 sec) elapses after the main process is activated. The operation start and initial setting of the symbol display device 41 are completed during the execution period of the power-on wait process. In the subsequent step S102, access to the RAM 54 is permitted, and in step S103, the internal function register of the MPU 52 is set.

  Thereafter, in step S104, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch provided in the power / fire control device 57 is manually operated. In subsequent step S105, whether or not “1” is set in the power failure flag of the RAM 54 is determined. Determine whether. In step S106, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum is executed. In subsequent step S107, whether or not the checksum matches the checksum stored when the power is turned off, that is, the validity of the stored data is checked. judge.

  In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when a game hall starts business, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch is pressed. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch is pressed, the process proceeds to step S108. Similarly, when the information on occurrence of power shutdown is not set, or when an abnormality of data stored and held is confirmed by the checksum, the process proceeds to step S108. In step S108, the RAM 54 is cleared. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S109.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch has not been pressed, step S109 is executed without executing step S108 on condition that the power failure flag is set to “1” and the checksum is normal. Proceed to In step S109, a power-on setting process is executed. In the power-on setting process, a predetermined area of the RAM 54 such as initialization of a power failure flag is set to an initial value, and a command corresponding to the current gaming state is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60 in order to recognize the current gaming state. To do.

  Then, it progresses to the residual process of step S110-step S113. That is, the MPU 52 is configured to periodically execute the timer interrupt process, but a remaining time is generated between one timer interrupt process and the next timer interrupt process. The remaining time varies depending on the processing completion time of each timer interrupt process, but the remaining processes in steps S110 to S113 are repeatedly executed using such irregular time. In this regard, it can be said that the remaining processes in steps S110 to S113 are non-periodic processes that are performed irregularly.

  In the remaining process, first, in step S110, an interrupt prohibition setting is performed in order to prohibit the generation of the timer interrupt process. In the subsequent step S111, a random number initial value update process for updating the random number initial value counter CINI is executed, and a change counter update process for updating the change type counter CS is executed in step S112. In these update processes, the current numerical information is read from the corresponding counter of the RAM 54, the process of adding 1 to the read numerical information is executed, and then the process of overwriting the read-out counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S113, an interrupt permission setting for switching from a state in which the generation of the timer interrupt process is prohibited to a state in which the timer interrupt process is permitted is performed. If the process of step S113 is performed, it will return to step S110 and will repeat the process of step S110-step S113.

  Next, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The timer interrupt process is executed periodically (for example, at a cycle of 4 msec). First, in step S201, a power failure information storage process is executed. In the power outage information storage process, it is monitored whether or not a power outage signal corresponding to the occurrence of power interruption is received from the power outage monitoring board. If the occurrence of a power outage is specified, the process during power outage is executed.

  In subsequent step S202, a lottery random number update process is executed. In the lottery random number update process, the winning random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the universal utility release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the current numerical information is sequentially read from the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the general electric utility release counter C4, and a process of adding 1 to each of the read numerical information is executed. Later, a process of overwriting the reading source counter is executed. In this case, each counter value is cleared to “0” when it reaches the maximum value. Thereafter, in step S203, the random number initial value update process is executed in the same manner as in step S111, and in step S204, the variation counter update process is executed in the same manner as in step S112.

  In subsequent step S205, a fraud detection process for monitoring whether or not a predetermined event set as a fraud monitoring target has occurred is executed. In the fraud detection process, occurrence of a plurality of types of events is monitored, and by confirming that a predetermined event has occurred, “1” is set to a game stop flag provided in the RAM 54.

  In the subsequent step S206, it is determined whether or not the progress of the game is stopped by determining whether or not “1” is set in the game stop flag. If a negative determination is made in step S206, the processing after step S207 is executed.

  In step S207, port output processing is executed. In the port output process, when output information has been set in the previous timer interrupt process, a process for performing output corresponding to the output information to various drive units is executed. For example, when information for switching the special electricity prize winning device 32 to the open state is set, output of the drive signal to the special electricity prize driving unit is started, and when information to switch to the closed state is set, Stop driving signal output. In addition, when the information for switching the power utility 34a of the second working port 34 to the open state is set, the output of the drive signal to the power utility drive unit is started and the information to be switched to the closed state. Is set, the output of the drive signal is stopped.

  In a succeeding step S208, a reading process is executed. In the reading process, signals other than the power failure signal and the winning signal are read, and the read information is stored for use in future processing.

  In subsequent step S209, a winning detection process is executed. In the winning detection process, a signal received from each winning detection sensor is read, and whether or not there is a winning in the general winning port 31, the special electric winning device 32, the first operating port 33, the second operating port 34, and the through gate 35. Execute the process to identify.

  In the subsequent step S210, timer update processing for updating the numerical information of a plurality of types of timer counters provided in the RAM 54 is executed. In this case, the timer counter that is updated by subtracting the stored numerical information is handled in an integrated manner. However, both the updating of the subtracting timer counter and the updating of the adding timer counter are performed collectively. It is good also as a structure.

  In the subsequent step S211, a launch control process for controlling the launch of the game ball is executed. In a situation where the launch operation to the launch operation device 28 is continued, as described above, one game ball is launched at a predetermined launch period of 0.6 sec.

  In the subsequent step S212, as input state monitoring processing, disconnection confirmation of each winning detection sensor and opening confirmation of the gaming machine main body 12 and the front door frame 14 are performed based on the information read in the reading processing in step S208.

  In the subsequent step S213, a special figure special electric control process for performing execution control of the game times and execution control of the opening / closing execution mode is executed. In the special figure special power control process, when a winning to the first operating port 33 or the second operating port 34 occurs in a situation where the number of the holding information stored in the holding storage area 54b is less than the upper limit number, A process of storing the numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 at the time as the hold information in the hold storage area 54b in time series is executed. Also, in the special figure special electric control process, a big hit is generated to determine whether or not the hold information corresponds to the big hit win on the condition that the hold information is stored while not in the game rotation and opening / closing execution mode. If it corresponds to the lottery process and the jackpot winning, a distribution determination process for determining which jackpot result the hold information corresponds to is executed. In addition, in the special figure special electric control process, not only the jackpot occurrence lottery process and the distribution determination process, but if the hold information does not correspond to the jackpot winning, whether or not the hold information corresponds to the occurrence of reach The reach determination process for determining the game time and the process for selecting the variation display time of the game times using the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that time are performed. In this case, the variable display time table corresponding to the presence / absence of jackpot winning, the type of jackpot, and the presence / absence of reach is read from the ROM 53, and the current variation display time table and the numerical information of the variation type counter CS at that timing are read from this time. Determine the variable display time of the game times. Then, the variation command including information of the determined variation display time of the game time and the type command including information of the game result are transmitted to the sound emission control device 60, and the variation of the pattern in the special figure display unit 37a. Start display. As a result, one game round is started, and an effect for game round is started on the special figure display unit 37a and the symbol display device 41. In addition, the MPU 52 starts measuring the variation display time when the variation command and the type command are transmitted.

  Further, in the special figure special electric control process, when the variable display time corresponding to the game time has elapsed during execution of one game time, the special figure display unit 37a performs the big game occurrence lottery process and the distribution of the current game time. A stop result corresponding to the result of the determination process is displayed, and measurement of a fixed display time (specifically, 0.5 sec) is started. And the state where the stop result was displayed on the special figure display part 37a is maintained over the fixed display time. When the fixed display time has elapsed, if the current game time corresponds to the result of losing, a new game time is started on the condition that the hold information is stored in the hold storage area 54b. Execute the process. If no hold information is stored, the process waits until new hold information is acquired.

  On the other hand, if the current game time corresponds to the jackpot result, a process for starting the opening / closing execution mode is executed. At the start, an opening command indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60. In the special figure special electric control process, a process for starting each round game and a process for ending each round game are executed. In each of these processes, an open command indicating that the round game is started is transmitted to the sound emission control device 60, and a close command indicating that the round game is ended is transmitted to the sound light control device 60. Further, in the special figure special electric control process, when the opening / closing execution mode is ended, an ending command indicating that is sent to the sound emission control device 60, and the jackpot occurrence lottery mode and the support mode after the opening / closing execution mode are set. Execute the process. In the opening / closing execution mode, for example, an opening period occurs over a period of 3 seconds, for example, and an effect is made to allow the player to recognize that the opening / closing execution mode has occurred during this opening period. Thereafter, a round game in which opening and closing of the special electricity prize winning device 32 is executed is executed a predetermined number of times. Then, after a predetermined number of round games have been executed, an ending period is generated over a period of, for example, 5 seconds, and an effect that enables the player to recognize that the opening / closing execution mode ends in this ending period is executed. .

  After executing the special figure special electric control process of step S213 in the timer interruption process, the normal figure electric power control process is executed in step S214. In the ordinary map / electric power control process, when a winning to the through gate 35 is generated, a process for acquiring the retained information on the ordinary map side is executed and the retained information on the ordinary map side is stored. In addition, a release determination is performed on the hold information, and a process for performing an effect for a normal diagram is executed using the release determination as a trigger. Further, based on the result of the opening determination, a process for opening and closing the utility wire 34a of the second working port 34 is executed.

  In the subsequent step S215, based on the processing results of the immediately preceding step S213 and step S214, output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information corresponding to the special figure display unit 37a to the special figure hold display unit 37b is set. At the same time, output information for reflecting the increase / decrease number of the hold information corresponding to the general map display unit 38a to the general map hold display unit 38b is set. In step S215, the output information for updating the display content of the special figure display unit 37a is set based on the processing results of the immediately preceding steps S213 and S214, and the display content of the general map display unit 38a is set. Set the output information to be updated.

  In the subsequent step S216, the contents of the command and signal received from the payout control device 55 are confirmed, and a payout state receiving process for performing a process corresponding to the confirmation result is executed. In step S217, a payout output process for setting a prize ball command as an output target is executed. In the subsequent step S218, an external information setting process for controlling the start and end of the output of the external signal according to the processing results of the various processes executed in the current timer interrupt process is executed. Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is terminated.

<Audio emission control device 60>
Next, the sound emission control device 60 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the sound emission control device 60 includes a sound emission control board 61 on which an MPU 62 is mounted. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 62 and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 63 is executed. A RAM 64, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated.

  The ROM 63 is a storage means (that is, a non-volatile storage means) that can be randomly accessed when reading a control program or fixed value data and does not require external power supply for storage retention. Specifically, a NOR type cache memory is used. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of memory used as the ROM 63 is arbitrary as long as random access is possible. In addition, a configuration in which the control and calculation portion, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 are integrated into one chip is not essential, and each function may be mounted as a separate chip, and some functions may be configured as separate chips. It is good also as the structure mounted.

  The MPU 62 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control device 50 and the production operation device 48 are connected to the input side of the MPU 62. A display light emitting unit 44 and a speaker unit 45 are connected to the output side of the MPU 62, and a display CPU 72 described later of the display control device 70 is connected thereto.

<Display control device 70>
Next, the display control device 70 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the display control device 70 includes a display control board 71 on which a display CPU 72, a work RAM 73, a memory module 74, a VRAM 75, and a video display processor (VDP) 76 are mounted. .

  The display CPU 72 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 70, and reads, interprets, and executes a control program and the like. Specifically, the display CPU 72 is connected to an input port 77 mounted on the display control board 71 via a bus, and various commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 72 through the input port 77. Is done. Note that the display CPU 72 receiving a command from the sound emission control device 60 is not limited to a structure that directly receives a command from the sound light emission control device 60, and includes a structure that receives a command relayed to the relay board. It is.

  The display CPU 72 is connected to the work RAM 73, the memory module 74, and the VRAM 75 via a bus, and transfers various data stored in the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 based on commands received from the sound emission control device 60. Instruct the transfer. Further, the display CPU 72 is connected to the VDP 76 via a bus, and performs a drawing instruction for causing the symbol display device 41 to output an image signal based on a command received from the sound emission control device 60. Hereinafter, the memory module 74, the work RAM 73, the VRAM 75, and the VDP 76 will be described.

  The memory module 74 stores control data including a control program and fixed value data in advance, and includes sprite data such as symbols and characters displayed on the symbol display device 41, background data, and moving image data. Various image data are stored in advance. The memory module 74 has a non-volatile semiconductor memory that does not require external power supply for storage. Incidentally, although the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, this storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is executed well. Further, the memory module 74 is used as a non-write and read-only memory (ROM) when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  Here, each sprite data includes at least a combination of bitmap format data that defines the outline and pattern of the character and a color palette table that is referred to when determining the display color at each pixel of the bitmap image. Yes. The background data is stored and held as JPEG format data in a state where still image data is compressed. The moving image data will be described in detail later.

  The work RAM 73 is storage means for temporarily storing the control data read and transferred from the memory module 74 and temporarily storing flags and the like. The work RAM 73 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply for storage and retention, and in detail, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used. The storage capacity is 1 Gbit, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is executed well. The work RAM 73 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  Based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 72 to the memory module 74, control data is transferred from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73. The display CPU 72 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 73 into an internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processes.

  The VRAM 75 is a storage unit for temporarily storing various data necessary for image output to the symbol display device 41. The VRAM 75 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires external power supply for storage and holding, and in detail, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to SDRAM, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM or dual port RAM may be used. The storage capacity is 2 Gbits, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control device 70 is satisfactorily executed. The VRAM 75 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  The VRAM 75 includes a development buffer 81. Image data is transferred from the memory module 74 to the development buffer 81 based on a data transfer instruction from the VDP 76 to the memory module 74. The VRAM 75 is provided with a frame buffer 82 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 76. The VRAM 75 may be built in the VDP 76.

  The VDP 76 is an image generation device that performs drawing on the symbol display device 41 by specifically processing data stored in the development buffer 81 based on a drawing instruction from the display CPU 72. Yes, it is a kind of drawing circuit that operates an image processing device 41b incorporated in the symbol display device 41 so as to drive and control the liquid crystal display unit 41a. Since the VDP 76 is an IC chip, it is also called a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 76 should be said to be a microcomputer chip with a drawing-dedicated firmware.

  Specifically, the VDP 76 includes a control unit 91, a register 92, a moving picture decoder 93, and a display circuit 94. These circuits are connected to each other via a bus, and are also connected to an I / F 95 for the display CPU 72 and an I / F 96 for the VRAM 75.

  The VDP 76 causes the register 92 to store a drawing list as drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 72. When the drawing list is stored in the register 92, the control unit 91 starts a program according to the drawing list and executes a predetermined process. In addition, it is good also as a structure by which all the control programs for the control part 91 to operate | move are provided with a drawing list, the memory which memorize | stored the control program previously is built in the control part 91, the content of the said control program and a drawing list, and Thus, the control unit 91 may execute a predetermined process. Alternatively, the control program may be read from the memory module 74 in advance.

  As the above process, the control unit 91 reads the image data stored in the memory module 74 into the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. Further, the control unit 91 creates drawing data for one frame in the frame buffer 82 by using (or processing) the image data read out to the development buffer 81. The drawing data for one frame refers to data necessary for displaying an image at one update timing in a configuration in which an image on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 is updated at a predetermined update timing. Say.

  Here, the frame buffer 82 is provided with a plurality of frame regions 82a and 82b. Specifically, a first frame region 82a and a second frame region 82b are provided. Each of the frame regions 82a and 82b is set to a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame. Specifically, each of the frame regions 82a and 82b includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to the dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display unit 41a (that is, the display surface P) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color to display. More specifically, a full color method is employed, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) in each dot. Corresponding to this, in each unit area, 1 byte (8 bits) is assigned to each RGB color. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the full-color method, and for example, in a configuration that can display only 256 colors in each dot, the storage capacity required to store color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

  Since the first frame area 82a and the second frame area 82b are provided in the frame buffer 82, drawing on the symbol display device 41 is executed using drawing data created in one frame area. The creation of drawing data to be used in the future is executed for other frame regions. That is, a double buffer system is adopted as the frame buffer 82.

  In the display circuit 94, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display unit 41a is generated based on the drawing data created in the first frame region 82a or the second frame region 82b, and the image signal is sent to the display circuit 94. The signal is output to the symbol display device 41 through the connected output port 78. Specifically, the drawing data is transferred from the frame areas 82 a and 82 b to be output to the display circuit 94. The transferred drawing data is converted into gradation data by adjusting the resolution by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the symbol display device 41. Based on the gradation data, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the symbol display device 41 is generated and output. Note that the display circuit 94 also outputs a synchronization signal such as a horizontal synchronization signal or a vertical synchronization signal. The moving picture decoder 93 decodes the moving image data transferred to the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75.

<Processing Configuration of MPU 62 of Sound Emission Control Device 60>
Next, processing executed by the MPU 62 (hereinafter referred to as the sound light side MPU 62) of the sound emission control device 60 will be described. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process repeatedly executed at a relatively short period (for example, 4 msec) by the sound light side MPU 62.

  First, in step S301, a table setting process is performed to set a control table used to execute the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44, the sound output control of the speaker unit 45, and the control of the display control device 70. To do. In the table setting process, for example, a control pattern table is set for performing a process corresponding to a command received from the MPU 52 of the main controller 50 (hereinafter referred to as the main MPU 52). In the subsequent step S302, command selection processing for instructing the display CPU 72 of the contents of display control of the symbol display device 41 is executed. In the command selection process, a command is output to the display CPU 72 according to the control table read out in the table setting process in step S301.

  Thereafter, in step S303, a light emission control process for performing light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 is performed according to the control table read out in the table setting process in step S301. In step S304, sound output control processing for performing sound output control of the speaker unit 45 is executed. In the sound output control process, sound output control of the speaker unit 45 is performed according to the control table read out in the table setting process in step S301. Thereafter, pointer update processing is executed in step S305. In the pointer update process, the pointer information in the current control table is updated to the next pointer information.

<Table setting process>
FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the table setting process executed in step S301 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

  When the variation command and the type command are received from the main MPU 52 (step S401: YES), a game result storing process is executed (step S402). Specifically, from the information included in the type command, specify information on which is the result of the jackpot occurrence lottery and distribution lottery determined by the main MPU 52 at the start of the current game round, The specified information is written into the RAM 64.

  Thereafter, the notice lottery process is executed on condition that the change display time corresponding to the change command received this time from the main MPU 52 is the change display time corresponding to the possibility of occurrence of the notice effect (step S403: YES). (Step S404). In the notice lottery process, it is determined by lottery whether or not the symbol display device 41 performs a notice effect in the current game round. As described above, as described above, in the situation where the symbols are variably displayed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 since the symbol display on the symbol display device 41 is started, as described above, In a situation where symbols are displayed in a variable manner in a plurality of symbol sequences, a mode in which a character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, and a background screen as a previous mode Includes a different predetermined mode, and a pattern on the symbol row Z1 to Z3 having a predetermined mode different from the previous mode. The notice effect may occur in any game time when the reach effect is performed or when the reach effect is not performed, but the case where the reach effect is performed is higher than the case where the reach effect is not performed. It is set to occur with probability. In addition, the notice effect is more likely to occur in game times corresponding to any of the jackpot results than in game times corresponding to the missed results, and the game times corresponding to the jackpot results have a lower appearance rate. Is set to be easy to occur.

  In the notice lottery process, the notice lottery table T1 stored in advance in the ROM 63 of the sound emission control device 60 (hereinafter referred to as the sound light side ROM 63) is stored in the RAM 64 of the sound light emission control device 60 (hereinafter referred to as the sound light side RAM 64). read out. The notice lottery table T1 is prepared in a one-to-one correspondence with the combination of the variation command and the type command. Therefore, in the notice lottery process, the notice lottery table T1 corresponding to the change command and the type command received from the main MPU 52 this time is read from the sound side ROM 63.

  FIG. 11A is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the notice lottery table T1. In the notice lottery table T1, the notice lottery result and the numerical range of the notice lottery counter are associated with each other. As the notice lottery result, non-occurrence in which no notice effect is generated, a first notice effect in which the notice effect is executed in the first aspect, and a second notice effect in which the notice effect is executed in the second aspect are set. . In the first notice effect, for example, an individual image for the first notice effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41 so as to operate in a predetermined manner. It is displayed on the symbol display device 41 so as to operate. The notice lottery counter is provided in the sound light side RAM 64. The notice lottery counter is a loop counter that can take any value from “0” to “239”, and is periodically incremented by “1” (for example, 4 msec), and becomes “0” when the maximum value is reached. Return. As shown in FIG. 11A, in the notice lottery table T1, possible values for the notice lottery counter are assigned to any of the notice lottery results.

  It should be noted that depending on the type of the notice lottery table T1, the type of the notice effect to be drawn may be different. In this case, although the types of the notice effects to be drawn are the same among the different types of the notice lottery tables T1, the selection ratio of the notice effects may be different, or between the different types of the notice lottery tables T1. There may be cases where some or all of the types of notice effects to be drawn are different.

  In the notice lottery process, the value at the time of the notice lottery counter is acquired, and the obtained value is collated with the notice lottery table T1 read this time. Then, the notice lottery result corresponding to the value obtained from the notice lottery counter is obtained as the result of this notice lottery process.

  Returning to the description of the table setting process (FIG. 10), if a negative determination is made in step S403 or if the process of step S404 is executed, the change display time corresponding to the change command received this time from the main MPU 52 is reached. Reach effect lottery processing is executed (step S406) on condition that it is a variable display time corresponding to the occurrence of the effect (step S405: YES). That is, when the game time variation display time determined by the main MPU 52 corresponds to the occurrence of the reach effect, the type of reach effect to be executed is determined in the reach effect lottery process, and the main MPU 52 When the variation display time of the game times determined in (1) does not correspond to the occurrence of the reach effect, the reach effect lottery process is not executed.

  As described above, in the reach effect, the symbols are stopped and displayed for a part of the plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41, thereby responding to the occurrence of the high-frequency winning mode. A display state is displayed in which a combination of reach symbols for which a combination of jackpot symbols is likely to be established is displayed, and in that state, the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol columns, and a reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image in the background image. In addition, there is included a technique for performing a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface P after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols. The reach production is more likely to occur in game times corresponding to any jackpot result than in game times corresponding to a miss result, and the game times corresponding to jackpot results have a lower reach rate. It is set so as to be easily generated.

  In the reach effect lottery process, the reach lottery table T2 stored in advance in the sound light side ROM 63 is read into the sound light side RAM 64. The reach lottery table T2 is prepared in a one-to-one correspondence with the combination of the variation command and the type command. Therefore, in the reach effect lottery process, the reach lottery table T2 corresponding to the change command and the type command received from the main MPU 52 this time is read from the sound light side ROM 63.

  FIG. 11B is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of the reach lottery table T2. In the reach lottery table T2, the reach lottery result and the numerical range of the reach lottery counter are associated with each other. As the reach lottery results, the first reach effect in which the reach effect is executed in the first mode, the second reach effect in which the reach effect is executed in the second mode, and the third reach in which the reach effect is executed in the third mode. Production is set. In the first reach effect, for example, an individual image for the first reach effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41 so as to operate in a predetermined manner. For example, in the second reach effect, an individual image for the second reach effect is displayed in a predetermined manner. It is displayed on the symbol display device 41 so as to operate. In the third reach effect, for example, an individual image for the third reach effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41 so as to operate in a predetermined manner. The reach lottery counter is provided in the sound light side RAM 64. The reach lottery counter is a loop counter that can take any value from “0” to “239”, and is periodically incremented by “1” (for example, 4 msec), and becomes “0” when the maximum value is reached. Return. As shown in FIG. 11 (b), in the reach lottery table T2, possible values for the reach lottery counter are assigned to any of the reach lottery results.

  It should be noted that the type of reach effect to be selected may be different depending on the type of the reach lottery table T2. In this case, the reach effect selection rate may be different between different types of reach lottery tables T2, but the reach effect selection rate may be different, or between different types of reach lottery tables T2. There may be cases where some or all of the types of reach effects that are subject to lottery are different.

  In the reach production lottery process, the value at that time of the reach lottery counter is acquired, and the acquired value is collated with the reach lottery table T2 read this time. Then, the reach lottery result corresponding to the value acquired from the reach lottery counter is acquired as the result of the current reach production lottery process.

  Returning to the description of the table setting process (FIG. 10), if a negative determination is made in step S405, or if the process of step S406 is executed, a stop symbol determination process is executed (step S407). In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is either a normal jackpot result or a 15R probability variable jackpot result, it corresponds to a stop result in which the same symbol combination is established on one effective line L1 to L5 The determined information is determined as information on the current stop result. In this case, the same odd symbol combination is selected for the 15R probability variation jackpot result, while the same even symbol combination can be selected for both the normal jackpot result and the 15R probability variation jackpot result. Note that the effective lines L1 to L5 on which the same symbol combination is stopped and displayed are randomly determined by lottery or the like. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which can select the combination of the same odd symbol even if it is a normal jackpot result.

  In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is an explicit 2R probability variation jackpot result, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols is not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and one effective line L1 Information corresponding to the stop result in which a specific symbol combination (“3 · 4 · 1”) is established on L5 is determined as information on the current stop result. In this case, the effective lines L1 to L5 are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

  In the stop symbol determination process, if the game result of the current game round is an out-of-game result, the presence or absence of the reach effect is specified from the contents of the combination of the variation command and the type command. And when reach production occurs, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbol and the combination of the specific symbol are not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and on one or two effective lines L1 to L5 Information corresponding to a stop result in which a combination of reach symbols is established is determined as information on the current stop result. On the other hand, when the reach effect does not occur, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols and the specific symbol combination are not established on all the effective lines L1 to L5, and the reach is achieved on all the effective lines L1 to L5. Information corresponding to the stop result in which the symbol combination is not established is determined as information on the current stop result.

  Thereafter, control pattern table setting processing is executed (step S408). In the setting process of the control pattern table, as a result of the notice lottery process (step S404), the presence / absence of the reach effect is generated, when the reach effect occurs, the result of the reach effect lottery process (step S406), and the stop symbol determination process ( The control pattern table corresponding to the combination of the results of step S407) is read from the sound light side ROM 63 and stored in the sound light side RAM 64.

  The control pattern table T3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of the control pattern table T3 that can be set when the notice effect and the reach effect are executed in the game times that result in the 15R probability variation jackpot result.

  As shown in FIG. 12, in the control pattern table T3, pointer information corresponding to the number of frames corresponding to the variable display time of the target game times is set. And command output presence / absence information are set.

  The task content information is information set to perform light emission control and sound output control corresponding to the current game round, and the display light emitting unit 44 emits light in a manner corresponding to the task content information in each frame. Control is performed and sound output control of the speaker unit 45 is performed. Specifically, for the control pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 12, data at the start of variation is set in the pointer information “0”, and data at the start of the notice effect is set in the pointer information “200”. , “300” pointer information is set to the end of the notice effect, “400” pointer information is set to the normal reach start data, and “700” pointer information is set to the super reach start time. The data at the start of the definite effect is set in the pointer information “1000”, and the data at the start of the standby display is set in the pointer information “1400”. Each piece of the pointer information corresponds to a delimiter timing such as the start of the effect, the change of the effect, and the end of the effect. Further, in the pointer information other than these, data for enabling light emission control and sound output control between the division timings is set.

  The information on the presence / absence of command output is information indicating the presence / absence of command output from the sound light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 and the type of the command. The command output to the display CPU 72 is performed according to the control pattern table T3 in the command selection process (step S302) in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9), so that the image content in the symbol display device 41 and the light emission in the display light emitting unit 44 are emitted. It becomes possible to associate the contents with the sound output contents in the speaker unit 45. That is, according to the content of the moving image in the symbol display apparatus 41, the display light emission part 44 performs the light effect, and the speaker part 45 executes the sound output effect. Specifically, for the control pattern table T3 shown in FIG. 12, command data is set for pointer information of “0” in which data at the start of variation is set in the task content. Therefore, at the start of the change of game times, display control is started in the display CPU 72 based on command transmission from the sound light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72. Also, in the contents of the task, each pointer information in which the data at the start of the notice effect, the data at the start of the normal reach, the data at the start of the super reach, the data at the start of the final effect and the data at the start of the standby display are set. Specifically, command data is set for each pointer information of “200”, “400”, “700”, “1000”, and “1400”. Therefore, within the range of effects for the game times that start when a predetermined start trigger occurs that the variation command and the type command are transmitted from the main MPU 52, the effect divisions included in the effects for the game times are When the type changes, display control corresponding to the new effect section is started in the display CPU 72 based on command transmission from the sound light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72.

  It should be noted that the control pattern table T3 is an effect for demonstration display in a situation where an effect for the opening / closing execution mode and an effect for the game rotation and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode are not executed in addition to the effect for the game times. It is provided corresponding to. Since the control pattern table T3 is set corresponding to various situations as described above, some control pattern table T3 is read out to the sound light side RAM 64 in a state where the operating power is supplied to the sound light side MPU 62. It is in the state.

  Thereafter, the process for determining the variable display time is executed (step S409). In this process, information on the fluctuation display time of the current game time is specified from the contents of the fluctuation command received this time from the main MPU 52, and the information on the specified fluctuation display time is described with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, it is set in a fluctuation time counter 64 a provided in the sound light side RAM 64. The variation time counter 64a is a counter for the sound light side MPU 62 to specify the timing at which the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 41 is ended and the symbol fixed display is started in the current game round. The value set in the variation time counter 64a is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is started in the sound light side MPU 62, that is, every 4 msec.

  A variation display mode of symbols in the case where an effect for game times is executed will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b). FIG. 13A is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the symbols are displayed in a swing manner on the symbol display device 41, and FIG. 13B is a diagram for explaining how the symbols are displayed on the symbol display device 41 in a definite manner. It is explanatory drawing for.

  Game times that result in complete losing results (game times that result in losing results without causing a reach effect) or normal reach display (reach effects are displayed using symbols in the symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 without displaying a reach effect character) In the game times in which the display content is performed), the symbol variation display of all symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 is started in the high-speed variation display which is a low identification mode, and thereafter each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 is displayed in a predetermined order. The display is switched to the low-speed fluctuation display which is a high identification mode, and the standby display is started in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 in the predetermined order. Then, after the state in which the standby display is performed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is continued for a predetermined period, each symbol that has been displayed on standby is confirmed and displayed as a final stop display, and the confirmed display state is confirmed and displayed. Continue over time.

  As shown in FIG. 13A, the standby display is a standby area SA1 that is virtually set to be three in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. This is a display state in which a symbol is waiting at SA9. When only the upper symbol row Z1 is in the standby display and the symbol scroll display is continued in the remaining symbol rows Z2 and Z3, one symbol is waiting in each of the standby areas SA1 to SA3 corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1. It will be in the state. In the state where the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are in the standby display and the symbol scroll display is continued in the middle symbol row Z2, the standby areas SA1 to SA3 and the lower symbol row Z3 corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1. One symbol is waiting in each of the waiting areas SA7 to SA9 corresponding to. Further, in a state where all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are displayed on standby, one symbol is waiting on each of the standby areas SA1 to SA9. In the standby display, the symbols waiting in the standby areas SA1 to SA9 are not statically displayed but are variably displayed within the same standby areas SA1 to SA9. Specifically, each symbol that is the target of the standby display is a range that includes the stop position in the corresponding standby areas SA1 to SA9 and swings up and down or left and right within the range sandwiching the stop position. Move.

  As shown in FIG. 13 (b), the confirmed display means that each of the symbols that are displayed on standby in the standby areas SA1 to SA9 of each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is displayed in the corresponding standby areas SA1 to SA9. This is a display state in which the variable display within the range is terminated and the corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed at the stop positions of the standby areas SA1 to SA9. By performing the definite display in this way, it becomes possible for the player to clearly recognize the symbol stop result in the symbol display device 41 of the current game time.

  On the other hand, in the game times in which the super reach display is performed, the change display of the symbols is started, and the symbols of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, which are a part of the symbol rows, are in the standby areas SA1 to SA3, SA7 to SA9. And a reach line is formed, and then a super reach image is displayed. Thereafter, in a state in which a combination of jackpot symbols or a combination of outreach symbols is formed, symbols are displayed on standby in each standby area on all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 over a predetermined period. Then, the symbols are fixedly displayed, and the state of the fixed display is continued for a fixed display time.

  Returning to the description of the table setting process (FIG. 10), the execution execution control is performed according to the control pattern table set in step S408 (step S410: YES). When the value of the variation time counter 64a of the RAM 64 is “0” (step S411: YES), the confirmation display time (specifically 0.5 sec) is displayed on the confirmation time counter 64b provided in the sound side RAM 64. ) Is set (step S412). The value set in the fixed time counter 64b is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is started in the sound light side MPU 62, that is, every 4 msec. In addition, a fixed display table for determining the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output control mode of the speaker unit 45 during the fixed display time is read from the sound light side ROM 63 and stored in the sound light side RAM 64 (step S413). In the fixed display table, control data for executing light emission control and sound output control for the fixed display time is set. In practice, however, the display light emitting unit 44 is turned off during the fixed display time, and the speaker The unit 45 is in a mute state. Thereafter, a confirmed display start command is transmitted to the display CPU 72 (step S414). Thereby, in the display CPU 72, each symbol displayed on standby in the symbol display device 41 is confirmed and displayed as it is, and the confirmed display state is maintained for a fixed display time (specifically, 0.5 sec). Display control of the symbol display device 41 is performed.

  Here, in the main MPU 52, when the variation display time corresponding to the variation command and the type command has elapsed, the special figure display unit 37a corresponds to the result of the big hit occurrence lottery process and the distribution determination process of the current game time. The stop result to be displayed is displayed, and the state is maintained over the fixed display time. The variation display time measured by the main side MPU 52 is the same as the variation display time set in the step S409 in the sound light side MPU 62, and the final display time measured by the main side MPU 52 is the same in the sound light side MPU 62. This is the same as the fixed display time set in step S412. Therefore, the symbol display device 41 starts the symbol fixed display at the timing when the main MPU 52 confirms the passage of the variable display time, and the symbol display device starts at the timing when the main MPU 52 confirms the passage of the fixed display time. In 41, the symbol fixed display ends.

  In the table setting process, in addition to the above processes, other processes are executed in step S415. In other processing, for example, when an opening command is received from the main MPU 52, a control pattern table for executing an effect for the opening / closing execution mode is read, and an ending command is received from the main MPU 52. Performs processing for ending the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Further, in a situation where neither the effect for the game times nor the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is executed, the control pattern table for executing the demonstration display effect is read.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the lottery process for determining the presence / absence and contents of the notice effect is performed in the sound side MPU 62 (step S404) and the reach effect lottery for determining the contents of the reach effect is performed. Processing (step S406) is executed. As a result, it is not necessary to determine the presence and content of the notice effect in the main MPU 52, and further, it is not necessary to determine the content of the reach effect, thereby reducing the processing load on the main MPU 52 with respect to the execution control of the effect for game times. It becomes possible to do.

  However, due to the fact that both the notice effect and the reach effect are determined by lottery at the sound light side MPU 62, the variable display time determined by the control pattern table T3 selected by the sound light side MPU 62 is changed to the main MPU 52. It may happen that it does not coincide with the variation display time determined in this way. That is, if the lottery for the notice effect and the lottery for the reach effect are executed while being completely matched with the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52, each of the variable display times that can be determined by the main MPU 52 is made to correspond. Therefore, it is necessary to prepare a plurality of types of notice effects and a plurality of types of reach effects at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10. In this case, the types of notice effects and the types of reach effects become enormous. Also, even if a plurality of types of notice effects and a plurality of types of reach effects are prepared at the design stage of the pachinko machine 10 in correspondence with each of the variable display times that can be determined by the main MPU 52, the main MPU 52 If the lottery of the notice effect and the lottery of the reach effect are executed while completely matching the determined variable display time, there will be a restriction on the design of the notice effect and the reach effect. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the variation display time determined by the control pattern table T3 is allowed to not coincide with the variation display time determined by the main MPU 52, and waiting for the end of the game-playing effect. The display and the final display are favorably performed. The configuration will be described below.

  14A and 14B show various parts tables T4 to T4 that are used when the control pattern table T3 is set in the control pattern table setting process (step S408) in the table setting process (FIG. 10). It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating T9.

  The parts tables T4 to T9 are tables for generating part or all of one control pattern table T3, and are stored in the sound light side ROM 63 in advance. The parts tables T4 to T9 are classified into a plurality of table groups, and one part table read from one table group may be used as it is as one control pattern table T3, or from each table group. There may be a case where one control pattern table T3 is generated by combining the read parts tables.

  As the table group, there are a table group TG1 for the first period and a table group TG2 for the second period. In the table group TG1 for the first period, in the case of the effect for game times, when the symbol variation display is switched from the scroll display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1, the lower symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. The parts table corresponding to the period from the start of the variable display until the standby display is started in the lower symbol row Z3, and the case where all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are switched to the standby display at the same time by the effect for game play. A parts table corresponding to the entire period of the game-use effects is included. When the notice effect is executed as the effect for the game times, the control data for executing the notice effect is set in the part tables T5 and T6 included in the table group TG1 for the first period. For example, control data for executing the first notice effect is set in the parts table T5 for the first notice effect, and control data for executing the second notice effect is set in the parts table T6 for the second notice effect. Is set. Further, control data corresponding to a period until the standby display is started in the lower symbol row Z3 of the game times when no notice effect is generated is set in the parts table T4 for no notice effect. The table group TG1 for the first period includes parts tables other than the part tables T4 to T6 exemplified above.

  In the table group TG2 for the second period, in the case of an effect for game play, when the symbol variation display is switched from the scroll display to the standby display in the order of the upper symbol row Z1, the lower symbol row Z3, and the middle symbol row Z2. A part table corresponding to a period from when standby display is started in the lower symbol row Z3 to when standby display is ended in the middle symbol row Z2 is included. When a reach effect is executed as an effect for game times, control data for executing the reach effect is set in the part tables T7 to T9 included in the table group TG2 for the second period. For example, the control data for executing the first reach effect is set in the parts table T7 for the first reach effect, and the control data for executing the second reach effect is set in the parts table T8 for the second reach effect. The control data for executing the third reach effect is set in the part table T9 for the third reach effect. The table group TG2 for the second period includes parts tables other than the part tables T7 to T9 exemplified above. The parts table includes a parts table when the reach effect is not executed.

  In the control pattern table setting process in step S408 of the table setting process (FIG. 10), one part table is read out from the table group TG1 for the first period in the sound light side ROM 63. In this case, for example, this is the game time that is started when the number of the hold information stored in the hold storage area 54b is the upper limit number of game times that are the result of losing. When the change display time of the game times corresponds to the change display time in which the change from the scroll display of the symbol change display to the standby display corresponds to all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 simultaneously, the first period table One parts table read out from the group TG1 is set as the control pattern table T3 as it is.

  On the other hand, when the change display time of the current game time corresponds to the change display time that occurs sequentially in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 when the change of the symbol change display to the standby display corresponds to the notice lottery process (step One part table corresponding to the result of S404) is read out from the table group TG1 for the first period in the sound side ROM 63. If the game times do not generate reach effects, one part table corresponding to the current variable display time is read from the table group TG2 for the second period in the sound side ROM 63, and game times where reach effects occur. If so, one part table corresponding to the result of the reach effect lottery process (step S405) is read out from the table group TG2 for the second period in the sound light side ROM 63. Then, a part table read from the table group TG1 for the first period and a part table read from the table group TG2 for the second period are combined to set as one control pattern table T3.

  In a situation where one part table is set as it is as one control pattern table T3, the type of the control pattern table T3 corresponding to one variable display time determined by the main MPU 52 is uniquely determined. On the other hand, in a situation where one control pattern table T3 is created by combining a plurality of parts tables, there are a plurality of types of control pattern tables T3 corresponding to one variable display time determined by the main MPU 52. Will exist. For example, the notice lottery process (step S404) is executed using the notice lottery table T1 shown in FIG. 11A, and the reach effect lottery process is made using the reach lottery table T2 shown in FIG. In the situation where (Step S406) is executed, a part table T4 for non-announcement effect generation, a parts table T5 for first notice effect, and a part for second notice effect from the table group TG1 for the first period. One of the tables T6 is selected, and a part table T7 for the first reach effect, a part table T8 for the second reach effect, and a part table T9 for the third reach effect are selected from the table group TG2 for the second period. Either one is selected.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the variable display time defined by the parts tables T4 to T9. FIG. 15 (a1) shows the variable display time determined by the parts table T4 for non-announcement effects, and FIG. 15 (a2) shows the variable display time determined by the parts table T5 for the first notice effects. (A3) shows the variable display time determined by the parts table T6 for the second notice effect. FIG. 15 (b1) shows the variable display time determined by the part table T7 for the first reach effect, and FIG. 15 (b2) shows the variable display time determined by the part table T8 for the second reach effect. FIG. 15B3 shows the variable display time determined by the third reach production parts table T9.

  As shown in FIGS. 15 (a1) to 15 (a3), the variable display time determined by the parts table T5 for the first notice effect is longer than the change display time determined by the parts table T4 for the notice effect non-occurrence. The change display time determined by the part table T6 for the second notice effect is longer by (Ta1-Ta1) than the change display time set by the parts table T5 for the first notice effect. Further, as shown in FIGS. 15 (b1) to 15 (b3), the variable display time determined by the second reach effect parts table T8 is longer than the variable display time determined by the first reach effect parts table T7. Is longer by the time (Tb1), and the variable display time determined by the third reach effect parts table T9 is longer than the variable display time determined by the second reach effect parts table T8 (Tb2-Tb1).

  In the above configuration, the notice lottery process (step S404) is executed using the notice lottery table T1 shown in FIG. 11A, and the reach production lottery is made using the reach lottery table T2 shown in FIG. When the process (step S406) is executed, the variable display time determined by the control pattern table varies depending on the combination of the part tables T4 to T9 to be used. Specifically, when the combination of the parts table T4 for non-announcement effect generation and the parts table T7 for first reach effect is selected, the variable display time becomes the shortest, and the parts table T6 for second notice effect When the combination with the third reach production parts table T9 is selected, the variation display time becomes the longest, but the difference between these variation display times is (Ta2 + Tb2). Therefore, the variation display time determined by the sound light side MPU 62 can be different for one variation command transmitted from the main side MPU 52.

  However, the longest variation display time among the variation display times that can be selected for one variation command is equal to or less than the variation display time corresponding to the variation command, that is, the variation display time determined by the main MPU 52. Thus, a notice lottery table T1 and a reach lottery table T2 that are selected for a combination of a variation command and a type command are set. That is, whichever notice lottery table T1 is used and which reach lottery table T2 is used, it corresponds to the control pattern table created by combining a plurality of part tables. The variable display time is equal to or shorter than the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52.

  In the configuration in which the longest variation display time among the variation display times that can be selected for one variation command is less than or equal to the variation display time determined by the main MPU 52, the variation time counter of the sound light side RAM 64 is used. The control corresponding to the final pointer set in the control pattern table ends before the variable display time measured using 64a elapses. On the other hand, when the control corresponding to the final pointer is completed before the variable display time measured using the variable time counter 64a elapses, the value of the pointer to be controlled is returned. The standby display is continued. A process for returning the value of the pointer will be described. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process executed in step S305 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

  In the pointer update processing, 1 is added to the value of the pointer information to be referred to among the pointer information used when specifying the control data to be used in the control table (for example, control pattern table) that is currently set. (Step S501). As a result, in the command selection process (step S302), the light emission control process (step S303), and the sound output control process (step S304) in the next processing time of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9), the value of the pointer information updated this time is set. Corresponding control data is used.

  After that, the value of the pointer information to be referred to is larger than the value of the final pointer determined in the control table, and the control table currently set is a control pattern table for game times. (Step S502 and Step S503: YES), pointer information correction processing is executed (Step S504). In the pointer information correction process, the control data corresponding to the pointer information corresponding to the timing at which the standby display is started is the command selection process (step S302), the light emission control process ( The pointer information value to be referred to is corrected so as to be used in step S303) and the sound output control process (step S304). Thereby, even if the control corresponding to the last pointer is finished before the fluctuation display time measured using the fluctuation time counter 64a elapses, the standby display is continued until the fluctuation display time elapses. It will be.

  When the pointer information correction process (step S504) is executed, a standby extension command is transmitted to the display CPU 72 (step S505). When the display CPU 72 receives the standby extension command, the display CPU 72 sets a data table for continuing the standby display so that the standby display is continued in the symbol display device 41.

  Next, a state in which an effect for game times is executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 17 (a) shows the game period execution period, and FIGS. 17 (b1) and 17 (b2) show the execution control of the effect using the parts table read from the table group TG1 for the first period. 17 (c1) and FIG. 17 (c2) are periods in which production execution control is performed using the parts table read from the second period table group TG2. The second period is shown, FIGS. 17 (d1) and 17 (d2) show the standby display period, and FIGS. 17 (e1) and 17 (e2) show the fixed display period. 17 (b1), FIG. 17 (c1), FIG. 17 (d1), and FIG. 17 (e1), the notice lottery process (step S404) is performed using the notice lottery table T1 shown in FIG. A control pattern table (hereinafter referred to as the shortest correspondence table) which is executed and has the shortest variable display time when the reach effect lottery process (step S406) is executed using the reach lottery table T2 shown in FIG. 17 (b2), FIG. 17 (c2), FIG. 17 (d2) and FIG. 17 (e2) use the notice lottery table T1 shown in FIG. 11 (a). When the notice lottery process (step S404) is executed and the reach effect lottery process (step S406) is executed using the reach lottery table T2 shown in FIG. Longest variable display time become the control pattern table (hereinafter, referred to as maximum correspondence table) Te shows the case where is used.

  In both cases where the shortest correspondence table is used and when the longest correspondence table is used, at the timing t1, the game times are started as shown in FIG. 17A, and FIG. ) And the first period as shown in FIG. 17 (b2). After that, when the shortest correspondence table is used, the first period ends and the second period starts as shown in FIGS. 17B1 and 17C1 at the timing of t11. When used, the first period ends and the second period starts at the timing t21 as shown in FIGS. 17 (b2) and 17 (c2).

  After that, when the shortest correspondence table is used, as shown in FIGS. 17 (c1) and 17 (d1), the second period ends and the standby display period starts at the timing t12. If used, the second period ends and the standby display period starts at the timing t22 as shown in FIGS. 17 (c2) and 17 (d2). In this case, in the situation where the shortest correspondence table is used, the end timing of the standby display defined in the control pattern table is earlier than the elapsed timing of the variable display time, but the pointer update process (FIG. 16). When the pointer information correction process (step S504) is executed, the standby display is continued.

  Thereafter, whether the shortest correspondence table is used or the longest correspondence table is used, the fluctuation measured using the fluctuation time counter 64a of the sound light side RAM 64 at the timing t2. The display time has elapsed. Therefore, if the shortest correspondence table is used, as shown in FIGS. 17 (d1) and 17 (e1), the standby display period ends and the fixed display period starts, and the longest correspondence table is used. If so, as shown in FIG. 17 (d2) and FIG. 17 (e2), the standby display period ends and the fixed display period starts. Then, when the final display time elapses at the timing t3, the final display period ends as shown in FIGS. 17 (e1) and 17 (e2), and the current game time as shown in FIG. 17 (a). Ends.

  As described above, the notice side lottery process (step S404) for determining the presence / absence and contents of the notice effect is performed in the light side MPU 62 and the reach effect lottery process (step S406) for determining the contents of the reach effect is performed. Executed. As a result, it is not necessary to determine the presence and content of the notice effect in the main MPU 52, and further, it is not necessary to determine the content of the reach effect. Therefore, the processing load on the main MPU 52 is reduced with respect to the execution control of the effect for game times. Is planned. In addition, it is possible to diversify the presentation mode set for one combination of the variation command and the type command transmitted from the main MPU 52.

  Corresponds to the result of the notice lottery process and the result of the reach effect lottery process so that the variable display time determined by the control pattern table can be different even when the same fluctuation command is received from the main MPU 52. A control pattern table is set. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the processing load on the main MPU 52 and diversify the production mode while suitably designing the announcement production and the reach production.

  Even if the variable display time determined by the control pattern table selected with the same variable command as a trigger may be different, the symbol display device at a timing corresponding to the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52 The mode of the symbol variation display at 41 is switched from the standby display to the fixed display. Thereby, even if the variable display time determined by the control pattern table may be different, the effect for game times in the symbol display device 41 is terminated at a timing corresponding to the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52. It becomes possible.

  Even in the case where the same variation command is received from the main MPU 52, the longest variation display among the variation display times determined by these control pattern tables in a configuration in which the control pattern table to be used can be different. The time corresponds to the fluctuation display time or less determined by the main MPU 52. Then, when the control pattern table corresponding to the variable display time is shorter than the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52, until the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52 elapses. The symbol variation display mode in the symbol display device 41 is maintained in the standby display. As a result, regardless of which control pattern table is to be used, the display from the standby display to the fixed display occurs in the symbol display device 41 at the end of the game round. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event such as the sudden start of the fixed display in the middle of the process or the event that the fixed display of the symbols continues for a period longer than the normal fixed display period.

  The sound side RAM 64 is provided with a variation time counter 64a. The variation display time corresponding to the variation command received from the main MPU 52 is set in the variation time counter 64a, and the variation time counter 64a is set. When the variation display time measured using the time has elapsed, the symbol variation display mode in the symbol display device 41 is switched to the fixed display. Thereby, even in the case where the same variation command is received from the main MPU 52, in the configuration in which the variation display time determined by the control pattern table may be different, a command indicating the definite display start timing is displayed. Even if it does not transmit, it becomes possible to start a fixed display at the timing corresponding to the variable display time determined by the main MPU 52.

  Note that the following configuration may be applied as a configuration in which the variation display time determined by the control pattern table may be different even when the same variation command is received from the main MPU 52.

  The various part tables T7 to T9 included in the table group TG2 for the second period are controls corresponding to a time longer than the longest variable display time assumed as a situation in which the part tables T7 to T9 are used. A configuration in which data is set and control data for executing standby display is set as control data corresponding to a later period following the end timing. In this case, it is not necessary to execute correction processing for extending the standby display execution period on the control pattern table. However, it is necessary to end the use of the control pattern table at the timing when the game time variation display time has elapsed.

  -A control pattern table for performing the execution control of the production after the standby display is started is provided separately from the control pattern table for performing the production execution control before the start of the standby display, and the standby display starts. In such a case, the state may be switched to a state in which production execution control is performed based on the control pattern table for standby display. In this case, the same standby display control pattern table can be used in various situations by using the same standby display control pattern table for any game times. In this configuration, the standby display control pattern table is set as a table for performing standby display over a predetermined period, and it is necessary to perform standby display over a period longer than the predetermined period. Alternatively, the control pattern table for standby display may be used in a loop. Also, the control pattern table for standby display is set as a table that allows the standby display to be executed over the longest period assumed as the period in which the standby display is executed, and the variable display time of game times is set. When the time has elapsed, the use of the control pattern table for standby display may be terminated halfway.

  The measurement of the time for starting the definitive display is not limited to the configuration executed by the sound light side MPU 62, and when it is time to start the definitive display, the main MPU 52 to the sound light side MPU 62 When the command corresponding to it is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 62 and the command is received by the sound light side MPU 62, the sound light side MPU 62 may execute a process for starting the definite display.

  Even in the case where the same variation command is received from the main MPU 52, the longest variation among the variation display times determined by these control pattern tables in a configuration in which the control pattern table to be used can be different In place of the configuration in which the display time corresponds to the variable display time or less determined by the main MPU 52, the longest variable display time among the variable display times determined by the control pattern table is determined by the main MPU 52. It is good also as a structure which can become time longer than display time. In this case, it is necessary to end the effect during the execution of the effect for the game times. Therefore, in such a case, an effect for forced termination occurs, and the content corresponding to the results of the lottery occurrence lottery and type lottery corresponding to the forced termination effect, more specifically, the game The content corresponding to the determination result of the stop symbol determination process (step S407) in the first table setting process (FIG. 10) may be notified. More specifically, even when an effect such as a reach effect corresponding to a period before the standby display is being executed on the symbol display device 41, the game times of the game times are changed at the timing when the variable display time has elapsed. The combination of symbols determined as a stop result may be suddenly stopped and displayed in a state where the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed.

<Processing configuration of display CPU 72>
Next, processing executed by the display CPU 72 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process that is repeatedly activated by the display CPU 72 at a predetermined cycle, specifically, at a cycle of 20 msec.

  When the image signal for one frame is output to the symbol display device 41, the VDP 76 starts outputting the image signal from the dot at the upper left corner of the display surface P, and on the horizontal line including the dot at one end. Image signals are sequentially output for the arranged dots, and image signals are output from the left to the right dots in order from the top for each horizontal line. Then, an image signal is finally output for the dots in the lower right corner portion of the display surface P. In this case, the VDP 76 outputs a V interrupt signal to the display CPU 72 at the timing when the image signal is output with respect to the last dot, so that the display CPU 72 recognizes that the update of one frame image has been completed. The output cycle of this V interrupt signal is 20 msec, which is the same as the update cycle of an image for one frame. In this regard, the V interrupt processing can be regarded as being started in synchronization with reception of the V interrupt signal. However, even if the V interrupt signal is not received, the V interrupt process is newly started when 20 msec has elapsed since the previous V interrupt process was started.

  In the V interrupt processing, first, command analysis processing is executed (step S601). Specifically, the contents of the command stored in the command buffer of the work RAM 73 are analyzed. Here, when the display CPU 72 receives the strobe signal from the sound light side MPU 62, the display CPU 72 executes the command interruption process regardless of the process being executed at that time. In the command interrupt process, the command received at the input port 77 is transferred to a command buffer provided in the work RAM 73.

  Thereafter, on the condition that the result of the command analysis process corresponds to the result of receiving the new command (step S602: YES), the command response process is executed (step S603). In the command handling process, an execution target table for executing a program corresponding to the received command is read from the memory module 74. The execution target table defines processing necessary for displaying an image for one frame at each update timing of an image when a moving image corresponding to the received command is displayed on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41. Information group.

  As the commands received by the display CPU 72 from the sound side MPU 62, the command at the start of change, the command at the start of the notice effect, the command at the start of the normal reach, the command at the start of the super reach, the command at the start of the final effect, There are commands for starting standby display, standby extension commands, fixed display start commands, and the like. When these commands are received, the execution target table necessary for executing the game-playing effects corresponding to the respective commands on the symbol display device 41 is read out.

  If a negative determination is made in step S602, or if the process of step S603 is executed, a task process is executed (step S604). In the task processing, a drawing instruction is given to the VDP 76 in order to display an image of one frame corresponding to the current update timing by referring to the control data of the current processing time in the execution target table set as the target of use. Set various data necessary for the operation. Specifically, as the various data, the address information of the area where the control target image data is stored in the memory module 74, the address information of the area where the control target image data is transferred in the VRAM 75, and the control target image data are used. Information on the target frame regions 82a and 82b for which drawing data is to be created, information on coordinates when writing the image data to be controlled in the target frame regions 82a and 82b, information on the scale when writing the image data, In addition, there is information on a uniform α value (translucent value) when writing the image data.

  Thereafter, a drawing list output process is executed (step S605). In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of the current processing time is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 76. In this case, in the drawing list, an image grasped in the immediately preceding task process is set as a drawing target, and parameter information updated in the task process is set together. In the VDP 76, drawing data is created in the frame areas 82a and 82b of the VRAM 75 according to this drawing list. The processing in the VDP 76 will be described in detail later.

  The task processing in step S604 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. First, a setting process for starting control is executed (step S701). In the control start setting process, it is determined based on the currently set execution target table whether or not there is an individual image to be controlled in the current processing round. If it exists, the work RAM 73 searches for an empty buffer area for performing various calculations in controlling the individual image, and corresponds to the individual image grasped as the control start target on a one-to-one basis. Reserve a free buffer area. Further, initialization processing is executed for all the reserved empty buffer areas, and parameter information for starting control according to the individual image is set for the initialized empty buffer areas.

  Thereafter, the control update target is grasped (step S702). This control update target is an individual image for which the control start process has been completed, and an individual image that may be included in an image for one frame after the current processing time.

  Thereafter, a background calculation process is executed (step S703). In the background calculation process, the current control update target is grasped among the rearmost still image and the background sprite constituting the background image. Further, for the grasped control update target, various parameter information necessary for creating a drawing list such as coordinates in the virtual two-dimensional plane, rotation angle, scale, uniform α value and α data designation is calculated and derived. Then, the control information is updated by writing the derived various parameter information in an area secured in the work RAM 73 corresponding to each individual image.

  Thereafter, the effect calculation process is executed (step S704). In the effect calculation process, the current control update target is grasped among effect sprites that constitute an effect image to be displayed in various effects such as reach effect, notice effect, and jackpot effect. Further, the various parameter information is derived for the grasped control update target. Then, the control information is updated by writing the derived various parameter information in an area secured in the work RAM 73 corresponding to each individual image.

  Thereafter, symbol calculation processing is executed (step S705). In the symbol computation process, the current control update target is grasped from symbols subject to variable display in each game round. Further, the various parameter information is derived for the grasped control update target. Then, the control information is updated by writing the derived various parameter information in an area secured in the work RAM 73 corresponding to each individual image.

  Thereafter, a drawing instruction target grasping process is executed (step S706). In the process of grasping the drawing instruction target, among the individual images that have been controlled and updated by the calculation processes in steps S703, S704, and S705, an image for one frame corresponding to the current drawing data creation instruction is used. Processing for grasping individual images included is executed. The grasp is performed by executing a predetermined calculation with reference to information on coordinates, rotation angles, and scales of various individual images. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list. In this way, it is necessary to select individual images to be displayed in the VDP 76 by making the individual images specified in the drawing list not only all individual images for which control has been started, but only individual images to be displayed. In addition, even if it is not selected, there is no need to perform drawing processing for individual images that are not display targets. Thereby, the processing load of the VDP 76 can be reduced.

<Basic processing in VDP 76>
Next, basic processing executed by the VDP 76 will be described.

  In the VDP 76, processing for setting the value of the register 92 based on a command transmitted from the display CPU 72, processing for creating drawing data in the frame areas 82a and 82b of the frame buffer 82 based on the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 72, And the process which outputs an image signal to the symbol display apparatus 41 based on the drawing data produced in the frame area | regions 82a and 82b is performed.

  Of the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 92 is executed each time a drawing list is received by a circuit (not shown) attached to the I / F 95 for the display CPU 72. Further, the process of creating the drawing data is repeatedly activated by the control unit 91 at a predetermined cycle (for example, 1 msec). Further, the process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 94 at a predetermined output start timing of the image signal.

  Hereinafter, the process of creating the drawing data will be described in detail. Prior to the description of the processing, the contents of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 72 to the VDP 76 will be described. FIG. 20A to FIG. 20C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

  Header information is set in the drawing list. In the header information, information indicating whether drawing data for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the drawing list is to be drawn in the first frame area 82a or the second frame area 82b is stored in the target buffer. Information is set. Also, in the header information, information on the presence / absence of decoding designation and the address of moving image data to be decoded is set.

  In the drawing list, in addition to the header information, a plurality of types of image data used for displaying an image for one frame are set. Further, information on the drawing order of each image data and each image data Parameter information is set. More specifically, the drawing order information is set so as to be sequential numerical value information, and information of image data to be used is set corresponding to each numerical information one-to-one. Also, parameter information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with information of each image data.

  The drawing order is set so that an individual image desired to be displayed is positioned on the back side of the display surface P in an image for one frame before the drawing target. The individual image refers to one still image defined by still image data such as background data and one sprite defined by sprite data such as symbol sprite data. In the drawing list of FIG. 20A, the background data is set as the first drawing target, the sprite data A is set as the second, the sprite data B is set as the third, and so on. Therefore, the background data is first written in the frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn, and then the sprite data A is written so as to overlap the background data, and the sprite data B is further written. In the image for one frame, each individual image is displayed so that the front side is in the order of background image → effect image → design.

  A plurality of types of parameters are set in the parameter information P (1), P (2), P (3),. Specifically, as for the background data parameter P (1), as shown in FIG. 20B, the address information of the area where the background data is stored in the memory module 74 and the area where the background data is transferred in the VRAM 75. Address information, coordinate information indicating the position on the virtual two-dimensional plane when writing background data, rotation angle information indicating the rotation angle on the virtual two-dimensional plane when writing background data, and background data For the size set as the initial state, the scale information indicating the magnification when writing to the frame regions 82a and 82b and the uniform α value indicating the entire transmission information (or transparency information) when writing the background data And α data designation information indicating whether or not α data is applied and an application target are set. The types of parameters are the same for sprite data A as shown in FIG.

  The coordinate information is not individually set for all the pixels constituting the image data, but one coordinate information is set for one image data. Specifically, one pixel at the center of the image data is set as a reference pixel for specifying coordinate information. In the VDP 76, it is possible to recognize that the designated coordinate information is one pixel at the center of the image data, and when the image data is arranged, the center pixel is on the designated coordinate. . Thereby, the information capacity (that is, the data amount) of the coordinate information to be designated for one image data in the display CPU 72 can be suppressed. Further, since it is not necessary for the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 to recognize coordinates for all pixels of the image data, the program can be simplified.

  Incidentally, the reference pixel is not limited to the central pixel, and may be a corner pixel such as upper left or upper right. Since the sprite data and the still image data are basically defined as a rectangular shape, the display CPU 72 and the VDP 76 can easily recognize the reference pixel by using the corner pixel as the reference pixel.

  The uniform α value is transmission information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 72. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all the pixels of the image data. On the other hand, the α data is transmission information applied in units of pixels of background data and sprite data, and is stored in advance in the memory module 74 as image data. The alpha data can have different transmission information for each pixel within the range of the same background data or the same sprite data. The α data has a larger data capacity than program data for setting a uniform α value.

  Since the uniform α value and α data are set as described above, the transparency of the background data and sprite data need not be finely controlled on a pixel-by-pixel basis, but should be controlled uniformly for all pixels. By being able to cope with a uniform α value, the required data capacity can be reduced, and by applying α data, the transparency can be finely controlled in units of pixels.

  The drawing process in the VDP 76 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S801, it is determined whether creation of drawing data instructed in the drawing list already received is completed. If the creation of the drawing data has been completed, it is determined in step S802 whether a new drawing list has been received from the display CPU 72 or not. If a new drawing list has been received, the corresponding processing at the time of reception is executed in step S803.

  In the handling process at the time of reception, it is grasped in which frame area 82a, 82b the drawing data for one frame corresponding to the drawing list received this time is drawn from the information of the target buffer included in the drawing list.

  In a succeeding step S804, a content grasping process is executed. In the content grasping process, the image data set as a reading target in the drawing list is read from the memory module 74 and written in the expansion buffer 81 of the VRAM 75. In the content grasping process, the type of image data initially set as a drawing target in the drawing list is grasped, and various parameter information of the image data is grasped. In the writing process, based on the grasping result of the contents grasping process in step S804, the current drawing target image data is written in the frame regions 82a and 82b set as the creation target.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S801 that drawing data instructed in the already received drawing list is being created, a drawing list counter update process is executed in step S806. As a result, the drawing target is switched to the image data of the next drawing order. Then, the processes in steps S804 and S805 are performed on the switched image data. That is, by executing the drawing process a plurality of times, drawing data of an image for one frame designated by one drawing list is created.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to a configuration in which only one image data is processed in one drawing process, and a configuration in which a plurality of image data is processed in one drawing process may be used. However, the present invention is not limited to the configuration in which the same number of image data is processed in each processing time, and a configuration in which a different number of image data is processed in each processing time of the drawing processing may be employed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S802, or after the processing in step S805 is executed, it is determined in step S807 whether or not the output of the image signal for one frame is completed in the display circuit 94. If not completed, the present drawing process is terminated. If completed, the V interrupt signal is output to the display CPU 72 in step S808, and the present drawing process is terminated.

  The drawing data for one frame is generated so as to be completed within a 20 msec cycle. An image signal is output from the display circuit 94 to the symbol display device 41 based on the created drawing data. Since the double buffer method is adopted as already described, the output of the image signal is output to the output. This is performed in parallel with the creation of drawing data corresponding to the update timing one frame after the corresponding frame. Note that the display circuit 94 includes a selector circuit that alternately switches the frame regions 82a and 82b to be referred to every time the output of the image signal for one frame is completed, and the control unit 91 is switched by the switching by the selector circuit. The frame regions 82a and 82b which are the drawing targets of the drawing data are restricted so as not to be the output targets for outputting the image signal.

<Configuration for shared execution target table>
Next, a configuration for sharing the execution target table will be described.

  In the pachinko machine 10, the symbols are displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 set in the symbol display device 41 at each game time (see FIG. 4A). A plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are set such as an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, nine types of main symbols “1” to “9” are arranged in ascending or descending order of numbers, and no number is added between the main symbols. One sub-design is arranged. When the game round is started, the symbols are scrolled in a predetermined direction in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 from the display mode of the symbols that are finally stopped and displayed in the previous game round. The symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Thereafter, the variable display of symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is stopped. In this case, since the display mode of the symbols that are finally stopped and displayed in each game round may be different, the types of symbols displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 may be different when the game round is started. .

  An example of the symbol variation display mode will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 22 (a) shows the execution period of game times, FIG. 22 (b) shows the acceleration period in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3, FIG. 22 (c) shows the high speed period in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3, 22D shows the low speed period of the upper symbol row Z1, FIG. 22E shows the low speed period of the lower symbol row Z3, and FIG. 22F shows the low speed period of the middle symbol row Z2.

  As shown in FIG. 22A, game times are started at the timing of t1. At the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 22 (b), the moving image display is performed so that the variable display speed of the symbols gradually increases in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The variable display speed in this case is a variable display speed that can identify or easily identify the type of the symbol displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. Since the acceleration period exists in this way, it is possible to make the start mode when the symbol variation display is started in each game time to be a fixed mode, and that the game time has started. Becomes easier to recognize.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t2, the acceleration period ends as shown in FIG. 22 (b), and as shown in FIG. 22 (c), it becomes a high-speed period in which variable display is performed at high speed in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. . In the high-speed period, the variable display speeds of the symbols in all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variable display speeds in which the type of the symbol cannot be identified or is difficult to identify. The type of symbol displayed on the display surface P is adjusted during the high speed period. Thus, in the configuration in which the stop result of the current game round is determined regardless of the type of the symbols displayed in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 at the start of the current game round, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is Thus, it is possible to adjust the types of symbols that are displayed in a stand-by manner and displayed statically in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. 22 (d), in the upper symbol row Z1, the symbol variation display speed is switched from high speed to low speed. When the low-speed display is performed, the symbol variation display is performed at a variation display speed at which the symbol type can be identified or easily identified. In this case, low-speed display is performed only in the upper symbol row Z1, and high-speed display is continued in the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3.

  Then, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 22 (d), the low symbol period of the upper symbol row Z1 ends, and in the upper symbol row Z1, the scroll display of symbols is ended and standby display is started. Further, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 22E, the symbol fluctuation display speed is switched from high speed to low speed in the lower symbol row Z3. In this case, the low speed display is performed only in the lower symbol row Z3, the high speed display is continued in the middle symbol row Z2, and the standby display is continued in the upper symbol row Z1.

  Thereafter, as shown in the timing diagram t5 of FIG. 22 (e), when the low-speed period of the lower symbol row Z3 ends, the scroll display of symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 ends and standby display starts. Further, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 22 (f), the symbol variable display speed is switched from high speed to low speed in the middle symbol row Z2. In this case, the low speed display is performed only in the middle symbol row Z2, and the standby display is continued in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3.

  After that, at the timing of t6, as shown in FIG. 22 (f), the low-speed period of the middle symbol row Z2 ends, and in the middle symbol row Z2, the scroll display of symbols is finished and standby display is started. In this case, the standby display is performed in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and then the static display is performed in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

  When displaying the variation of the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the execution target table stored in advance in the memory module 74 is read, and the type of symbols to be displayed on the display surface P is determined by the display CPU 72 according to the execution target table. In addition, various parameters such as the arrangement position of symbols to be displayed are determined. Here, the types of symbols that are stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 at the start of each game round, and the types of symbols that are stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 at the end of each game round are: It can be different for each game. For example, the symbol variation display may be started from the stop display mode as shown in FIG. 23A, or the symbol variation display may be started from the stop display mode as shown in FIG. There is also. Further, for example, the game times may end in a stop display mode as shown in FIG. 23A, or the game times may end in a stop display mode as shown in FIG. 23B. In this case, if an execution target table is prepared in advance according to each pattern, it is necessary to prepare an execution target table corresponding to each of the modes that can be taken as the stop display mode at the start of the game time variation display. In addition to this, it is necessary to prepare an execution target table corresponding to each of the modes that can be taken as the stop display mode at the end of the game times. If it does so, the kind of execution object table will increase extremely, and the storage capacity required in order to memorize | store an execution object table beforehand will increase.

  On the other hand, this pachinko machine 10 uses a common execution target table regardless of the stop display mode at the start of the game time variation display, and is common regardless of the stop display mode at the end of the game time. The execution target table is used. The common execution target table will be described.

  The execution target table is provided corresponding to each of the acceleration period, the high speed period, and the low speed period. In this case, the execution target table is provided for the acceleration period so as to be common to all the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3. On the other hand, the high-speed period and the low-speed period are not provided in common between the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and an execution target table is provided corresponding to each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The execution target table indicates whether or not a reach effect is generated for the acceleration period of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the high speed period of all the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the low speed period of the upper symbol row Z1, and the low speed period of the lower symbol row Z3. Although it is used regardless, the low speed period of the middle symbol row Z2 is used only when the reach effect does not occur. When a reach effect occurs, a common execution target table is not used for the low speed period of the middle symbol row Z2, but a dedicated execution target table corresponding to each reach effect is used.

  The execution target table is stored in the memory module 74 in advance. Specifically, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 24A, the memory module 74 stores in advance an execution target table for controlling the variable display of symbols in all symbol rows Z1 to Z3 during the acceleration period. The period storage area 101, the first high-speed period storage area 102 in which the execution target table for controlling the variable display of the symbol of the upper symbol series Z1 in the high-speed period, and the upper symbol series Z1 in the low-speed period are stored. A first low-speed period storage area 103 in which an execution target table for controlling variable display of symbols is stored in advance, and an execution target table for controlling variable display of symbols in the middle symbol row Z2 in the high-speed period are stored in advance. The second high speed period storage area 104 and the execution target table for controlling the variable display of the symbol of the middle symbol row Z2 during the low speed period are stored in advance. 2 low-speed period storage area 105, third high-speed period storage area 106 in which an execution target table for controlling the variable display of the lower symbol series Z3 in the high-speed period is stored, and the lower symbol sequence in the low-speed period There is provided a third low-speed period storage area 107 in which an execution target table for controlling the variable display of the Z3 symbol is stored in advance.

  The acceleration period, the high speed period, and the low speed period are not constant in relation to the variation display time of the game times, and there are a plurality of types so that the length of each period exists. In this case, there is only one type of acceleration period execution target table stored in the acceleration period storage area 101, and the acceleration period controllable by the acceleration period execution target table is the game time variation display time. Among the plurality of types of acceleration periods determined in relation to As a result, even if any type of acceleration period is selected in relation to the game time variation display time, it is possible to use the execution target table for that one type of acceleration period.

  Each of the first high-speed period storage area 102, the second high-speed period storage area 104, and the third high-speed period storage area 106 stores only one type of execution target table for the high-speed period. The high-speed period that can be controlled by the execution target table for the first high-speed period stored in the first high-speed period storage area 102 includes a plurality of types of the upper symbol row Z1 that are determined in relation to the variation display time of the game times. It is longer than the longest high-speed period among the high-speed periods. The high-speed period that can be controlled by the second high-speed period execution target table stored in the second high-speed period storage area 104 is a plurality of medium symbol rows Z2 that are defined in relation to the game time variation display time. Among the types of high-speed periods, the period is longer than the longest high-speed period. Further, the high-speed period that can be controlled by the third high-speed period execution target table stored in the third high-speed period storage area 106 includes a plurality of symbols in the lower symbol row Z3 that are determined in relation to the game time variation display time. Among the types of high-speed periods, the period is longer than the longest high-speed period. As a result, even if any kind of high-speed period is selected in relation to the game time variation display time in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, execution for one type of high-speed period is performed for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The target table can be used.

  Each of the first low-speed period storage area 103, the second low-speed period storage area 105, and the third low-speed period storage area 107 stores a plurality of types of execution target tables for low-speed periods. That is, the first low-speed period storage area 103 stores a plurality of types of execution target tables for the first low-speed period so as to correspond one-to-one with the type of the low-speed period in the upper symbol row Z1. A plurality of types of execution target tables for the second low speed period are stored in the period storage area 105 so as to correspond one-to-one with the types of the low speed period of the middle symbol row Z2, and the third low speed period storage area 107 is stored. A plurality of types of execution target tables for the third low speed period are stored so as to correspond one-to-one with the types of the low speed period in the lower symbol row Z3. In this way, the execution target table for the low speed period is prepared for each type of the low speed period, so that the variable display of the symbols is controlled by using the execution target table for the low speed period so that each low speed period can be handled. It becomes possible to execute the stand-by display of the symbol and the static display of the symbol at the timing to be performed.

  FIG. 25A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period stored in the acceleration period storage area 101 in advance, and FIG. 25B is the first high-speed period storage area 102. FIG. 26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution target table T11 for the first high speed period stored in advance in FIG. 26. FIG. 26 shows the execution for the first low speed period stored in the first low speed period storage area 103 in advance. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating object table T12. The execution target table for the second high-speed period and the execution target table for the third high-speed period are different from the execution target table T11 for the first high-speed period, except for the maximum value of the pointer information. This is the same as the execution target table T11 for the high speed period. Also, the execution target table of the type different from the execution target table T12 for the first low speed period stored in the first low speed period storage area 103, the execution target table for the second low speed period, and the third low speed period The execution target table is the same as the execution target table T12 for the first low speed period except that the maximum value of the pointer information is different from the execution target table T12 for the first low speed period.

  As shown in FIGS. 25A, 25B, and 26, pointer information corresponding to the image update timing for one frame is set in each of the execution target tables T10 to T12. Corresponding to the information, a display symbol adjustment area and task content information are set.

  Information for specifying the type of symbol to be displayed is set in the display symbol adjustment area. Specifically, information corresponding to one symbol in the corresponding symbol row Z1 to Z3 is set in the display symbol adjustment area. Here, three symbols are simultaneously displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3, but the information set in the display symbol adjustment area is the type of symbol existing at the head in the symbol movement direction. It corresponds to the information of. Further, as described above, the total number of symbols arranged in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is different. Specifically, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are 18 in total including the main symbol and the sub symbol. In contrast to the number of symbols arranged, the middle symbol row Z2 includes 20 symbols in total including the main symbol and the sub symbol. Therefore, when the execution target table is used to control the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3, the display symbol adjustment area corresponds to any of “1” to “18”. When the information to be executed is set and the execution target table is used to control the variable display of the symbols in the middle symbol row Z2, the display symbol adjustment area corresponds to any of “1” to “20”. Information is set.

  For example, when “1” is set in the display symbol adjustment area corresponding to the predetermined pointer information in the execution target table for controlling the variable display of the symbol in the upper symbol row Z1, the predetermined pointer information In the frame corresponding to, the main symbol of “1”, the sub symbol between “1” and “9”, and the main symbol of “9” are to be displayed. If “2” is set in the display symbol adjustment area, a sub-symbol between “1” and “9” and a main symbol of “9” in the frame corresponding to the predetermined pointer information. , And sub-symbols between “9” and “8” are to be displayed.

  In the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the symbols are scroll-displayed as described above, but the types of symbols to be scroll-displayed are the same over a plurality of frames. Therefore, the same symbol information is set in the display symbol adjustment area over a plurality of continuous pointer information. The information set in the display symbol adjustment area is changed as the value of the pointer information increases, so that the type of symbol to be displayed in the corresponding symbol row Z1 to Z3 is changed.

  The task content information includes coordinate information indicating the arrangement position of the symbol to be used in each frame (that is, the drawing position in the frame regions 82a and 82b to be written in the frame buffer 82) and the size of the symbol to be used. The parameter information such as the scale information indicating is set. In this case, information for determining the arrangement positions of the three symbols to be displayed in the corresponding frame is set in the coordinate information. Therefore, it is possible to specify information of coordinates corresponding to each of the three symbols to be displayed, which are specified from the information of the adjustment area of the display symbols, from the information of the contents of the task. For example, when “1” is set in the display pattern adjustment area of a plurality of continuous pointer information in the execution target table applied to the upper symbol row Z1, information on the contents of the task corresponding to the plurality of pointer information In the corresponding symbol row, the arrangement positions of the main symbol “1”, the sub symbol between “1” and “9”, and the main symbol “9” gradually change in the scroll display direction. Such coordinate information is set.

  In the configuration in which a plurality of symbols corresponding to the information set in the display symbol adjustment area as described above are to be displayed and the parameter information of these symbols is set in the task content information, the display symbol adjustment area Is an area that can be rewritten by the control of the display CPU 72 after the execution target table is read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73. This rewriting is performed according to the type of the symbol that is the display target in the corresponding symbol sequence Z1 to Z3 at the timing when the corresponding execution target table starts to be used. Further, by performing the scroll display of the symbols, the types of the three symbols to be displayed in the corresponding symbol rows Z1 to Z3 change with time. The switching timing of the three types of symbols to be displayed is predetermined in each execution target table T10 to T12. Therefore, when rewriting the adjustment area of the display symbol, pointer information corresponding to the next switching timing from the first pointer information is set as one pointer group, and is included between one switching timing and the next switching timing. When the pointer information is one pointer group, the same symbol information is set in the display symbol adjustment area corresponding to each pointer information included in one pointer group, and different symbols have different symbols. Information is set.

  As described above, information for specifying the type of symbol to be displayed is set in the display symbol adjustment area in each of the execution target tables T10 to T12, but the information to be set in the display symbol adjustment area is displayed by the display CPU 72. As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 24B, the work RAM 73 is provided with a first adjustment counter 111, a second adjustment counter 112, and a third adjustment counter 113. Yes. The first adjustment counter 111 corresponds to the upper symbol row Z1, the second adjustment counter 112 corresponds to the middle symbol row Z2, and the third adjustment counter 113 corresponds to the lower symbol row Z3. .

  In each of the adjustment counters 111 to 113, information on the type of the symbol existing at the head when the symbol moves from the right to the left in the corresponding symbol row Z1 to Z3 is set. The display CPU 72 changes the values of the adjustment counters 111 to 113 corresponding to the symbol row Z1 to Z3 each time the symbol existing at the head of the symbol row Z1 to Z3 is changed to the symbol in the next order. Update to later symbol type information. As a result, the information set in each of the adjustment counters 111 to 113 always corresponds to the type of symbol existing at the head of the corresponding symbol row Z1 to Z3. When the display CPU 72 starts control of the variation display of the symbols by the predetermined execution target table, the display CPU 72 displays information corresponding to the information of the symbol type set in the adjustment counters 111 to 113 in the predetermined execution target table. Set in the symbol adjustment area.

  When starting the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1, as shown in FIG. 23 (a), when the first symbol in the upper symbol row Z1 is the main symbol of “3”, the value of the first adjustment counter 111 Becomes “5”. Here, the relationship between the value set in each of the adjustment counters 111 to 113 and the type of the leading symbol will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG. As described above, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are arranged in total of 18 symbols including the main symbol and the sub symbol, whereas the middle symbol row Z2 includes the main symbol and the sub symbol. Since a total of 20 symbols are arranged in total, the number of types of values that can be taken by the corresponding adjustment counters 111 to 113 is different.

  In the case of the first adjustment counter 111 and the third adjustment counter 113, as shown in FIG. 27 (a), the values of "1" to "18" can be taken, and each value is the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol. There is a one-to-one correspondence with a total of 18 symbols in each row Z3. In this case, the odd number corresponds to the main symbol and the even number corresponds to the sub symbol. In the upper symbol row Z1, the main symbols are arranged in descending order with respect to the scroll direction from right to left, whereas in the lower symbol row Z3, the main symbols are aligned in the scroll direction from right to left. However, the relationship between the values that can be taken by the first adjustment counter 111 and the third adjustment counter 113 and the type of the leading symbol is as follows. Are the same.

  In the case of the second adjustment counter 112, as shown in FIG. 27 (b), the values of “1” to “20” can be taken, and each value is paired with a total of 20 symbols in the middle symbol row Z2. 1 corresponds. In this case, the relationship between the values “1” to “18” and the type of the leading symbol is the same as in the case of the first adjustment counter 111 and the third adjustment counter 113. The value of “19” corresponds to the main symbol of “4” additionally arranged between the main symbol of “9” and the main symbol of “1”, and the value of “20” This corresponds to the sub-symbol between the main symbol “4” and the main symbol “1”.

  The setting mode of information for the display symbol adjustment area will be described by taking as an example the case of setting the variation display mode of the symbols during the acceleration period, the high speed period, and the low speed period in the upper symbol row Z1. FIG. 28A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period, and FIG. 28B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution target table T11 for the first high-speed period. FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the execution target table T12 for the first low-speed period. Note that the information setting mode for the display symbol adjustment area of the execution target table corresponding to each of the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 is medium while the upper symbol row Z1 is in the descending order of symbol arrangement. Although the symbol sequence Z2 and the lower symbol sequence Z3 are different in that the symbol arrangement is in ascending order, the other points are the information setting mode for the display symbol adjustment area of the execution target table corresponding to the upper symbol sequence Z1. Are identical.

  When an effect for game times is started in the state shown in FIG. 23A, the value of the first adjustment counter 111 is “5”. In the upper symbol row Z1, the symbols are arranged so that the main symbols are in descending order with respect to the scroll direction from right to left. Therefore, the display symbol adjustment area in the table corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1, which is the acceleration period execution target table T10 read from the acceleration period storage area 101, is as shown in FIG. For the first pointer group, “5” corresponding to the current head symbol is set. In this case, the symbol to be controlled is the main symbol “3” and between “3” and “2”. And the main symbol of “2”. For the next order pointer group, “4” corresponding to the next order symbol is set for the current top symbol, and the next order for the next order pointer group. “3” corresponding to the symbol of the next order is set for the symbol of the next, and “2” corresponding to the symbol of the next order for the symbol of the next order is set for the next group of pointers. Is set. That is, a numerical value is set for the display symbol adjustment area so that the numbers are in descending order toward the rear pointer group.

  When the control of the acceleration period of the upper symbol row Z1 is completed by the acceleration period execution target table T10 in which the display symbol adjustment area is set as described above, the value of the first adjustment counter 111 becomes “1”. ing. Accordingly, the display symbol adjustment area in the first high-speed period execution target table T11 read out from the first high-speed period storage area 102 includes the first pointer group as shown in FIG. Is set to “1” corresponding to the current top symbol, and “18” corresponding to the next top symbol is set to the next top pointer group. . That is, in the upper symbol row Z1, 18 symbols circulate while scrolling from the right to the left, and therefore in the following order with respect to the pointer group in which “1” is set in the display symbol adjustment area. “18” is set in the display symbol adjustment area in the existing pointer group. For the subsequent pointer groups, values are set in the adjustment area of the display symbols so that they are serial numbers and are in descending order of the numbers.

  Here, as already described, the high-speed period that can be controlled by the execution target table T11 for the first high-speed period is the longest of the plurality of types of high-speed periods in the upper symbol row Z1 that is determined in relation to the game time variation display time. It is a period longer than the high-speed period. In this case, when the use timing of the execution target table T11 for the first high-speed period comes, all the display symbol adjustment areas in the execution target table T11 for the first high-speed period are independent of the current high-speed period. However, when the control by the pointer group corresponding to the end timing of the current high-speed period is completed, the control by the execution target table T11 for the first high-speed period is ended, and the first low-speed period is set. The control is switched to the execution target table T12. In this case, when the control corresponding to the last pointer information in the pointer group corresponding to the end timing of the current high speed period is completed, the control by the execution target table T11 for the first high speed period ends.

  This also applies to the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period. That is, as already explained, the acceleration period that can be controlled by the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period is the longest among a plurality of types of acceleration periods in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 determined in relation to the game time variation display time. The period is longer than the acceleration period. In this case, when it becomes the use timing of the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period, the value for all the adjustment areas of the display symbols in the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period, regardless of the current acceleration period. However, when the control by the pointer group corresponding to the end timing of the current acceleration period is completed, the control by the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period ends, and the execution target table T11 for the first high speed period Switch to control by. In this case, when the control corresponding to the last pointer information in the pointer group corresponding to the end timing of the current acceleration period is completed, the control by the execution target table T10 for the acceleration period ends.

  In FIG. 28B, when the pointer group in which “17” is set in the display symbol adjustment area corresponds to the end timing of the current high-speed period, the value of the first adjustment counter 111 is “16”. It has become. Therefore, the display symbol adjustment area in the first low-speed period execution target table T12 read from the first low-speed period storage area 103 has a current state for the first pointer group as shown in FIG. “16” corresponding to the first symbol of “” is set, and for the subsequent pointer groups, a value is set in the display symbol adjustment area so that it is a serial number and descending in numerical order.

  As described above, using the values of the adjustment counters 111 to 113, the values of the adjustment areas for the display symbols in the execution target tables T10 to T12 are set. Thus, even if the execution target tables T10 to T12 are configured to be used for a plurality of types of situations, the variation display of the symbol is controlled in a manner corresponding to the symbol type displayed on the symbol display device 41. It becomes possible to do.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for controlling the variable display of symbols while also using the execution target table will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing command handling processing executed by the display CPU 72. The command handling process is executed in step S603 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18).

  When the change start command is received from the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 (step S901: YES), the acceleration period execution target table is read from the acceleration period storage area 101 to the work RAM 73 (step S902). In this case, since the execution target table for the acceleration period is read corresponding to each of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3, the work RAM 73 has a total of three execution target tables for the acceleration period. Is read out. However, the execution target tables for these three acceleration periods are all the same type.

  Thereafter, the execution target table for the high speed period is read from the high speed period storage areas 102, 104, and 106 to the work RAM 73 for each of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3 (step S903). Specifically, the execution target table for the first high-speed period corresponding to the upper symbol row Z1 is read from the first high-speed period storage area 102, and the second high-speed period storage area 104 corresponds to the middle symbol row Z2. The second high-speed period execution target table is read, and the third high-speed period execution target table corresponding to the lower symbol row Z3 is read from the third high-speed period storage area 106.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a reach effect occurs in the current game time from the information on the change display time in the current game time included in the command for starting the change (step S904). When the reach effect does not occur (step S904: NO), each of the execution target tables for the low speed period corresponding to the variable display time of the current game time is displayed for each of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3. Data is read from the low speed period storage areas 103, 105, and 107 to the work RAM 73 (step S905). As already described, a plurality of low speed periods are set in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the low speed period corresponds to the variation display time of the game times. Therefore, in step S905, the execution target table for the low speed period corresponding to the variation display time of the current game time is read. Specifically, the execution target table for the first low speed period corresponding to the current variable display time (that is, the low speed period of the current upper symbol row Z1) is read from the first low speed period storage area 103, and the second low speed period The execution target table for the second low speed period corresponding to the current variable display time (that is, the current low symbol period of the middle symbol row Z2) is read from the storage area 105, and the current variable display is displayed from the third low speed period storage area 107. The execution target table for the third low speed period corresponding to the time (that is, the current low speed period of the lower symbol row Z3) is read.

  When the reach effect is generated (step S904: YES), the execution target table for the low speed period corresponding to the variable display time of the current game time is stored for each of the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3. Data is read out from the area 103 and the third low-speed period storage area 107 to the work RAM 73 (step S906). Specifically, the execution target table for the first low speed period corresponding to the current variable display time (that is, the current low speed period of the upper symbol row Z1) is read from the first low speed period storage area 103, and the third low speed period The execution target table for the third low speed period corresponding to the current variable display time (that is, the low speed period of the current lower symbol row Z3) is read from the storage area 107. Thereafter, a dedicated execution target table corresponding to the current reach effect is read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 (step S907).

  When the process of step S905 or step S907 is executed, the information corresponding to the values of the adjustment counters 111 to 113 is displayed for the display symbol adjustment area in the execution target table for each acceleration period read in step S902. A setting process is executed (step S908). In the setting process, with respect to the execution target table for the acceleration period read to control the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row Z1, the first adjustment is performed for the display symbol adjustment area corresponding to the first pointer group. The value of the adjustment counter 111 is set, and for the subsequent pointer groups, values are set in the adjustment area of the display symbols so that the pointer groups are serial numbers and are in descending order of the numbers. For the acceleration period execution target table read in order to control the symbol variation display in the middle symbol row Z2, the second adjustment counter for the display symbol adjustment area corresponding to the first pointer group. A value of 112 is set, and for the subsequent pointer groups, a value is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol so that each pointer group has a sequential number in ascending order of the numbers. In addition, for the execution target table for the acceleration period read to control the variable display of the symbols in the lower symbol row Z3, the third adjustment counter is used for the display symbol adjustment area corresponding to the first pointer group. A value of 113 is set, and for the subsequent pointer groups, a value is set in the adjustment area of the display symbol so that each pointer group has a serial number and is in ascending order of the numbers.

  When a negative determination is made in step S901, or when the process of step S908 is executed, other processes are executed (step S909). In other processing, when a command different from the command for starting fluctuation is received, processing corresponding to the received command is executed.

  Next, the normal variation calculation process executed by the display CPU 72 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal variation calculation process is executed in the symbol calculation process in step S705 in the task process (FIG. 19) in a situation where an effect for game times is being executed and a reach effect is not being performed. .

  First, it is determined whether or not it is the update timing of the first adjustment counter 111 (step S1001). The update timing of the first adjustment counter 111 is the last pointer information in the pointer group whose pointer information is the current reference target in the execution target table that is the target of use for the upper symbol row Z1. This is the case. If it is the update timing of the first adjustment counter 111 (step S1001: YES), 1 is subtracted from the value of the first adjustment counter 111 (step S1002). If the value of the first adjustment counter 111 after the subtraction is “0” (step S1003: YES), “18” which is the maximum value is set in the first adjustment counter 111 (step S1003). S1004).

  In step S1005, it is determined whether it is the update timing of the second adjustment counter 112 or the third adjustment counter 113. The update timing of the second adjustment counter 112 is the pointer information of the last order in the pointer group whose pointer information is the current reference target in the execution target table that is the target of use for the middle symbol row Z2. This is the case. The update timing of the third adjustment counter 113 means that the pointer information that is the current reference target in the execution target table that is the target of use for the lower symbol sequence Z3 is the last pointer information in the pointer group. This is the case.

  If it is the update timing of the second adjustment counter 112 or the third adjustment counter 113 (step S1005: YES), 1 is added to the values of the adjustment counters 112 and 113 to be updated this time (step S1006). In this case, only one of the second adjustment counter 112 and the third adjustment counter 113 may be updated, or both the second adjustment counter 112 and the third adjustment counter 113 are updated. In some cases. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the values of the adjustment counters 112 and 113 to be updated after the addition of 1 exceeds the maximum value (step S1007). In this case, the maximum value of the second adjustment counter 112 is “20”, and the maximum value of the third adjustment counter 113 is “18”. When the value of the adjustment counters 112 and 113 to be updated exceeds the maximum value, the value of the adjustment counters 112 and 113 that have exceeded the maximum value is set to “1” that is the minimum value (step S1008).

  In step S1009, it is determined whether or not there is a table at the switching timing among the execution target tables that are used in each of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3. . If the switching timing is the acceleration period, the current pointer information in the execution target table for the acceleration period is the last pointer of the pointer group corresponding to the end timing of the acceleration period corresponding to the fluctuation display time of the current game time. This applies to information. Since the acceleration period is constant in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the switching timing from the execution target table for the acceleration period to the execution target table for the high speed period occurs simultaneously in all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. Further, if the switching timing is a high-speed period, the current pointer information in the execution target table for the high-speed period is the end timing of the high-speed period corresponding to the variable display time of the current game time in the corresponding symbol sequence Z1 to Z3. Corresponds to the last pointer information of the pointer group corresponding to. Since the high speed period is different in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the switching timing from the execution target table for the high speed period to the execution target table for the low speed period is individually generated in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3.

  If it is the execution target table switching timing for any of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2 and the lower symbol row Z3 (step S1009: YES), a change process of the execution target table to be used is executed (step S1010). ). In this case, the execution target table to be used is changed for all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 corresponding to the switching timing. In the change process, if the execution target table for the acceleration period is a target of use, the execution target for the high speed period that has already been read to the work RAM 73 in step S903 in the command response process (FIG. 30). When the usage target is changed to the table and the execution target table for the high-speed period is the usage target, it has already been read out to the work RAM 73 in steps S905 to S907 in the command response processing (FIG. 30). Change the usage target in the execution target table.

  Thereafter, a setting process based on the values of the adjustment counters 111 to 113 corresponding to the execution target table is executed for the adjustment area of the display symbol in the execution target table newly determined as the use target. The contents of the setting process are as described with reference to FIGS. As a result, the content of the execution target table newly determined as the target of use is changed to a mode corresponding to the display content of the current symbol.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1009, or if the process of step S1011 is executed, a pointer update process is executed (step S1012). In the pointer update process, for each of the upper symbol row Z1, the middle symbol row Z2, and the lower symbol row Z3, the pointer information that is the reference target in the execution target table that is the target of use is updated to the pointer information in the next order. To do. However, the pointer information update process is not executed for the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3 in which the execution target table to be used has been changed in the current processing round of the normal fluctuation calculation process.

  Thereafter, the type of image data corresponding to the symbol to be displayed for each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is grasped (step S1013). In grasping this, in the execution target table to be used in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, from the value of the adjustment area of the display symbol corresponding to the current pointer information, the symbol columns Z1 to Z1 corresponding to the execution target table. The type of the leading symbol in Z3 is grasped, and the following two symbol types are grasped. In addition, such a symbol type is grasped for all symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

  Thereafter, the various parameter information of all symbols to be displayed this time is grasped from the contents of the task corresponding to the current pointer information in the execution target table used in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. The parameter information includes the coordinates of the three symbols in the upper symbol row Z1, the coordinates of the three symbols in the middle symbol row Z2, and the coordinates of the three symbols in the lower symbol row Z3.

  When the normal variation calculation process is executed as described above, the symbol grasped in step S1013 is set as the drawing target in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605). . In the drawing list, parameter information applied to the symbols is set.

  As described above, since the execution target table for controlling the variable display of symbols is also used in various situations, the number of execution target tables stored in advance in the memory module 74 can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity necessary for storing the execution target table in the memory module 74 in advance. Further, even if the execution target table is also used, since the type of symbol to be displayed is adjusted using the adjustment counters 111 to 113, it is possible to appropriately control the symbol variation display. It becomes possible.

  There is only one type of execution target table for the acceleration period, and the acceleration period that can be controlled by the execution target table for the acceleration period is the longest of a plurality of types of acceleration periods determined in relation to the game display variation display time. The period is longer than the acceleration period. Then, regardless of the type of acceleration period, the execution target table for that acceleration period is used, and the range of pointer information referenced in the execution target table changes in relation to the type of acceleration period to be executed. Is done. As a result, the number of execution target tables for the acceleration period can be reduced, and the storage capacity required for storing the execution target tables in the memory module 74 in advance can be reduced. In particular, one type of execution target table for the acceleration period is used in common for all symbol sequences Z1 to Z3. Also from this point, it is possible to reduce the number of execution target tables for the acceleration period.

  There is only one type of high-speed period execution target table prepared for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. Z3 is a period equal to or longer than the longest high-speed period among a plurality of types of high-speed periods defined in relation to the game display variation display time. For any one symbol sequence Z1 to Z3, regardless of the type of high-speed period, one type of high-speed period execution target table is used, and the execution target is related to the type of high-speed period to be executed. The range of pointer information referenced in the table is changed. As a result, the number of execution target tables for the high-speed period can be reduced, and the storage capacity necessary for storing the execution target tables in advance in the memory module 74 can be reduced.

  As described above, even in a configuration in which the number of execution target tables for the acceleration period and the number of execution target tables for the high speed period are reduced, the switching of the execution target table is performed in the last order in the pointer group that is the reference target. This is performed at the timing when the control by the pointer information is completed. As a result, in the execution target table that has been newly used, it is only necessary to start control from the first-order pointer information in one pointer group, so that the execution target table can be switched appropriately.

  In each execution target table, a display symbol adjustment area is set in a one-to-one correspondence with the task contents in each pointer information. Then, by adjusting the information set in this display symbol adjustment area, the symbol type to which the contents of each task are applied is changed. As a result, it is possible to grasp the types of symbols to which the task content information is applied at each update timing simply by referring to each execution target table.

  In addition, when the use of the execution target table is started, information on the type of the symbol is set for each of the display symbol adjustment areas included in the execution target table. As a result, there is no need to execute a process for changing the information of the display symbol adjustment area for the execution target table during the execution of the control using the execution target table. The processing configuration can be simplified.

<Another form of shared execution target table>
-It is good also as a structure by which the adjustment area of a display symbol is not provided in the execution object table. In this case, the execution target table has at least information for triggering switching values of the corresponding adjustment counters 111 to 113 and task information, so that the type of symbol to be displayed is for adjustment. It is possible to grasp from the counters 111 to 113. According to this configuration, it is not necessary to set a display symbol adjustment area in the execution target table, and the data capacity of the execution target table can be suppressed.

  -When all types of individual images are to be controlled during the control period using one execution target table, the types of individual images to which the execution target table is applied are always constant, The order of the individual images to be applied can be different for each game. Therefore, in this case, although the type of the individual image to be applied to the execution target table is not adjusted, the order of the individual images to be applied to the execution target table is adjusted.

  A configuration in which the execution target table is also used as described above may be applied to a configuration in which specific variation display is performed using only one type of individual image among a plurality of types of individual images. In this case, in the execution target table, information for determining the operation content of the individual image to be executed for the specific variation display is set in time series, and the type of the individual image to which the information is applied is adjusted. The Rukoto.

  A configuration in which an execution target table for the acceleration period is provided for each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 instead of a configuration in which the execution target table for the acceleration period is provided in common for all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3. It is good. Moreover, it is good also as a structure provided so that the execution object table for high-speed periods may be used in common with respect to all the symbol rows Z1-Z3.

  The switching between the execution target table for the acceleration period and the execution target table for the high speed period is limited to a configuration that is performed at the timing when the control by the last-order pointer information in the reference target pointer group is completed. Alternatively, it may be the timing when the control by other pointer information is completed. However, the timing at which the switching occurs is preferably set as the timing at which the control by the pointer information in a predetermined order in the pointer group is completed regardless of the acceleration period or the high speed period.

<Configuration for performing loop display effects>
Next, a configuration for performing a loop display effect will be described.

  32 (a) and 32 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the loop display effect. In the loop display effect, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), a loop display character G4 is displayed behind the symbols G1 to G3 that enable notification of the contents corresponding to the result of the determination of success / failure in the MPU 62 of the main controller 50. In addition, a loop display background G5 is displayed behind the loop display character G4. In the loop display effect, the types of symbols G1 to G3 are different from those in the case of FIG. 4B, and the variation display mode of symbols in a plurality of symbol rows is also the case of FIG. 4B. Is a different embodiment. More specifically, three cubic base symbol images G6 to G8 are displayed side by side in the horizontal direction, and numerical symbols G1 to G3 are displayed in front of the base symbol images G6 to G8. The When the symbols are changed and displayed, the base symbol images G6 to G8 rotate in the vertical direction around the rotation axis extending in the horizontal direction so as to pass through the centers of the base symbol images G6 to G8. The symbols G1 to G3 displayed on the front of the symbol images G6 to G8 are changed. Although the change opportunity between the display mode of the symbol shown in FIG. 4B and the display mode of the symbol shown in FIG. 32A is arbitrary, for example, there are a plurality of display modes and the first display mode In FIG. 4B, the symbol display mode shown in FIG. 4B may be used, and in the second display mode, the symbol display mode shown in FIG. 32A may be used.

  In the loop display effect, the loop display character G4 is displayed so as to repeat a series of actions. Specifically, in a situation where the base symbol images G6 to G8 are not rotated and displayed, as shown in FIG. 32 (a), the base symbol images G6 to G8 are parked for the unit period during the parked state. The loop display character G4 is displayed so as to perform the operation and repeat the operation during the stop (the display content is also referred to as the stop display). As the motion during the stop, for example, a motion in which the loop display character G4 moves up and down with arms folded can be considered. On the other hand, in the situation where the rotation display is performed in any of the base symbol images G6 to G8, as shown in FIG. 32 (b), the display unit is moving in a predetermined direction during the moving unit period. The loop display character G4 is displayed so that the moving operation is repeated and the moving operation is repeated (the display content is also referred to as moving display). For example, an action in which the loop display character G4 is running in a predetermined direction can be considered as the movement action.

  In the loop display effect, the loop display background G5 does not cause the background to scroll as shown in FIG. 32 (a) in the situation where the loop display character G4 is performing the stop operation. It is displayed so that the player can recognize that the background continues to be displayed. On the other hand, in a situation where the loop display character G4 is moving, the loop display character G4 is displayed as if it is moving in a predetermined direction as shown in FIG. Accordingly, the loop display background G5 is displayed so that the background image is scrolled in the direction opposite to the predetermined direction. In this case, the loop display background G5 is displayed so that a series of background images scrolls over the background movement unit period, and the series of background images is repeatedly scrolled every time the background movement unit period elapses. Is displayed.

  The flow of the loop display effect will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 33 (a) shows the execution period of game times, FIG. 33 (b) shows the flow of periodic display of the loop display character G4 in the situation where the movement action is being performed, and FIG. 33 (c). Shows the flow of periodic display of the loop display character G4 in the situation where the motion during the stop is being performed, and FIG. 33 (d) shows the flow of scroll display of the loop display background G5.

  At the timing of t1, the game times are started as shown in FIG. 33 (a), whereby the variation display of the symbols G1 to G3 is started. At the timing t1, as shown in FIGS. 33 (b) and 33 (c), the loop display character G4 starts the moving motion from the state where the stationary motion is being performed. As shown in FIG. 33 (d), scroll display is also started in the loop display background G5.

  Thereafter, the moving action is repeated in the loop display character G4 and the series of background images are scrolled and displayed in the loop display background G5 until the timing t6 when the current game round ends. More specifically, the loop display character G4 performs one execution of the moving action in the moving unit period Tc1 from the timing t1 to the timing t2, the timing t2 to the timing t3, and the timing t3 to the timing t4. Is done. In this case, the next execution time of the moving operation is started at the timing t2 when one execution time of the moving operation is completed, and the next operation time of the moving operation is started at the timing t3 when the one execution time of the moving operation is ended. One execution time is started, and the next one execution time of the moving operation is started at a timing t4 when the one execution time of the moving operation is completed. The display mode of the loop display character G4 at the start timing of each execution time of the movement operation is the same, and the loop display character at the timing when the same time has elapsed from the start timing of the execution time of the movement operation. The display mode of G4 is the same.

  Further, for the loop display background G5, one execution of scroll display of a series of background images is performed in the background movement unit period Tc2 from the timing t1 to the timing t5. In this case, the next one execution of the scroll display is started at the timing t5 when one execution of the scroll display of the series of background images ends. Further, the display mode of the loop display background G5 at the start timing of each execution time of the scroll display is the same, and the background for loop display at the timing when the same time has elapsed from the start timing of the execution time of the scroll display. The display forms of G5 are the same.

  In the above configuration, the moving unit period Tc1 is shorter than the background moving unit period Tc2. Therefore, even if one execution time of the moving action in the loop display character G4 and one execution time of the scroll display of the series of background images in the loop display background G5 are started simultaneously, the end timing of each execution time is It will be different. In addition, the number of times that one execution of the moving operation is performed in one game time may be different from the number of times that one execution of scroll display of a series of background images is performed in one game time.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t6, the game turn end timing is reached as shown in FIG. 33 (a), so that the loop display character G4 is moving as shown in FIGS. 33 (b) and 33 (c). As shown in FIG. 33 (d), the loop display background G5 is stopped and displayed from the state in which a series of background images are scrolled as shown in FIG. 33 (d). Can be switched to In this case, although the timing of t6 is a timing in the middle of one execution of the moving motion in the loop display character G4, the moving motion is terminated at the midway timing and the stationary motion is started. In addition, the timing of t6 is a timing in the middle of one execution in the scroll display of a series of background images in the loop display background G5, and the stop display of the loop display background G5 is performed in the state displayed at the timing of t6. Be started.

  The operation during the stop is started in the loop display character G4 at the timing of t6, and the operation during the stop is repeated in the loop display character G4 until the timing of t10 which is the timing at which the next game turn is started. More specifically, the loop display character G4 has one execution time of the stationary operation in the stationary unit period Tc3 of the timing t6 to the timing t7, the timing t7 to the timing t8, and the timing t8 to the timing t9. Is done. In this case, the next execution time of the operation during the stop is started at the timing t7 when one execution time of the operation during the stop is completed, and the next operation after the operation during the stop is performed at the timing t8 when one execution time of the operation during the stop operation is completed. One execution time is started, and the next one execution time of the stationary operation is started at timing t9 when the one execution time of the stationary operation is completed. In addition, the display mode of the loop display character G4 at the start timing of each execution time of the stationary operation is the same, and the loop display character at the timing when the same time has elapsed from the start timing of the execution time of the stationary operation The display mode of G4 is the same. The stationary unit period Tc3 is shorter than the moving unit period Tc1. Therefore, when compared in the same execution period, the number of times of one execution of the stationary operation is larger than the number of times of one execution of the moving operation.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t10, a game round is newly started as shown in FIG. In this case, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), the timing of t10 is a timing during one execution of the stopping operation of the loop display character G4, but the loop display character G4 performs the stopping operation. The moving operation starts from the middle of the operation. Then, the loop display character G4 repeatedly executes the moving action in the same manner as in the timing from t1 to t6.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33 (d), the loop display background G5 is stopped and displayed at the content of the background image at the time when the previous game round ends at the timing of t6, and the stopped display state. Is continued until the timing of t10. Therefore, at the timing of t10 when a new game round is started, scroll display of a series of background images is resumed from the stopped display state. That is, a series of background image scroll display is temporarily stopped from the timing t6 to the timing t10, and the series of background image scroll display is performed while taking over the flow up to the timing t6 at the timing t10. It will be resumed.

  When the scroll display effect is executed as described above, both the loop display character G4 and the loop display background G5 are displayed behind the symbols G1 to G3, and the loop display character G4 and the loop are displayed during the game times. Although a series of displays over a predetermined period is repeated in both of the display backgrounds G5, while the game times are not being executed, the loop display character G4 is repeatedly operated during the stop, whereas the loop display background In G5, the scroll display of a series of background images is stopped and displayed. In this case, if the table for controlling the display of the loop display character G4 and the loop display background G5 is set as the same table, a non-game-playing table is prepared and the non-game-playing table is prepared. It is necessary to prepare several tables corresponding to all the timings that can be stopped and displayed in the loop display background G5, or to fix the timing to stop and display in the loop display background G5. If an attempt is made to prepare a number of non-game-playing tables corresponding to all of the timings that can be stopped and displayed in the loop display background G5, the number of the tables increases and the storage capacity of the memory module 74 is compressed, and the loop If the stop timing of the display background G5 is to be fixed, the display mode of the loop display background G5 during the non-game round will be uniform regardless of the timing at which the game round ends.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, a table for controlling the display of the loop display character G4 and a table for controlling the display of the loop display background G5 are prepared separately. Hereinafter, the contents of data stored in advance in the memory module 74 for executing the loop display effect will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  As data for performing a loop display effect, the memory module 74 stores an image data group 121 for loop display in advance as shown in FIG. The loop display image data group 121 includes image data for displaying the base symbol images G6 to G8, image data for displaying the symbols G1 to G3 in the base symbol images G6 to G8, and a loop display character G4. Image data for display and image data for displaying the loop display background G5 are included. In this case, the image data for displaying the loop display character G4 includes a plurality of types of image data used when performing a stationary operation and a plurality of types of images used when performing a moving operation. Data and are included. There are also a plurality of types of image data for displaying the loop display background G5.

  In addition to the loop display image data group 121, the memory module 74 stores a character retention table 122, a character movement table 123, and a background table 124 in advance. The character stopping table 122 is a table that is referred to in order to cause the loop display character G4 to repeatedly perform the stopping operation. The character movement table 123 is a table that is referred to in order to cause the loop display character G4 to repeatedly perform the movement operation. The background table 124 is a table that is referred to in order to scroll a series of background images in a situation in which a moving action is being performed on the loop display character G4.

  FIG. 35 (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the character retention table 122, FIG. 35 (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the character movement table 123, and FIG. 35 (c) is for background use. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the table. As shown in FIGS. 35 (a) to 35 (c), pointer information corresponding to the update timing of an image for one frame is set in each table 122 to 124, and corresponding to each pointer information. Information about the task contents is set. In the task content information, information for specifying the type of image data to be displayed in each corresponding frame is set, and the arrangement position of the image data set as the display target (that is, the frame buffer) Parameter information such as coordinate information indicating the writing target frame regions 82a and 82b in 82 and scale information indicating the size of the image data set as the display target is set.

  In detail for each table, the character retention table 122 is set with pointer information (“0” to “99”) corresponding to the number of frames corresponding to the unit period Tc3 during the suspension. The contents of the task corresponding to each pointer information include the image data of the loop display character G4 for causing the loop display character G4 to display at one timing of the stopping operation in the frame corresponding to the pointer information. The type and parameter information to be applied to the image data are set. When it is the drawing timing of the image for one frame, the next pointer information becomes the reference object for the pointer information that was the reference object at the previous drawing timing, and loops according to the contents of the task corresponding to the pointer information. When the display control of the display character G4 is executed, the stationary operation is performed in the loop display character G4. Further, when the display control corresponding to the last pointer information in the character stop table 122 is completed in the period in which the loop display character G4 performs the stop motion, the pointer information to be referred to is the first in the character stop table 122. Return to the pointer information. As a result, it is possible to repeatedly execute the stationary motion using the character stationary table 122 in which display control data corresponding to one execution time of the stationary motion is set.

  In the character moving table 123, pointer information (“0” to “199”) corresponding to the number of frames corresponding to the moving unit period Tc1 is set. The contents of the task corresponding to each pointer information include the image data of the loop display character G4 for causing the loop display character G4 to display at one timing of the moving motion in the frame corresponding to the pointer information. The type and parameter information to be applied to the image data are set. When it is the drawing timing of the image for one frame, the next pointer information becomes the reference object for the pointer information that was the reference object at the previous drawing timing, and loops according to the contents of the task corresponding to the pointer information. When the display control of the display character G4 is executed, the moving operation is performed in the loop display character G4. In addition, when the display control corresponding to the last pointer information in the character movement table 123 is completed during the period in which the loop display character G4 performs the movement operation, the pointer information to be referred to is the first in the character movement table 123. Return to the pointer information. Accordingly, it is possible to repeatedly execute the moving motion using the character moving table 123 in which the display control data corresponding to one execution time of the moving motion is set.

  In the background table 124, pointer information (“0” to “599”) corresponding to the number of frames corresponding to the background movement unit period Tc2 is set. The content of the task corresponding to each pointer information includes the type of image data of the loop display background G5 for causing the loop display background G5 to display at one timing in the frame corresponding to the pointer information. And parameter information to be applied to the image data. When it is the drawing timing of the image for one frame, the next pointer information becomes the reference object for the pointer information that was the reference object at the previous drawing timing, and loops according to the contents of the task corresponding to the pointer information. By executing display control of the display background G5, a series of background images are scrolled and displayed in the loop display background G5. Further, when the display control corresponding to the last pointer information in the background table 124 is completed during the period in which the scroll display is performed on the loop display background G5, the pointer information to be referred to is the first pointer in the background table 124. Return to information. Accordingly, it is possible to repeatedly execute scroll display using the background table 124 in which display control data corresponding to one execution of scroll display is set.

  In the configuration in which the tables 122 and 123 for controlling the display of the loop display character G4 and the table 124 for controlling the display of the loop display background G5 are separately provided, In order to synchronize the start and the stop of the scroll display of the loop display background G5, and to synchronize the start of the moving action in the loop display character G4 and the start of the scroll display of the loop display background G5, as shown in FIG. ), The work RAM 73 is provided with a linkage flag 125. The state in which “1” is set in the interlocking flag 125 corresponds to the situation in which the moving action is performed in the loop display character G4, and in the situation in which “1” is set in the interlocking flag 125. The scroll display of the loop display background G5 is performed. On the other hand, a state in which the interlocking flag is “0” corresponds to a situation in which an operation while the loop display character G4 is stopped, and a loop display is performed in a situation in which the interlocking flag 125 is “0”. The scroll display of the background G5 is stopped.

  As described above, the tables 122 and 123 for controlling the display of the loop display character G4 and the table 124 for controlling the display of the loop display background G5 are prepared separately, so that the game times are completed. When the timing is reached, the updating of the pointer information in the background table 124 is stopped to stop and display the loop display background G5, while the pointer information in the character stopping table 122 is updated to update the loop display character G4. By performing the display control, it is possible to cause the loop display character G4 to perform the stop display. Therefore, it is possible to start the stop display by ending the scroll display of the loop display background G5 at an arbitrary timing in accordance with the timing at which the game round ends. In addition, since it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of types of tables in non-game times corresponding to the arbitrary timing, the number of tables for controlling the loop display effect can be reduced, and the tables are stored in advance. It is possible to reduce the storage capacity.

  Note that there are four or more types of timing at which the scroll display of the background G5 for loop display is stopped in relation to the timing at which the game round ends.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the loop display effect will be described. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the calculation process for the character loop executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation process for the character loop is executed in the effect calculation process in step S704 in the task process (FIG. 19) in a situation where the loop display effect is to be executed.

  When it is determined that it is the game turn start timing based on the currently read execution target table (step S1101: YES), the character movement table 123 is read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 and set as a table to be used. (Step S1102). Thereafter, “1” is set to the interlocking flag 125 of the work RAM 73 (step S1103), and the pointer information to be referred to in the character movement table 123 is cleared to “0” (step S1104). In this case, in step S1112, the image data of the loop display character G4 set in the task content corresponding to the first pointer information in the character movement table 123 is grasped as the image data to be used this time. In step S 1113, parameter information to be applied to the current image data to be used is derived using information set in the task content corresponding to the first pointer information in the character movement table 123. To grasp.

  When it is determined that it is the game game end timing based on the currently read execution target table (step S1105: YES), the character retention table 122 is read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 and set as a table to be used. (Step S1106). Thereafter, the interlocking flag 125 of the work RAM 73 is cleared to “0” (step S1107), and the pointer information to be referred to in the character retention table 122 is cleared to “0” (step S1108). In this case, in step S1112, the image data of the loop display character G4 set in the content of the task corresponding to the first pointer information in the character retention table 122 is grasped as the image data to be used this time. In step S1113, the parameter information applied to the image data to be used this time is derived and grasped using the information set in the task content corresponding to the first pointer information in the character retention table 122. To do.

  If this time is not the start timing and end timing of the game times (step S1101 and step S1105: NO), the pointer information is updated for the table to be used among the character movement table 123 and the character stop table 122 ( Step S1109). Specifically, the update process is executed so that the value of the pointer information is incremented by one. If the updated pointer information exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the table to be used (step S1110: YES), “0” is cleared to return the pointer information to the initial value (step S1110). S1111). In this case, in step S1112, the image data of the loop display character G4 set in the task content corresponding to the current pointer information in the tables 122 and 123 to be used is used as the image data to be used this time. To grasp. In step S1113, parameter information to be applied to the image data to be used this time using information set in the task contents corresponding to the current pointer information in the tables 122 and 123 to be used. Deriving and grasping.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the calculation process for the background loop executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation process for the background loop is executed in the background calculation process in step S703 in the task process (FIG. 19) in a situation where the loop display effect is to be executed.

  If “1” is set in the interlocking flag 125 of the work RAM 73 (step S1201: YES), the pointer information to be referred to in the background table 124 is updated (step S1202). Specifically, the update process is executed so that the value of the pointer information is incremented by one. If the updated pointer information exceeds the maximum value of the pointer information in the background table 124 (step S1203: YES), “0” is cleared to return the pointer information to the initial value (step S1204). Thereafter, the image data of the loop display background G5 set in the task content corresponding to the current pointer information in the background table 124 is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S1205). Further, by using information set in the task content corresponding to the current pointer information in the background table 124, parameter information to be applied to the current image data to be used is derived and grasped (step S1206). .

  If “1” is not set in the interlocking flag (step S1201: NO), the image data of the loop display background G5 set in the content of the task corresponding to the current pointer information in the background table 124 is used this time. As a result, the image data of the loop display background G5 similar to the previous time is recognized as the current use target image data (step S1207). Further, by grasping the parameter information set in the area for storing the parameter information applied to the image data in the work RAM 73 as the parameter information applied to the image data to be used this time, the same as the previous time. The parameter information of the loop display background G5 is grasped as the parameter information of the current use target (step S1208).

  When the calculation processing for the character loop and the calculation processing for the background loop are executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605) includes steps S1112 and S1205, or The image data grasped in step S1207 is set as a drawing target. In addition, parameter information to be applied to the image data is set in the drawing list.

  As described above, the tables 122 and 123 for controlling the display of the loop display character G4 and the table 124 for controlling the display of the loop display background G5 are prepared separately, so that the game times are completed. When the timing is reached, the updating of the pointer information in the background table 124 is stopped to stop and display the loop display background G5, while the pointer information in the character stopping table 122 is updated to update the loop display character G4. By performing the display control, it is possible to cause the loop display character G4 to perform the stop display. Therefore, it is possible to start the stop display by ending the scroll display of the loop display background G5 at an arbitrary timing in accordance with the timing at which the game round ends. In addition, since it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of types of tables in non-game times corresponding to the arbitrary timing, the number of tables for controlling the loop display effect can be reduced, and the tables are stored in advance. It is possible to reduce the storage capacity.

  Dedicated pointer information is set in the tables 122 and 123 for display control of the loop display character G4, and dedicated pointer information is set in the table 124 for display control of the loop display background G5. As a result, one of the tables 122, 123, and 124 can be kept unused, while updating the other pointer information can be continued, or the other pointer information can be held in predetermined information. Become.

  As a table for performing display control of the loop display character G4, a character stop table 122 for causing the loop display character G4 to perform stop display and a loop display character G4 for performing display during movement. A character moving table 123 is provided separately. As a result, when the variable display mode of the loop display character G4 is switched, it is only necessary to switch the tables 122 and 123 to be used, and it is possible to suitably switch these variable display modes. In addition, as the switching timing, it is possible to set an arbitrary timing while suppressing the number of tables.

  The character display table 122 is repeatedly looped and used to cause the loop display character G4 to repeatedly display the stop state, and the character movement table 123 is repeatedly looped and used to move to the loop display character G4. Repeat the display. Thereby, the data capacity of these tables 122 and 123 can be suppressed.

  By repeatedly using the background table 124 in a loop, scroll display of the loop display background G5 is repeated. In this case, the number of image update timings required for the loop display background G5 to make one round is different from the number of image update timings required for the loop display character G4 to make one round of movement display. In this configuration, a character movement table 123 for causing the loop display character G4 to display during movement and a background table 124 for causing the loop display background G5 to perform scroll display are individually provided. As a result, it is possible to set only information corresponding to one turn in each of the tables 123 and 124, and there is no need to set useless information exceeding one turn.

  When the character moving table 123 is used and the moving display is started in the loop display character G4, “1” is set to the interlocking flag 125, so that the loop display background G5 using the background table 124 is set. When the loop display character G4 is started and the display during movement of the loop display character G4 is ended, the interlocking flag 125 is cleared to “0”, whereby the loop display background G5 using the background table 124 is scrolled. Is terminated. Thus, in the execution target table for controlling the overall flow of the loop display effect, it is only necessary to set information on the start timing and end timing of the moving display for the loop display character G4. It is not necessary to set information on the start timing and end timing of scroll display for the background G5. Therefore, the movement of the loop display character G4 and the loop display background G5 can be linked while suppressing the amount of data set in advance in the data table.

<Another form of loop display effect>
When the loop display character G4 is moving, the relative position of the building image with respect to the loop display character G4 in the loop display background G5 is not changed, but the lighting condition of the building image and the sky scenery The display mode such as the color of the image, the presence / absence of a sky cloud image, and the display position may be changed. In this case, since the display mode of the loop display background G5 is changed even when the scroll display is stopped in the loop display background G5, the display control of the loop display background G5 in the situation is performed. It is preferable that a table is provided separately.

  -It is good also as a structure which continues the scroll display of the loop display background G5 irrespective of whether the moving display is performed in the character G4 for loop display. Even in this case, it is possible to prepare a table corresponding to the operation of one turn of each of the individual images G4 and G5 by making the table different between the loop display character G4 and the loop display background G5. Therefore, it is not necessary to set useless information exceeding one round. The same applies to the case where the loop display character G4 continues to display during movement and the loop display background G5 continues to scroll.

  A configuration may be adopted in which the type of the loop display background G5 can be changed in a situation in which the loop display character G4 continues to display during movement. Even in this configuration, by separately providing a table for controlling the loop display character G4 and a table for controlling the loop display background G5, the loop display background G5 can be switched when the loop display background G5 is switched. It is only necessary to switch the table for controlling the display background G5, and the table for controlling the loop display character G4 can be used as it is.

  The interlocking flag 125 is not provided, and in the execution target table for controlling the entire loop display effect, together with information on the switching timing between the stationary display and the moving display in the loop display character G4, It is good also as a structure by which the information of the start timing and stop timing of the scroll display in the loop display background G5 is set.

<Configuration for performing group display effects>
Next, a configuration for performing a group display effect will be described.

  38 (a) and 38 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the group display effect. The group display effect is an effect that is displayed so that a large number of group display characters G11 move in the group display direction as a group. The group display character G11 is displayed so that a player can recognize that a person having a face, a torso, both hands, and both feet is expressed. In addition, each group display character G11 is displayed so that the player can recognize that it is the same or similar character, although the operation content of limbs and the like is different. The group display characters G11 are displayed so as to cross the symbol display device 41 as a group across one direction over a group display period (for example, 3 seconds). Comparing the case of FIG. 38 (a) with the case of FIG. 38 (b), the display position of the group display character G11 shown in FIG. 38 (a) is entirely left in FIG. 38 (b). It is displaced in the direction. Further, each group display character G11 is displayed in a shape that is recognized by the player as moving in the direction of movement as a group.

  The moving direction of the group display character G11 is not limited to the horizontal direction and may be the vertical direction, and some of the group display characters G11 are directed from the predetermined end of the symbol display device 41 toward the center. The remaining group display character G11 may be displayed so as to move from the opposite end to the center with respect to the predetermined end of the symbol display device 41.

  Group display moving image data 131 is used as image data for displaying the group display character G11 in the group display effect. The moving image data is image data that is compressed between frames so as to have a plurality of difference data with reference to still image data for one frame and is encoded by, for example, the MPEG2 method. When the moving image data is decoded, it is expanded into still image data for a plurality of frames.

  FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the moving image data 131 for group display. As shown in FIG. 39, in the moving image data 131 for group display, file data is set at the first address, and subsequently, compressed data of each frame is set. The compressed data of each frame is accompanied by a frame header. The compressed data includes one frame of I picture data corresponding to the reference data, a plurality of frames of P picture data corresponding to the first difference data, and a plurality of frames of B picture data corresponding to the second difference data. And have.

  The I picture data is data that can create still image data for one frame by the data alone at the time of decoding. P picture data is data that can generate still image data for one frame by performing forward prediction with reference to I picture data or P picture data of one frame or a plurality of frames before decoding. . B picture data is decoded by bi-directional prediction with reference to I picture data or P picture data before one frame or plural frames and I picture data or P picture data after one frame or plural frames. This is data that can create still image data for one frame.

  In the compressed data in the group display moving image data 131, I picture data is set as data of the first frame. In addition, B picture data is set as data of the second frame,..., M−1 frame. Also, P picture data is set as the data of the mth frame. Further, B picture data is set as data of the (m + 1) th frame,..., The (n−1) th frame. Also, P picture data is set as the nth frame data. Note that the arrangement pattern of the picture data is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary.

  By executing decoding processing on the group display moving image data 131, still image data (hereinafter also referred to as decoded image data) corresponding to a plurality of update timings is created from the group display moving image data 131. The Rukoto. In this case, the group display moving image data 131 has a relationship with the compression rate of the image data, and the period in which the decoded image data can be used is longer than the image update period in the symbol display device 41.

  The relationship between the image update period and the period in which still image data can be used will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 40 (a1) shows the update timing of the image in the symbol display device 41, FIG. 40 (a2) shows the usable timing of the image data stored in the memory module 74 in advance as still image data, and FIG. ) Indicates the usable timing of the decoded image data by the group display moving image data 131.

  The image update period Td1 in the symbol display device 41 is 20 msec as already described, and as shown in FIG. 40 (a1), the timing of t1, the timing of t2, the timing of t3, the timing of t4, and the timing of t5 , T6 and t7, the image on the symbol display device 41 is updated. Further, since the image data stored in advance in the memory module 74 as the still image data can be used as it is, as shown in FIG. 40 (a2), at each timing from timing t1 to timing t7. It can be used.

  On the other hand, the usable period Td2 of the decoded image data based on the group display moving image data 131 is twice the image update period Td1 of the symbol display device 41 as shown in FIG. 40 (a3). Therefore, although the decoded image data can be used at the timings t1, t3, t5, and t7, new decoded image data is not used at the timings t2, t4, and t6. Cannot be used.

  In this case, at each of the timing t2, the timing t4, and the timing t6, the decoded image data that is the same as the decoded image data used at the timing t1, the timing t3, and the timing t5, which are the immediately preceding timings. It is also possible to use. However, if an attempt is made to simply use the same decoded image data, there is a risk that the image will be unstable, and smooth moving image display cannot be performed. On the other hand, at the two consecutive update timings in which the same decoded image data is used, the range of drawing in the drawing target frame regions 82a and 82b in the same decoded image data is made different. The occurrence of image shakiness is reduced.

  40 (b) and 40 (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining how different ranges are drawn in the drawing target frame regions 82a and 82b in the same decoded image data 132. FIG.

  When drawing data is created in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn in the VDP 76, data is written in all unit areas of the frame areas 82a and 82b, but the resolution of each frame area 82a and 82b is 800 × 600. The number of dots. On the other hand, each decoded image data 132 obtained by executing decoding processing on the moving image data 131 for group display is larger than the number of dots in the frame regions 82a and 82b in the size of the initial magnification after the decoding processing. The number of pixels. The range that can be drawn by the decoded image data 132 at the initial magnification is larger than the frame regions 82a and 82b in both the horizontal dimension and the vertical dimension. Thus, even if the same decoded image data 132 is configured to change the drawing range of the frame regions 82a and 82b in accordance with the moving direction of the group display character G11 at two consecutive update timings, The group display character G11 can be displayed as a whole.

  However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the direction in which the group display character G11 moves as a group in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction in the range that can be drawn by the decoded image data 132 is the direction in the frame regions 82a and 82b. However, the direction different from the direction in which the group display characters G11 move as a group in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction is the same or shorter than the direction in the frame regions 82a and 82b. It is good also as a certain structure.

  Of the two consecutive update timings where the same decoded image data 132 is used, the group display characters G11 move as a group in the decoded image data 132 as shown in FIG. 40 (b). The drawing range in the frame areas 82a and 82b is set close to the end on the front side in the direction to be moved, that is, the end on the left side. On the other hand, at the update timing on the rear side, as shown in FIG. 40C, the group display characters G11 in the decoded image data 132 move toward the original end in the moving direction, that is, the right end. Thus, the drawing range in the frame areas 82a and 82b is set. That is, at the update timing on the rear side with respect to the update timing on the front side, the drawing range in the frame regions 82a and 82b in the decoded image data 132 is opposite to the direction in which the group display character G11 moves as a group. Moving. As a result, the group display character G11 displayed at the predetermined position at the front update timing is displayed at the position moved to the left side of the predetermined position at the rear update timing. Therefore, even if the same decoded image data 132 is used at two successive update timings, the group display character G11 moves in a group movement direction between the two update timings. Such a display can be performed. Note that a range outside the drawing range in the frame regions 82a and 82b in the decoded image data 132 is excluded from the drawing target.

  Here, when the same decoded image data 132 is used at two successive update timings, the movement amount of the group display character G11 at the rear update timing with respect to the group display character G11 at the front update timing is predetermined. The amount of movement. On the other hand, the movement amount of the group display character G11 at the front side update timing in the decoded image data 132 corresponding to the next use timing with respect to the group display character G11 at the rear side update timing is also the predetermined movement amount. It is the same.

  That is, the first decoded image data 132 at one use timing and the second decoded image data 132 at the next use timing are two update timings displayed using the decoded image data 132 at one use timing. Between the movement amount of the group display character G11 between the rear side update timing displayed using the first decoded image data 132 and the front side update timing displayed using the second decoded image data 132 The movement amount of the group display character G11 is set to be the same as the predetermined movement amount. More specifically, when the first decoded image data 132 is used and when the second decoded image data 132 is used, a comparison is made at the display position of the predetermined group display character G11 to be displayed. From the display position of the predetermined group display character G11 at the front update timing when the first decoded image data 132 is used, the predetermined group display character at the front update timing when the second decoded image data 132 is used. The amount of movement to the display position of G11 is after the case where the first decoded image data 132 is used from the display position of the predetermined group display character G11 at the update timing on the front side when the first decoded image data 132 is used. Display position of a predetermined group display character G11 at the side update timing It is twice the amount of movement of up to. Further, at least the group display characters G11 move as a group in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction within the range that can be drawn by each decoded image data 132 of the initial magnification so that the movement amount can be set. The dimension in the direction (specifically, the dimension in the lateral direction) is set to be at least the predetermined movement amount larger than the dimension in the direction in the drawing range of the frame regions 82a and 82b. With such a configuration, the amount of movement of the group display character G11 between one update timing and the next update timing can be made constant, and the group display character G11 can be moved smoothly. It becomes.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the group display effect will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for group display effect executed by the display CPU 72. The group display effect calculation process is executed in the effect calculation process of step S704 in the task process (FIG. 19) in a situation where the group display effect is to be executed.

  When it is time to execute the decoding process on the moving image data 131 for group display (step S1301: YES), the address of the moving image data 131 for group display in the memory module 74 is grasped (step S1302), and the group The address of the work RAM 73 for expanding the display moving image data 131 as the decoded image data 132 is grasped (step S1303), and the decode designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 72 (step S1304). Further, the value of the same use flag provided in the work RAM 73 is cleared to “0” (step S1305). The same use flag is a flag for the display CPU 72 to specify whether or not to use the same decoded image data 132 as the previous update timing at one update timing, and the value of the same use flag is “0”. In some cases, it is specified that new decoded image data 132 is used. When the value of the same use flag is “1”, it is specified that the same decoded image data 132 as the previous update timing is used. .

  When the processes in steps S1302 to S1305 are executed, the address information of the group display moving image data 131 is set in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605). At the same time, information on the expansion destination address of the moving image data 131 for group display is set, and further, decode designation information is set. When the drawing list is received, the moving picture decoder 93 of the VDP 76 executes the decoding process shown in the flowchart of FIG. Specifically, the address of the group display moving image data 131 is obtained from the information specified in the drawing list (step S1401), and the group display moving image data is determined from the information specified in the drawing list. The address of the area to be developed as the decoded image data 132 is grasped (step S1402). Then, the group display moving image data 131 is read from the address of the memory module 74 grasped in step S1401, and the group display moving image data 131 is decoded. Then, each decoded image data 132 of the decoding result is written in each area of the address grasped in step S1402 (step S1403).

  Returning to the explanation of the calculation process for the group display effect (FIG. 41), if a negative determination is made in step S1301 or if the process of step S1305 is executed, is the value of the same use flag in the work RAM 73 “0”? It is determined whether or not (step S1306). When the value of the same use flag is “0” (step S1306: YES), this means that this is an update timing for using the new decoded image data 132 as a use target. In this case, first, the address of the work RAM 73 where the decoded image data 132 corresponding to the current use order is extracted from the plurality of decoded image data 132 that have been decoded is grasped (step S1307).

  Thereafter, “A, A” coordinates are grasped as coordinate information (step S1308). Here, the coordinate information is information for determining at which position the central pixel in the image data to be used is arranged with respect to the drawing target frame regions 82a and 82b. In the case of the “A, B” coordinates, the set position of the decoded image data 132 for the frame regions 82a and 82b is the position shown in FIG. 40B, and the frame regions 82a and 82b are positioned to the left in the decoded image data 132. The drawing range is set. Note that the value of A and the value of B are the same regardless of the type of decoded image data 132. Thereafter, after updating and grasping parameter information other than the coordinate information (step S1309), “1” is set to the same use flag of the work RAM 73 (step S1310). As a result, at the next update timing, the same decoded image data 132 as the current update timing becomes the target of use.

  When “1” is set in the same use flag (step S1306: NO), this means that this is the update timing for using the same decoded image data 132 as the previous update timing. In this case, the address of the work RAM 73 where the same decoded image data 132 as the previous one is developed is grasped (step S1311).

  Thereafter, “A-1, B” coordinates are grasped as coordinate information (step S1312). In the case of the “A-1, B” coordinates, the set position of the decoded image data 132 for the frame regions 82a and 82b is the position shown in FIG. The drawing range is set. Thereafter, after grasping parameter information other than the coordinate information (step S1313), the same use flag in the work RAM 73 is cleared to “0” (step S1314). As a result, the new decoded image data 132 is used at the next update timing.

  When the processing of step S1307 to step S1310 or step S1311 to step S1314 is executed, the decoded image data 132 to be used this time is included in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S605). Is set, and the parameter information to be applied to the decoded image data 132 including the coordinate information is set. When the drawing list is received, the VDP 76 executes a group display setting process as a part of the content grasping process executed in step S804 of the drawing process (FIG. 21). FIG. 42B is a flowchart showing the group display setting process.

  In the group display setting process, first, the address information in which the decoded image data 132 to be used this time is stored is grasped from the drawing list (step S1501). Further, the coordinate information applied to the decoded image data 132 to be used this time is grasped from the drawing list (step S1502), and other parameter information applied to the decoded image data 132 is grasped from the drawing list (step S1503). ).

  By executing the group display setting process as described above, in the subsequent writing process (step S805), the current decoding is performed with the parameters applied to the drawing target frame regions 82a and 82b. Image data 132 is drawn. In this case, if the coordinate information is “A, B”, the range shown in FIG. 40B is drawn. If the coordinate information is “A-1, B”, the range shown in FIG. 40C is drawn. The The group display effect is executed by outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 41 based on the drawing data.

  As described above, even if the cycle in which the decoded image data 132 based on the group display moving image data 131 can be used is twice the image update cycle in the symbol display device 41, the same decoded image data 132 is used. In two consecutive update timings in which the image data is used, the range of drawing in the frame regions 82a and 82b in the same decoded image data 132 is different. As a result, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of image backlash.

  In two consecutive update timings in which the same decoded image data 132 is used, the drawing range of the decoded image data 132 at the front side update timing and the drawing range of the decoded image data 132 at the back side update timing are the same. The parts are overlapping. As a result, it is possible to cause a slight image change between two successive update timings while using the same decoded image data 132.

  In the two consecutive update timings in which the same decoded image data 132 is used, each group display character G11 is displayed in the group display image at the rear update timing with respect to the group display image at the front update timing. In the same decoded image data 132, the range to be drawn in the drawing target frame regions 82a and 82b is changed so that the position is shifted to the front side in the moving direction. As a result, even if the same decoded image data 132 is used at two consecutive update timings, it is possible to give continuity to the movement of the group display character G11.

  The direction in which at least the group display characters G11 move as a group in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction in the range that can be drawn by each decoded image data 132 at the initial magnification is set wider than the direction in the frame regions 82a and 82b. ing. Thus, even if the same decoded image data 132 is configured to change the drawing range of the frame regions 82a and 82b in accordance with the moving direction of the group display character G11 at two consecutive update timings, The group display character G11 can be displayed as a whole.

  The first decoded image data 132 at one use timing and the second decoded image data 132 at the next use timing are between two update timings displayed using the decoded image data 132 at one use timing. Group display between the movement amount of the group display character G11, the rear update timing displayed using the first decoded image data 132, and the front update timing displayed using the second decoded image data 132 The moving amount of the character G11 for use is set to be the same. As a result, the amount of movement of the group display character G11 between one update timing and the next update timing can be made constant, and the group display character G11 can be moved smoothly.

  An image displayed by using the same decoded image data 132 at two consecutive update timings is an image in which a large number of group display characters G11 move in the same direction. As a result, it is difficult to notice that the same decoded image data 132 is used at two consecutive update timings.

<Another form of group display effect>
The dimension (specifically, the dimension in the horizontal direction) in which at least the group display character G11 moves as a group in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction in the range that can be drawn by each decoded image data 132 at the initial magnification The present invention is not limited to a configuration that is set to be at least a predetermined movement amount larger than the dimension in the specific direction in the drawing range of the frame regions 82a and 82b, and the decoded image data 132 after decoding is enlarged from the size of the initial magnification. Accordingly, a configuration in which at least the dimension in the specific direction is set to be larger by at least the predetermined movement amount than the dimension in the specific direction in the drawing range of the frame regions 82a and 82b may be adopted. In this case, although it is necessary to execute a size enlargement process on the decoded image data 132, the display position of the group display character G11 is moved by a predetermined distance between two successive update timings using the same decoded image data 132. It is possible to change the amount.

  The moving direction of the group display character G11 is not limited to the horizontal direction, and may be the vertical direction. In this case, at least the vertical dimension in the range that can be drawn by the decoded image data 132 of the initial magnification or the decoded image data 132 after the enlargement process from the size of the initial magnification is the vertical dimension in the drawing range of the frame regions 82a and 82b. It is necessary to set at least a predetermined movement amount larger than that.

  The group display character G11 is not limited to a person, and may be other animals such as cats, fish, and dogs, or may be a figure of something other than animals.

  A configuration in which the same image data is used at a plurality of consecutive update timings and the drawing ranges in the frame regions 82a and 82b are different at each update timing is the same for a plurality of identical group display characters G11. You may apply to images other than the image which moves to the whole direction. For example, the above configuration may be applied when moving image display is performed in which a large single image exceeding the size of the liquid crystal display unit 41a of the symbol display device 41 moves in a predetermined direction.

  Decoding obtained by decoding the moving image data 131 so that the same image data is used at a plurality of consecutive update timings and the drawing range in the frame regions 82a and 82b is different at each update timing. You may apply to image data other than the image data 132. FIG. For example, the above configuration may be applied to still image data stored in advance in the memory module 74.

<Configuration for performing effective period display effect>
Next, a configuration for performing an effective period display effect will be described.

  43 (a) and 43 (b) are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the effective period display effect. The effective period display effect is an operation-related effect that changes the content of the effect depending on whether the effect operation device 48 is operated or not operated in the effective period during which the operation of the effect operation device 48 is enabled. When it is performed, it is an effect of displaying the effective period on the symbol display device 41.

  In the effective period display effect, an operation promotion image G21 for allowing the player to recognize that the effect operating device 48 should be operated on the symbol display device 41 is displayed, and the effect operating device 48 An effective period image G22 is displayed for allowing the player to recognize the remaining period during which the operation is effective. As the operation promotion image G21, specifically, an image representing the effect operating device 48 is displayed and an image that can be recognized as operating the effect operating device 48 is displayed. If the player can recognize that the device 48 is to be operated, the specific display content is arbitrary.

  As the effective period image G22, a frame image G23, a band image G24, and a blinking image G25 are displayed. The frame image G23 is an image for displaying the frame portion of the effective period image G22, and is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular frame shape. The band image G24 is displayed in the frame portion by the frame image G23 so as to extend rightward with the left end of the frame portion as the base end, and further, an effective period display effect is started as shown in FIG. In this case, the frame image G23 is displayed so as to fill the entire frame portion, and as the remaining effective period decreases, the tip position which is the right end position is displayed as shown in FIG. The display gradually moves toward the left end so that the range filled in the frame by the frame image G23 is narrowed. The blinking image G25 is displayed so as to be added to the leading end position of the band image G24, and is displayed so as to move in accordance with the leading end position when the leading end position of the band image G24 gradually moves to the left end. Further, the blinking image G25 is displayed as if it is blinking as a whole.

  Here, in a configuration in which blinking display is performed while the blinking image G25 is moved in accordance with the movement of the band image G24, data for controlling display of the movement of the band image G24 and blinking display of the blinking image G25 are controlled. If one data is set together by one animation data or the like, when one of the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is to be changed, the other is also changed accordingly. End up. A case where the event occurs will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 44 (a) shows how the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 changes, and FIG. 44 (b) shows how the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 changes.

  When the effective period display effect is started, the movement display of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is started at the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 44 (a), and blinking as shown in FIG. 44 (b). The blinking display of the image G25 is started. In this case, the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is the first speed, and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is the first blinking cycle Te1. Then, from the timing t1 to the timing t5, the movement display of the band image G24 at the first speed and the blinking display of the blinking image G25 at the first blinking period Te1 are performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t5, as shown in FIG. 44A, the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is changed to the second speed that is faster than the first speed. The speed change is performed by referring to the data in a predetermined order among the reference data set in time series in the data for display control of the movement of the band image G24, and thereafter performing data in a specific order. This is done by shortening the time required for display control with reference to FIG. Specifically, as data for display control, predetermined information is set when pointer information set by serial numbers and information of task contents are set so as to correspond to the pointer information on a one-to-one basis. Information on the task contents corresponding to the pointer information in a specific order, which is an order after the predetermined order, after the display control of the band image G24 is performed with reference to the information on the task contents corresponding to the order pointer information. The moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is changed by changing the number of times the image update timing is generated before the display control of the band image G24 is performed. In this case, if the data for display control of the band image G24 and the data for display control of the blinking image G25 are set together in the display control data, the movement of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is performed. In order to change the speed, display control is performed with reference to information on the contents of the task corresponding to the pointer information in the predetermined order, and then the task corresponding to the pointer information in the specific order, which is an order after the predetermined order. If the number of occurrences of image update timing that occurs before display control is performed with reference to the content information, the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is also changed accordingly.

  That is, when the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is changed from the first speed to the second speed at the timing t5 in FIG. 44 (a), the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 as shown in FIG. 44 (b). Is also changed from the first blinking cycle Te1 to the second blinking cycle Te2. The same applies to the case where the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is changed. If the display control data is set together, changing the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 will change the tip of the band image G24. The movement speed is also changed.

  On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, data for display control of the display content of the band image G24 and data for display control of the display content of the blinking image G25 are not provided together. It is provided separately. Hereinafter, the contents of data stored in advance in the memory module 74 in order to execute the effective period display effect will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  As data for performing the effective period display effect, the memory module 74 has frame display image data 141 for displaying the frame image G23 and band display for displaying the band image G24, as shown in FIG. Image data 142, lighting image data 143 for displaying the blinking image G25 in the lighting state, and lighting image data 144 for displaying the blinking image G25 in the lighting state are stored in advance. By drawing the frame display image data 141 in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn in the VDP 76, the frame image G23 can be displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  The band display image data 142 is set to a size that can fill the entire frame portion of the frame image G23 at the initial magnification, and the left end portion of the band image G24 matches the left end of the frame portion of the frame image G23. By setting the coordinate information for the frame regions 82a and 82b of the band display image data 142 at the initial magnification, the band image G24 is displayed so as to fill the entire frame portion of the frame image G23. Then, while gradually reducing the horizontal size of the band display image data 142 from the initial magnification, the band display image of the size is matched so that the left end portion of the band image G24 coincides with the left end of the frame portion of the frame image G23. By setting the coordinate information for the frame regions 82a and 82b of the data 142, an image in which the leading end portion of the band image G24 gradually moves toward the left end is displayed.

  The lighting image data 143 and the extinguishing image data 144 are both image data for displaying the blinking image G25, and the images displayed by the lighting image data 143 and the extinguishing image data 144 are the same at the initial magnification. Size and shape. However, the lighting image data 143 displays a relatively bright blinking image G25, and the extinguishing image data 144 displays a relatively dark blinking image G25. Only one of the lighting image data 143 and the lighting image data 144 is used at each update timing of the image, and the image data 143 and 144 that are the use target of the lighting image data 143 and the light-off image data 144 has a blinking image G25 at the leading end portion of the belt image G24. The coordinate information for the frame regions 82a and 82b is set so as to be displayed superimposed from the front side. Then, the display period of the blinking image G25 in the lighting state and the blinking image G25 in the unlit state are alternately displayed by alternately repeating the period in which the lighting image data 143 is to be used and the period in which the unlighting image data 144 is to be used. Display and display are alternately repeated. As a result, the blinking image G25 can be displayed as if the light is blinking.

  The memory module 74 stores in advance a band display table 145 and a blinking display table 146 in addition to the various image data 141 to 144. The band display table 145 is data for executing display control of the band image G24. Specifically, the horizontal size information of the band display image data 142 and the position information of the front end portion of the band image G24 are determined. Data. The blinking display table 146 is data for executing display control of the blinking image G25. Specifically, among the lighting image data 143 and the extinguishing image data 144, image data to be used for the blinking image G25 is determined. Data. The band display table 145 and the blinking display table 146 will be described in detail.

  FIG. 46A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the band display table 145. As shown in FIG. 46A, pointer information is set in the band display table 145 so as to be serial numbers, and the horizontal size of the band display image data 142 is associated with each pointer information. A combination of information and position information of the tip portion of the band image G24 is set. By reducing the size of the band display image data 142 by the magnification of the size information corresponding to the pointer information that is the reference target, the horizontal display range of the band image G24 is narrowed. The band display image data 142 is drawn in the frame regions 82a and 82b so that the left end portion of the band image G24 overlaps the left end of the frame portion of the frame image G23, so that the leading end portion of the band image G24 gradually becomes the left end. An image moving toward is displayed. Further, the tip position information corresponding to the pointer information to be referred to is the tip portion of the band image G24 when the band display image data 142 is drawn at a magnification of the size information corresponding to the pointer information. Corresponds to the position of. Then, the image data to be used is drawn out of the lighting image data 143 and the extinguishing image data 144 so as to be a position corresponding to the tip position information, thereby overlapping the tip portion of the belt image G24 from the front side. In this way, the blinking image G25 is displayed.

  When the display control of the band image G24 is performed so that the leading end portion of the band image G24 moves at the first speed, there is one over the update timing of the band-side specific number of times that is multiple times (for example, five times). The same size information and tip position information corresponding to the pointer information are referred to. Then, the pointer information is updated to the next order of pointer information at the update timing of the next image with respect to the update timing of the band-side specified number of times, and the size information and the tip position information corresponding to the pointer information are specified on the band side. Reference is made over the update timing of the number of images. In this way, by updating the pointer information every time the belt side specific number of times of image update elapses, the belt image G24 is displayed so that the tip portion moves at the first speed, and at the tip portion thereof. A blinking image G25 is displayed so as to overlap from the front side.

  On the other hand, when the display control of the band image G24 is performed so that the leading end portion of the band image G24 moves at a second speed faster than the first speed, the band-side predetermined number of times (the number of times less than the band-side specific number of times) For example, the same size information and tip position information corresponding to one piece of pointer information are referred to over two image update timings. Then, the pointer information is updated to the next order pointer information at the next image update timing with respect to the band-side predetermined number of image update timings, and the size information and the tip position information corresponding to the pointer information are the band-side predetermined information. Reference is made over the update timing of the number of images. In this way, by updating the pointer information every time the belt side predetermined number of times of image update elapses, the belt image G24 is displayed so that the tip portion moves at a second speed higher than the first speed. In addition, a blinking image G25 is displayed so as to overlap the front end portion from the front side.

  FIG. 46B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the blinking display table 146. As shown in FIG. 46B, pointer information is set in the blinking display table 146 so as to be serial numbers, and the lighting image data 143 and the extinguishing image data 144 are associated with each pointer information. Among these, image data to be used is set. The image data 143 and 144 set as the use target in the pointer information that is the reference target is the tip position information corresponding to the pointer information that is the reference target in the band display table 145 at the update timing of the image. By drawing at the position, the blinking image G25 in a state corresponding to the image data 143 and 144 to be used is displayed superimposed on the front end portion of the band image G24 from the front side.

  In the blinking display table 146, lighting image data 143 is set as image data to be used for pointer information “0” to “9”, and pointer information “10” to “19” is set. In this case, the unlit image data 144 is set as the image data to be used. When display control using the blinking display table 146 is performed, the pointer information to be referred to is incremented by one every time the pointer information is updated, and the pointer information value after the increment of 1 is the maximum value. When the value exceeds “19”, the value of the pointer information to be referred to is cleared to “0”. That is, while the effective period display effect is being performed, the reference period when the pointer information to be referred to in the blinking display table 146 starts from “0” and reaches “19” is one reference period. Will be repeated multiple times. Thereby, the data amount of the blinking display table 146 can be suppressed.

  When the display control of the blinking image G25 is performed so that the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 becomes the first blinking cycle Te1, the update timing of the image on the blinking side specific number of times that is multiple times (for example, twice) is one. The same target image data 143 and 144 corresponding to the pointer information is referred to. Then, the pointer information is updated to the next order pointer information at the next image update timing with respect to the blinking side specific number of times of the image update timing, and the same use target image data 143 and 144 corresponding to the pointer information. Is referred over the update timing of the image on the blinking side specific number of times. As described above, the pointer information is updated every time the blinking side specific number of times of image update timing elapses, whereby the first blinking image G25 displayed so as to overlap the leading end portion of the band image G24 from the front side. Blinking display is performed at the blinking period Te1.

  On the other hand, when the display control of the blinking image G25 is performed so that the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 becomes the second blinking cycle Te2, the blinking side predetermined number of times (for example, one time) which is smaller than the blinking side specific number of times. The same use target image data 143 and 144 corresponding to one piece of pointer information is referred to throughout the image update timing. Then, the pointer information is updated to the next order pointer information at the next image update timing with respect to the blinking side predetermined number of image update timings, and the same use target image data 143 and 144 corresponding to the pointer information is updated. Is referred to over the image update timing a predetermined number of times on the blinking side. In this manner, the pointer information is updated every time the blinking side predetermined number of times of image update elapses, whereby the second blinking image G25 displayed so as to overlap the leading end portion of the band image G24 from the front side. A blinking display is performed at the blinking period Te2.

  The manner in which the effective period display effect is executed using both the band display table 145 and the blinking display table 146 will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 47 (a1) and 47 (a2) show the movement speed of the tip portion in the band image G24, and FIGS. 47 (b1) and 47 (b2) show the blinking period of the blinking image G25.

  First, a case where the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 is changed under the condition where the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is constant will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 (a1) and 47 (b1).

  When the effective period display effect is started, the movement display of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is started as shown in FIG. 47 (a1) at the timing of t11, and blinking as shown in FIG. 47 (b1). The blinking display of the image G25 is started. In this case, the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is the first speed, and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is the first blinking cycle Te1. Then, from the timing t11 to the timing t15, the movement display of the band image G24 at the first speed and the blinking display of the blinking image G25 at the first blinking period Te1 are performed.

  After that, at the timing of t15, the number of occurrences of the image update timing required until the pointer information is updated in the band display table 145 is changed to a predetermined number of times on the band side that is less than the specific number of times on the band side. Thus, as shown in FIG. 47 (a1), the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 is changed to the second speed that is faster than the first speed. On the other hand, the number of occurrences of the image update timing required until the pointer information is updated in the blinking display table 146 is maintained at the blinking side specific number so far, as shown in FIG. 47 (b1). The blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is maintained at the first blinking cycle Te1.

  Next, a case where the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is changed under a situation where the moving speed of the tip portion in the band image G24 is constant will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 (a2) and 47 (b2).

  By starting the effective period display effect, at the timing t21, the movement display of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is started as shown in FIG. 47 (a2), and blinking as shown in FIG. 47 (b2). The blinking display of the image G25 is started. In this case, the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is the first speed, and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is the first blinking cycle Te1. Then, from the timing t21 to the timing t25, the movement display of the band image G24 at the first speed and the blinking display of the blinking image G25 at the first blinking period Te1 are performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing t25, the number of occurrences of the image update timing required until the pointer information is updated in the blinking display table 146 is changed to the blinking side predetermined number that is smaller than the blinking side specific number. Thus, as shown in FIG. 47 (b2), the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is changed to the second blinking cycle Te2 shorter than the first blinking cycle Te1. On the other hand, the number of occurrences of the image update timing required until the pointer information is updated in the band display table 145 is maintained at the band-side specific number so far, as shown in FIG. 47 (a2). In addition, the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 is maintained at the first speed.

  As described above, the band display table 145 is provided as data for display control of the display content of the band image G24, and the blinking display table 146 is provided as data for display control of the display content of the flashing image G25. By being provided, it becomes possible to change the other without changing one of the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25. Thereby, it is possible to independently change the moving speed of the belt image G24 and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25, and it is possible to suitably realize diversification of display modes of the effective period display effects. .

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, the display contents of the band image G24 and the blinking image G25 are associated with the expectation that the operation-related special effect is executed when the effect operation device 48 is operated in the effective period. It has been. Specifically, when the moving speed of the leading end portion of the belt image G24 is maintained at the first speed until the end and the flashing cycle of the flashing image G25 is maintained at the first flashing cycle Te1 until the end, the first display content, When the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is changed to the second speed in the middle and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is maintained at the first blinking cycle Te1 until the end, the second display content and the band image G24 When the moving speed of the tip portion is maintained at the first speed until the end and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is changed to the second blinking cycle Te2 in the middle, the third display content is set. The third display content is set to be higher than the first display content, and the third display content is set to be higher than the second display content. As a result, by confirming the display contents of the band image G24 and the blinking image G25, it is possible to grasp the degree of expectation that the operation-related special effect will be executed when the effect operation device 48 is operated. Thus, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the effective period display effect.

  In addition, when the operation operation special device 48 is operated when the production operation device 48 is operated, the operation special operation effect is not executed when the production operation device 48 is operated. The probability of occurrence of the operation-specific special effect is set so that the degree of expectation that is a jackpot result is higher in the corresponding game times. In this case, as described above, the display contents of the band image G24 and the blinking image G25 are associated with the expected degree of execution of the operation-related special effect, so the display contents of the band image G24 and the blinking image G25 are also associated with the expectation degree of the jackpot result. Will be. From this point as well, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the effective period display effect.

  It should be noted that when the production operation device 48 is operated during the effective period, one of a plurality of types of operation-related productions including the first operation-related production and the second operation-related production may be executed. The display contents of the band image G24 and the blinking image G25 may be associated with the expected degree of execution of a predetermined operation-related effect.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the effective period display effect will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for displaying an effective period, which is executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation process for displaying the effective period is executed in the effect calculation process in step S704 in the task process (FIG. 19) in a situation where the effective period display effect is to be executed.

  If it is the start timing of the effective period display effect (step S1601: YES), the band display table 145 and the blinking display table 146 are read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 (step S1602). As the moving speed setting process for the band image G24, the update period of the pointer information in the band display table 145 is set to the update period corresponding to the first speed (step S1603), and the flashing period of the flashing image G25 is set. As a process, the update period of the pointer information in the blinking display table 146 is set to an update period corresponding to the first blinking period Te1 (step S1604).

  After that, among the lighting image data 143 and the lighting image data 144, the image data to be used that is set in correspondence with the first pointer information in the blinking display table 146 is displayed as the blinking image G25 this time. While grasping as image data (step S1613), the frame display image data 141 and the band display image data 142 are grasped as image data to be used this time (step S1614). Thereafter, the size information set in correspondence with the first pointer information in the band display table 145 is grasped as size information to be applied to the band display image data 142 (step S1615), and the band display table 145 is displayed. The tip position information set in correspondence with the first pointer information in FIG. 6 is grasped as position information for drawing the image data to be used this time among the lighting image data 143 and the extinguishing image data 144 (step S1616). Further, parameter information other than these is grasped (step S1617).

  When the calculation process for the effective period display is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605) includes the lighting image data 143 and the extinguishing image data 144. Among them, the image data to be used, which is set in correspondence with the first pointer information in the blinking display table 146, the frame display image data 141 and the band display image data 142 are set as drawing targets. Further, the parameter information grasped in steps S1615 to S1617 is set in the drawing list.

  If it is not the start timing of the effective period display effect (step S1601: NO), it is determined whether it is the update timing of the pointer information on the band image G24 side (step S1605). When the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is set to the first speed, the number of occurrences of the image update timing since the pointer information in the band display table 145 was updated last time is the band side specific number of times. If it is determined that it is the update timing of the pointer information on the band image G24 side and the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 is set to the second speed, the pointer information in the band display table 145 is updated last time. When the number of occurrences of the image update timing from is the predetermined number of times on the band side, it is determined that it is the update timing of the pointer information on the band image G24 side. When it is time to update the pointer information on the band image G24 side (step S1605: YES), the pointer information is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be referred to in the band display table 145 is incremented by 1 (step S1606). ).

  If it is not the start timing of the effective period display effect (step S1601: NO), it is determined whether it is the update timing of the pointer information on the blinking image G25 side (step S1607). When the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is set to the first blinking cycle Te1, when the number of occurrences of the image update timing after the previous update of the pointer information in the blinking display table 146 is the blinking side specific number When it is determined that it is the update timing of the pointer information on the flashing image G25 side and the flashing cycle of the flashing image G25 is set to the second flashing cycle Te2, the pointer information in the flashing display table 146 has been updated since the previous update. When the number of occurrences of the image update timing is the predetermined number of times on the blinking side, it is determined that it is the update timing of the pointer information on the blinking image G25 side. When it is time to update the pointer information on the blinking image G25 side (step S1607: YES), the pointer information is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be referred to in the blinking display table 146 is incremented by 1 (step S1608). ).

  When it is not the start timing of the effective period display effect (step S1601: NO), it is determined whether it is the timing to change the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 (step S1609). Whether or not the moving speed is changed and when changing the moving speed, the change timing is determined at the start of the current effective period display effect, and whether or not the display CPU 72 is the timing determined at the start. Determine. In addition, as a method for specifying the change timing, the number of occurrences of the image update timing that is the change timing at the start of the current effective period display effect is determined, and the number of occurrences of the determined image update timing is determined. In such a case, it can be considered that the change timing is specified. If it is time to change the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 (step S1609: YES), the update speed of the pointer information in the band display table 145 is set to the second speed as the moving speed setting process of the band image G24. The corresponding update cycle is set (step S1610).

  If it is not the start timing of the effective period display effect (step S1601: NO), it is determined whether or not it is the timing to change the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 (step S1611). Whether or not the blinking period is changed and when the blinking period is changed, the change timing is determined at the start of the current effective period display effect, and whether or not the display CPU 72 is determined at the start. Determine. In addition, as a method for specifying the change timing, the number of occurrences of the image update timing that is the change timing at the start of the current effective period display effect is determined, and the number of occurrences of the determined image update timing is determined. In such a case, it can be considered that the change timing is specified. When it is time to change the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 (step S1611: YES), as the blinking cycle setting processing of the blinking image G25, the pointer information update cycle in the blinking display table 146 corresponds to the second blinking cycle Te2. The update cycle to be set is set (step S1612).

  Thereafter, among the lighting image data 143 and the lighting image data 144, the image data to be used which is set in correspondence with the pointer information of the current reference object in the blinking display table 146 is displayed as the blinking image G25 this time. This is grasped as image data to be used (step S1613). In this case, if the process of step S1608 is not executed in the current processing time, the image data corresponding to the pointer information that is the reference target in the previous processing time is grasped, and the processing of step S1608 is performed in the current processing time. When the process is being executed, the image data corresponding to the pointer information that is newly updated this time and becomes the reference target is grasped. Also, the frame display image data 141 and the band display image data 142 are grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S1614).

  Thereafter, the size information set in the band display table 145 corresponding to the current pointer information to be referred to is grasped as the size information to be applied to the band display image data 142 (step S1615), and the band display is performed. The tip position information set in correspondence with the pointer information of the current reference object in the table 145 is used as position information for drawing the image data that is the current use of the lighting image data 143 and the light-off image data 144. To grasp. In this case, if the processing of step S1606 is not executed in the current processing time, the size information and the tip position information corresponding to the pointer information that is the reference target in the previous processing time are grasped, and the current processing time. In step S1606, the size information and the tip position information corresponding to the pointer information that is newly updated this time and is the reference target are grasped. Further, parameter information other than these is grasped (step S1617).

  When the calculation process for the effective period display is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605) includes the lighting image data 143 and the extinguishing image data 144. Among them, the image data to be used, which is set in correspondence with the pointer information of the current reference object in the blinking display table 146, the frame display image data 141, and the band display image data 142 are set as drawing objects. . Further, the parameter information grasped in steps S1615 to S1617 is set in the drawing list.

  As described above, the band display table 145 is provided as data for display control of the display content of the band image G24, and the flashing display table 146 is provided as data for display control of the display content of the flashing image G25. By doing so, it becomes possible to change one of the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 without changing one. Thereby, it is possible to independently change the moving speed of the belt image G24 and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25, and it is possible to suitably realize diversification of display modes of the effective period display effects. .

  In particular, when changing the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24, only the pointer information update period in the band display table 145 is changed. A table 145 is used. Similarly, in order to change the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25, only the pointer information update cycle in the blinking display table 146 is changed. Therefore, the same blinking display table 146 is stored in any blinking cycle. used. For example, in the configuration in which the data for display control of the display content of the band image G24 and the data for display control of the display content of the blinking image G25 are set together in one table, the tip portion of the band image G24 is displayed. If one of the moving speed and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is changed without affecting the other, a corresponding table needs to be prepared separately, and the table is a combination of the moving speed and the blinking cycle. It is necessary for the number of types. Then, the storage capacity of the memory module 74 necessary for storing the table in advance increases. On the other hand, the same band display table 145 is used at any moving speed, and the same blinking display table 146 is used at any blinking period. It is possible to realize diversification of the display mode of the effective period display effect while suppressing the increase in the storage capacity of 74.

  In the band display table 145, tip position information corresponding to position information for setting image data to be used among the lighting image data 143 and the extinguishing image data 144 is set. Thereby, the information for disposing the blinking image G25 at the position of the front end portion of the band image G24 is set in association with the information that determines the display mode of the band image G24. Therefore, in the configuration in which the band display table 145 and the blinking display table 146 are individually provided, it is possible to simplify the processing configuration for adjusting the relative positions of the band image G24 and the blinking image G25. .

<Another form of effective period display effect>
The pointer information of the blinking display table 146 is only “0” and “1”, and one of these “0” and “1” corresponds to the lighting image data 143, and the other is the light-off image data. It is good also as a structure corresponding to 144. In this case, the blinking period of the blinking image G25 is set to one of the first blinking period Te1 and the second blinking period Te2 by adjusting the update period of the pointer information between “0” and “1”. It becomes possible. According to this configuration, the data amount of the blinking display table 146 can be further reduced.

  When the moving speed of the leading end portion of the band image G24 is the first speed, 1 is added to the pointer information to be referred to in the band display table 145 every time the image is updated, and the leading end portion of the band image G24 When the moving speed is the second speed, two or more values may be added to the pointer information to be referred to in the band display table 145 at each update timing of the image. In other words, the value added to the reference target pointer information in the band display table 145 may differ between the first speed and the second speed at each update timing of the image. Even in this configuration, it is possible to change the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 between the first speed and the second speed while using the same band display table 145.

  When the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is the first blinking cycle Te1, 1 is added to the pointer information to be referred to in the blinking display table 146 at every update timing of the image, and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is In the case of the second blinking cycle Te2, two or more values may be added to the pointer information to be referred to in the blinking display table 146 at every update timing of the image. That is, the value added to the pointer information to be referred to in the blinking display table 146 may differ between the first blinking period Te1 and the second blinking period Te2 at each update timing of the image. Even with this configuration, it is possible to change the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 between the first blinking cycle Te1 and the second blinking cycle Te2 while using the same blinking display table 146.

  The image data for displaying the blinking image G25 is not limited to two types, and may be three or more types, and the blinking cycle of the blinking image G25 is not limited to two types and may be three or more types. There may be. Further, the moving speed of the tip portion of the band image G24 is not limited to two types, and may be three or more types.

  Instead of using the blinking display table 146 to determine the type of image data used to display the blinking image G25, the blinking image G25 is displayed without using a table by processing on the program. The type of image data used for the determination may be determined.

  In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the size of the band image G24 changes with time, at least one of the shape and color of the band image G24 may change with time. In addition to or instead of the configuration in which the type of image data for displaying the blinking image G25 changes with the passage of time, at least one of the size, shape, and color of the blinking image G25 with the passage of time. The configuration may vary.

<Configuration for performing number display effects>
Next, a configuration for performing a number display effect will be described.

  FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the number display effect. The number display effect is an effect of displaying, on the symbol display device 41, the number of game balls acquired by the player from the start of the opening / closing execution mode in the opening / closing execution mode of the high-frequency winning mode (hereinafter referred to as the acquired number). . The number acquired is the number of differences between the total number of game balls paid out to the player from the start of the opening / closing execution mode and the total number of game balls launched into the game area PA from the start of the opening / closing execution mode. That's it. In addition, the display of the acquired number by the number display effect is started when the opening period is started in the opening / closing execution mode, and when the game ball is paid out to the player in the opening / closing execution mode, and when the game ball is fired When is performed, the display content is changed accordingly. 49 in detail, in the situation where the display effect for the opening / closing execution mode is being executed on the symbol display device 41, the number display image G31 is displayed on the edge side of the symbol display device 41. By confirming the number display image G31, the player can grasp the number of game balls acquired in the opening / closing execution mode.

  FIG. 50 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration for performing a number display effect.

  Winning detection sensors 151 to 154, a launch ball detection sensor 155, and a return ball detection sensor 156 are electrically connected to the MPU 52 of the main controller 50. The winning detection sensors 151 to 154 are sensors for detecting the occurrence of winning as a trigger for paying out the game ball. The winning winning sensors 31, the special prize winning device 32, the first operating port 33, and the second operating port 34 are provided. A plurality of types are provided in a one-to-one correspondence. The MPU 52 of the main controller 50 receives detection signals from each of a plurality of types of winning detection sensors 151-154. Then, when the MPU 52 receives a signal corresponding to the occurrence of a game ball having entered the corresponding ball entry unit from any of the winning detection sensors 151 to 154, the number of game balls corresponding to the win is determined. A prize ball command for instructing the payout is transmitted to the payout control device 55.

  The payout control device 55 includes a payout control board 158 on which an MPU 159a is mounted. The MPU 159a includes a ROM 159b that stores various control programs executed by the MPU 159a and fixed value data, and a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 159b is executed. A RAM 159c, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like are incorporated. A payout device 56 is electrically connected to the MPU 159a of the payout control device 55. When the MPU 159a receives a prize ball command from the main control device 50, the MPU 159a is driven to a payout motor 56a provided in the payout device 56. The payout of the game ball is started by starting the output of the signal. Then, when the MPU 159a receives a game ball payout number measured based on the detection result of the payout detection sensor 56b provided in the payout device 56, the number corresponds to the number information set in the prize ball command. Then, the output of the drive signal to the payout motor 56a is stopped to stop the payout of the game ball. In addition, the MPU 159a of the payout control device 55 detects that one game ball has been paid out to the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 every time one game ball is detected by the payout detection sensor 56b. Send.

  The launch ball detection sensor 155 is provided in the game ball launching mechanism 161 for launching a game ball toward the game area PA when the launch operation device 28 is operated. FIG. 51 is an enlarged front view of the inner frame 13 showing the lower area of the inner frame 13. The game ball launching mechanism 161 is provided below the game board 24 on the front surface of the inner frame 13. The game ball launching mechanism 161 is a firing rail 162 that extends toward the guide rail formed on the game board 24, and an electric actuator that launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 46a onto the launch rail 162 toward the guide rail. A solenoid 163 and a holding member 164 for holding one game ball B1 supplied on the firing rail 162 at a position where the solenoid 163 can be launched are provided. When the firing operation device 28 is operated, a drive signal is supplied to the solenoid 163 every time a predetermined firing cycle (for example, 60 msec) is reached, and a game ball is launched by the solenoid 163.

  In the game ball launching mechanism 161, the launch ball detection sensor 155 is provided so as to detect a game ball passing through the position of the most downstream part of the launch rail 162. In other words, the launch ball detection sensor 155 is provided so as to detect a game ball launched from the most downstream portion of the launch rail 162 toward the guide rail, and the game ball detected by the launch ball detection sensor 155 is the launch rail. 162 does not flow backwards.

  The shot ball detection sensor 155 is an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and outputs a HI level signal as a shot ball detection signal when the game ball B1 exists in the detection range. In a situation where B1 does not exist in the detection range, a LOW level signal is output as a firing ball non-detection signal. Therefore, it is possible to specify the number of game balls that have been launched toward the guide rail through the position of the most downstream portion of the launch rail 162 by the launch ball detection sensor 155. The relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed. Further, the launch ball detection sensor 155 is not limited to an optical sensor, and may be a sensor of another detection method.

  The return ball detection sensor 156 is provided in the return ball collection unit 165 that collects a game ball that has been launched from the most downstream portion of the launch rail 162 toward the guide rail but has flowed back through the guide rail without reaching the game area PA. It has been. The return ball collecting portion 165 is formed in a region generated by separating the guide rail and the firing rail 162 in the lateral direction on the front surface of the inner frame 13 and exists between both rails. The return ball collection unit 165 is formed as a space having a predetermined depth, and is formed by opening the space upward. The return ball collection unit 165 communicates with the lower plate 47a, and the game balls B1 collected by the return ball collection unit 165 are discharged to the lower plate 47a by their own weight.

  In the return ball collection unit 165, the return ball detection sensor 156 is provided so as to detect a game ball passing through the position of the most downstream part of the return ball collection unit 165. That is, the return ball detection sensor 156 is provided so as to detect a game ball flowing down from the most downstream portion of the return ball collection unit 165 toward the lower plate 47a.

  The return ball detection sensor 156 includes an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and outputs a HI level signal as a return ball detection signal when the game ball is in the detection range. In a situation that does not exist in the detection range, a LOW level signal is output as a return sphere non-detection signal. Therefore, the number of game balls collected by the return ball collection unit 165 can be specified by the return ball detection sensor 156. The relationship between HI and LOW may be reversed. The return ball detection sensor 156 is not limited to an optical sensor, and may be a sensor of another detection method.

  Returning to the description with reference to FIG. 50, the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 receives the payout completion signal reception result from the MPU 159a of the payout control device 55, the reception result of the shot ball detection signal from the shot ball detection sensor 155, and the return ball A command corresponding to each reception result of the return ball detection signal from the detection sensor 156 is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 62. In detail about these commands, the MPU 52 of the main controller 50 measures the number of times of receiving the payout completion signal, and when the payout completion signal is received 10 times, payout of 10 game balls is completed. Is sent to the MPU 62 on the light side. In addition, if the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 does not receive the next payout completion signal even after a reception waiting period (for example, 2 sec) has elapsed since receiving the payout completion signal last time, the MPU 52 transmits a prize ball completion command last time. Then, even if the number of times of receiving the payout completion signal has not reached 10, the prize ball completion command is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 62. In this prize ball completion command, information indicating the number of payout completion signals received since the previous prize ball completion command was transmitted is set. In addition, when the MPU 52 of the main controller 50 receives a shot ball detection signal from the shot ball detection sensor 155, the MPU 52 transmits a shot execution command indicating that one game ball has been shot to the sound light side MPU 62. When a return ball detection signal is received from the return ball detection sensor 156, a return ball generation command indicating that one return ball has been generated is transmitted to the sound light side MPU 62.

  When the sound light side MPU 62 is in the opening / closing execution mode, the received light ball completion command, the firing execution command, and the return ball generation command are received from the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 so that the number of acquired balls can be displayed. Perform measurement processing. Then, a measurement command corresponding to the result of the measurement process is transmitted to the display CPU 72 of the display control device 70 when the measurement command transmission timing comes. The display CPU 72 displays the number display image G31 on the symbol display device 41 in a state in which the content of the received measurement command is reflected.

  Hereinafter, processing contents executed by the sound light side MPU 62 and the display CPU 72 in order to perform the number display effect will be described. First, processing contents executed by the sound light side MPU 62 will be described.

  FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the counting process executed by the sound light side MPU 62. The counting process is executed in the table setting process in step S301 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

  When the winning ball completion command is received in the opening / closing execution mode (steps S1701 and S1702: YES), the winning ball completion command received this time is set in the measurement counter 166 provided in the sound side RAM 64. A value corresponding to the number of completed game balls to be paid out is added (step S1703). The measurement counter 166 is a counter that is used to measure the number of acquisitions that occur from the transmission timing of one measurement command to the transmission timing of the next measurement command in the open / close execution mode. For example, when a prize ball completion command indicating that the payout of 10 game balls has been completed is received, a value of “10” is added to the measurement counter 166, and the payout of 3 game balls has been completed. Is received, a value of “3” is added to the counter 166 for measurement.

  When the launch execution command is received in the opening / closing execution mode (step S1701 and step S1704: YES), “1” is subtracted from the measurement counter 166 (step S1705). The measurement counter 166 is configured to be able to measure both a positive value and a negative value. For example, when the value of the measurement counter 166 is “5”, a measurement is performed when a launch execution command is received. The value of the counter for counter 166 is “4”, and when the firing execution command is received when the value of the counter for measurement 166 is “0”, the value of the counter for measurement 166 is “−1”. If the return ball generation command is received in the open / close execution mode (steps S1701 and S1706: YES), “1” is added to the value of the measurement counter 166 (step S1707).

  FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing measurement command output setting processing executed by the sound-side MPU 62. The counting process is executed in the command selection process in step S302 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

  In the measurement command output setting process, it is first determined whether or not it is the measurement command output timing (step S1801). The output timing of the measurement command is generated when the command output cycle elapses in the state of the opening / closing execution mode. The command output cycle is set as a cycle longer than the update cycle of the number display image G31. More specifically, the command output cycle is longer than a cycle obtained by doubling the update cycle of the number display image G31. It is set as a cycle shorter than the tripled cycle. The update cycle of the number display image G31 is set as a cycle longer than 20 msec, which is the update cycle of an image for one frame, and is set to 300 msec, for example. However, the update timing of the number display image G31 generated when the update cycle of the number display image G31 passes corresponds to the update timing of the image for one frame.

  When it is the output timing of the measurement command (step S1801: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the measurement counter 166 is greater than or equal to “0”, so that the value of the measurement counter 166 corresponds to the increase in the number of acquisitions. It is determined whether or not (step S1802). When the value of the measurement counter 166 corresponds to the increase in the number of acquisitions (step S1802: YES), the measurement command for increase is read from the sound side ROM 63, and the measurement counter for the read increase measurement command is read. Information corresponding to the current value of 166 is set (step S1803). Then, the measurement command for increase after setting the information is transmitted to the display CPU 72 (step S1804). Thereby, it is specified that the acquired number has increased in the display CPU 72, and the number of the increase is specified.

  When the measurement command output timing is reached and the value of the measurement counter 166 is less than “0” (step S1801: YES, step S1802: NO), the value of the measurement counter 166 corresponds to a decrease in the number of acquisitions. Means that In this case, a reduction measurement command is read from the sound-side ROM 63, and information corresponding to the current value of the measurement counter 166 is set for the read reduction measurement command (step S1805). Then, the measurement command for reduction after the information setting is transmitted to the display CPU 72 (step S1806). As a result, the display CPU 72 specifies that the acquired number has decreased, and specifies the number of the decrease.

  When the process of step S1804 or step S1806 is executed, the value of the measurement counter 166 is cleared to “0” (step S1807). As a result, the information on the acquired number that has been set for the measurement command is deleted from the measurement counter 166.

  Next, processing contents executed by the display CPU 72 will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing measurement command handling processing executed by the display CPU 72. The measurement command handling process is executed in the command handling process in step S603 in the V interrupt process (FIG. 18).

  When the increase measurement command is received from the sound light side MPU 62 (step S1901: YES), the reflection counter 167 provided in the work RAM 73 is added to the increase in the acquired number set in the increase measurement command received this time. A value corresponding to the number is added (step S1902). The reflection counter 167 is a counter for the display CPU 72 to specify the increase / decrease number to be reflected in the future with respect to the display of the acquired number currently displayed as the number display image G31. When the decrease measurement command is received from the sound light side MPU 62 (step S1903: YES), the value of the reflection counter 167 corresponds to the decrease in the acquired number set in the decrease measurement command received this time. The value is subtracted (step S1904).

  FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for measurement display executed by the display CPU 72. Note that the measurement display calculation process is executed in the effect calculation process in step S704 in the task process (FIG. 19).

  When it is the update timing of the number display image G31 (step S2001: YES), if the value of the reflection counter 167 is less than 0 (step S2002: YES), the subtraction processing of the total counter 168 provided in the work RAM 73 is performed. Execute (Step S2003). The total counter 168 is a counter that determines the value of the acquired number to be displayed as the number display image G31, and the value stored in the total counter 168 is displayed as the number display image G31. Therefore, as the value of the total counter 168 varies, the content of the number display image G31 varies accordingly. In the subtraction processing of the total counter 168, a value corresponding to the decrease in the acquired number set in the current reflection counter 167 is subtracted from the value of the current total counter 168. In other words, when the value of the reflection counter 167 is a value corresponding to the decrease in the number of acquisitions, regardless of the value, all the values of the decrease in the acquisition number set in the reflection counter 167 are for summation. The value of the counter 168 is reflected. As a result, when the decrease in the number of acquisitions occurs, all the decrease is collectively reflected in the display of the acquisition number in the number display image G31. Thereafter, the value of the reflection counter 167 is cleared to “0” (step S2004).

  When it is the update timing of the number display image G31 and the value of the reflection counter 167 is “0” or more (step S2001: YES, step S2002: NO), whether the value of the reflection counter 167 is 1 or more. Is determined (step S2005). When the value of the reflection counter 167 is not 1 or more (step S2005: NO), it means that the value of the reflection counter 167 is “0”. In this case, the total counter 168 does not increase or decrease at the current update timing of the number display image G31. Therefore, the display content of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is maintained as it is.

  When the value of the reflection counter 167 is 1 or more (step S2005: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the reflection counter 167 is greater than or equal to the first reference value (step S2006). Here, when the acquired number displayed in the number display image G31 is increased, the value to which the acquired number is added at one update timing of the number display image G31 is limited to a predetermined limit value. As a result, when the number of acquired items increases, it is possible to make the update period longer so that the display of the acquired number increases in the number display image G31, and the acquired number increases in the open / close execution mode. This makes it easier to give the player an impression.

  A plurality of types of values to be added to the acquired number are set at one update timing of the number display image G31. Specifically, the value to be added is “5” as the first addition target value. “3”, which is a second addition target value smaller than the first addition target value, and “1”, which is a third addition target value smaller than the second addition target value, are set. If the value of the reflection counter 167 is larger than the value “12” preset as the first reference value, “5” is selected as the value to be added, and the value of the reflection counter 167 is When the value is larger than the value “5” preset as the second reference value, which is a value smaller than the first reference value, “3” is selected as the value to be added, and the value of the reflection counter 167 Is equal to or less than the value “5”, “1” is selected as the value to be added. As a result, it is possible to suppress the increase in the acquired number waiting in the reflection counter 167 from being extremely large without being reflected in the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31. At the same time, it is possible to diversify the increase in the number of acquired numbers in the number display image G31.

  Incidentally, when the payout motor 56a is operating at a normal speed, the payout device 56 pays out game balls at a rate of one per 24 msec. In addition, the launch period of the game ball is 60 msec. On the other hand, the output period of the measurement command by the sound light side MPU 62 is about 720 msec. Then, since the maximum value of “18” is set as the value of the increase in the number of acquisitions included in the increase measurement command, the situation where the value of the reflection counter 167 is larger than the first reference value is Can occur.

  Specifically, when the value of the reflection counter 167 is larger than the first reference value (step S2006: YES), the first addition target value is added to the total counter 168 (step S2007). ), The first addition target value is subtracted from the reflection counter 167 (step S2008). As a result, the value of the acquired number displayed as the number display image G31 is increased by the first addition target value, and the increase value of the acquired number that is waiting in the reflection counter 167 is increased by the first addition target value. Decrease.

  When the value of the reflection counter 167 is equal to or smaller than the first reference value and larger than the second reference value (step S2006: NO, step S2009: YES), the second addition target value is added to the total counter 168 ( In step S2010, the second addition target value is subtracted from the reflection counter 167 (step S2011). As a result, the value of the acquired number displayed as the number display image G31 is increased by the second addition target value, and the increase of the acquired number that is waiting in the reflection counter 167 is increased by the second addition target value. Decrease.

  When the value of the reflection counter 167 is equal to or smaller than the second reference value (step S2009: NO), the third addition target value is added to the total counter 168 (step S2012), and the third addition target is added from the reflection counter 167. The value is subtracted (step S2013). As a result, the value of the acquired number displayed as the number display image G31 is increased by the third addition target value, and the increase value of the acquired number waiting in the reflection counter 167 is increased by the third addition target value. Decrease.

  When the process of step S2004 is executed, when a negative determination is made at step S2005, when the process of step S2008 is executed, when the process of step S2011 is executed, or when the process of step S2013 is executed, the total counter The image data corresponding to the value of 168 is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S2014). Then, parameter information to be applied to the image data is grasped (step S2015). Thereby, image data for displaying an image corresponding to the current value of the total counter 168 as the number display image G31 is drawn in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605). Set as a target. In addition, parameter information to be applied to the image data is set in the drawing list.

  Next, how the number display effect is executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. 56A shows the transmission timing of the measurement command from the sound light side MPU 62, FIG. 56B shows how the value of the reflection counter 167 fluctuates, and FIG. 56C shows the number display image G31. Indicates the update timing.

  At the timing of t1, a measurement command is transmitted from the sound light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 as shown in FIG. In this case, the measurement command is an increase measurement command in which “17” is set as the increase in the acquired number. Therefore, at the timing t1, the value of the reflection counter 167 is set to “17” as shown in FIG. However, since the timing t1 is not the update timing of the number display image G31, the value set in the reflection counter 167 is not reflected in the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31.

  Thereafter, at the timing t2, the update timing of the number display image G31 is reached as shown in FIG. 56 (c). In this case, since the value of the reflection counter 167 is “17” which is larger than the first reference value, the first addition target value is calculated from the value of the reflection counter 167 as shown in FIG. “5” is subtracted. Then, the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to a value obtained by adding the first addition target value to the previous value.

  Thereafter, at the timings t3 and t4, the update timing of the number display image G31 is reached as shown in FIG. 56C. In these cases, the value of the reflection counter 167 is equal to or less than the first reference value and larger than the second reference value, and therefore, as shown in FIG. 2. “3” which is a value to be added is subtracted. Then, the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to a value obtained by adding the second addition target value to the previous value.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t5, a measurement command is transmitted from the sound light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 as shown in FIG. 56 (a). In this case, the measurement command is a decrease measurement command in which “3” is set as the decrease in the acquired number. Therefore, at the timing t5, as shown in FIG. 56B, the value of the reflection counter 167 is updated to “3” by subtracting “3” from “6”.

  Thereafter, at the timings t6 and t7, the update timing of the number display image G31 is reached as shown in FIG. 56C. In these cases, since the value of the reflection counter 167 is equal to or smaller than the second reference value, “1” that is the third addition target value is subtracted from the value of the reflection counter 167 as shown in FIG. Then, the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to a value obtained by adding the third addition target value to the previous value.

  Thereafter, at time t8, a measurement command is transmitted from the sound light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 as shown in FIG. 56 (a). In this case, the measurement command is an increase measurement command in which “5” is set as an increase in the acquired number. Therefore, at the timing t8, as shown in FIG. 56B, the value of the reflection counter 167 is incremented by 5 from “1” and updated to “6”.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 56C, the update display timing of the number display image G31 is obtained. In this case, since the value of the reflection counter 167 is again larger than the second reference value, the value “3” that is the second addition target value is calculated from the value of the reflection counter 167 as shown in FIG. "Is subtracted. Then, the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to a value obtained by adding the second addition target value to the previous value.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t10, the timing of t12, and the timing of t13, the update timing of the number display image G31 is obtained as shown in FIG. 56 (c). In these cases, since the value of the reflection counter 167 is equal to or smaller than the second reference value, “1” that is the third addition target value is subtracted from the value of the reflection counter 167 as shown in FIG. Then, the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is updated to a value obtained by adding the third addition target value to the previous value. Note that the measurement command is transmitted at the timing of t11 as shown in FIG. 56 (a), but “0” is set as information on the increase / decrease in the number of acquisitions in the measurement command. The value of 167 is not changed.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t14, the update timing of the number display image G31 is reached as shown in FIG. 56 (c), but the value of the reflection counter 167 is “0” as shown in FIG. 56 (b). The value of the reflection counter 167 is maintained as it is, and the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31 is also maintained as it is.

  Thereafter, at time t15, a measurement command is transmitted from the sound light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 72 as shown in FIG. In this case, the measurement command is a decrease measurement command in which “5” is set as the decrease in the acquired number. Therefore, at the timing t15, as shown in FIG. 56B, the value of the reflection counter 167 is subtracted by 5 from “0” and updated to “−5”.

  Thereafter, at the timing t16, the update timing of the number display image G31 is reached as shown in FIG. 56 (c). In this case, the value of the reflection counter 167 is a negative value corresponding to a decrease in the number of acquisitions. If the value of the reflection counter 167 is a negative value corresponding to a decrease in the number of acquisitions, the acquisition number is reflected at once regardless of the value. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 56B, the value of the reflection counter 167 is cleared to “0”.

  As described above, the number of game balls acquired since the opening / closing execution mode is started as a number display effect is displayed while changing according to the increase / decrease of the actual acquisition number. However, it becomes possible for the player to grasp the number of game balls acquired up to that point. In this case, when the acquired number displayed in the number display image G31 is increased, the value to which the acquired number is added at one update timing of the number display image G31 is limited to a predetermined limit value. As a result, when the number of acquired items increases, it is possible to make the update period longer so that the display of the acquired number increases in the number display image G31, and the acquired number increases in the open / close execution mode. This makes it easier to give the player an impression.

  A plurality of types of values to which the acquired number is added at one update timing of the number display image G31 are set. The larger the value of the reflection counter 167, the larger the value to be added to the acquired number at one update timing of the number display image G31. The smaller the value of the reflection counter 167, the smaller the value of the number display image G31. The value to be added to the acquired number at each update timing is a small value. As a result, it is possible to suppress the increase in the acquired number waiting in the reflection counter 167 from being extremely large without being reflected in the display of the acquired number in the number display image G31. At the same time, it is possible to diversify the increase in the number of acquired numbers in the number display image G31.

  Even if the value of the reflection counter 167 becomes equal to or smaller than the first reference value and the second addition target value is added to the display of the acquired number of the number display image G31, the value of the reflection counter 167 is subsequently changed. When the value is larger than the first reference value, the state returns to the state in which the first addition target value is added to the display of the acquired number of the number display image G31. Thereby, it becomes possible to update the display of the acquired number in a manner appropriate to the situation at each update timing of the number display image G31.

  When the value of the reflection counter 167 is a negative value corresponding to the decrease in the number of acquisitions, regardless of the value of the reflection counter 167, the values of the decrease are collectively acquired in the number display image G31. This is reflected in the number display. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the update period from being continued for a long time so that the display of the acquired number is reduced. If the value of the reflection counter 167 becomes a negative value, the value of the reflection counter 167 can be cleared to “0” at one update timing of the number display image G31, and then reflected. The value of the counter 167 can be easily set to a positive value. Therefore, it is possible to generate many opportunities to be updated so that the display of the acquired number is increased.

<Further another form regarding the number display effect>
In place of the configuration in which a prize ball completion command is transmitted from the MPU 52 of the main control device 50 to the sound light side MPU 62, when a prize ball command is transmitted to the MPU 159a of the payout control device 55, the same prize ball command is transmitted as a sound signal. It is good also as a structure which transmits to the side MPU62. In this case, the number of game balls that are not actually paid out but are scheduled to be paid out are added to the display of the acquired number.

  The number of game balls fired detected by the launch ball detection sensor 155 and the number of return balls detected by the return ball detection sensor 156 are reflected in the acquired number display. One or both may not be reflected in the display of the acquired number.

  -The number display effect is configured to start when the opening period is started in the opening / closing execution mode. Instead, it is started when the opening period ends and the first round game round is started. It is good also as a structure.

  The number display effect is configured to end when one opening / closing execution mode ends, but when the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the number display effect is performed in the high frequency support mode. If the opening / closing execution mode occurs multiple times without interposing the low frequency support mode, the number of game balls acquired after the start of the first opening / closing execution mode is displayed continuously. It is good. In addition, when the jackpot generation lottery mode becomes the high probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the number display effect is continued in the high probability mode, and the opening / closing execution mode is generated a plurality of times without interposing the low probability mode. In this case, the number of game balls acquired since the first opening / closing execution mode is started may be continuously displayed.

  It is possible to specify whether or not the shooting operation is being performed on the shooting operation device 28, and the number display image G31 is determined depending on whether or not the shooting operation is being performed on the shooting operation device 28. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the value to be added to the acquired number changes at one update timing. For example, even if the values to be added are the same, the number display image G31 is updated once in the situation where the firing operation is performed than in the situation where the firing operation is not performed. A configuration may be adopted in which the value to be added to the acquired number at the timing becomes a large value or tends to be a large value, or a configuration that tends to be a small value or a small value. In addition, as a configuration that can specify whether or not the shooting operation is being performed on the shooting operation device 28, a touch sensor that detects that the player is touching the shooting operation device 28. When the touch sensor is turned on, it may be configured to specify that the shooting operation is being performed, and in addition to or instead of the configuration, the amount of rotation operation of the shooting operation device 28 A variable resistor is provided for grasping the condition, and the detection result of the variable resistor identifies the situation where the launch operation is performed when the rotation operation amount corresponds to the result of the predetermined amount or more. It is good.

<Further another form regarding the number display effect>
The target to which the number display effect is applied is not limited to the effect for displaying the number of acquired game balls in the opening / closing execution mode, and is arbitrary. For example, in the slot machine, when the number of remaining continuous games advantageous to the player, such as an RT game, AT game, or ART game, can increase in the middle of the advantageous game state, the remaining display as a number display effect It is good also as a structure by which the increase display effect which shows a mode that the number of games increases is performed. The increase display calculation process executed by the display CPU 72 to perform the increase display effect will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  When an opportunity to increase the number of remaining continuous games in the advantageous gaming state occurs, an increase display effect is started. When it is the start timing of the increase display effect (step S2101: YES), a division process of the target increase value is executed (step S2102). In the division process of the target increase value, the target increase value determined as the number of games to be increased to the number of remaining continuous games in the advantageous gaming state is divided by “100” which is a predetermined division value. Multiple types of target increase values are set, and all of these multiple types of target increase values are set so that the quotient value when dividing by the division value is 8 or less, and when dividing by the division value The quotient values are set so as to be different from each other. Specifically, “50”, “100”, and “250” are set as target increase values. When the target increase value is “50”, the result of division by the division value is “0” and the remainder is “50”, and when the target increase value is “100”, the result is division by the division value. As a result, when the quotient is “1” and the remainder is “0” and the target increase value is “250”, the result of division by the division value is “2” and the remainder is “50”.

  When the division process of the target increase value is executed, a value obtained by adding “1” to the quotient value derived by the division process is stored in the work RAM 73 as a unit increase value (step S2103). The unit increase value is a value for increasing the display of the number of remaining continuous games displayed on the symbol display device 41 as an increase display effect at one update timing of the display. As described above, since the quotient of the result of division by the division value differs depending on the type of the target increase value, the unit increase value also differs depending on the type of the target increase value.

  Thereafter, a unit increase counter setting process provided in the work RAM 73 is executed (step S2104). The unit increase counter is a counter for the display CPU 72 to specify the number of times the display by the increase display effect is updated in the current increase display effect. In step S2104, the current target increase value is divided by the unit increase value derived in step S2103. Then, the quotient value calculated by the division is set in the unit increase counter. For example, when the target increase value is “250”, the unit increase value is “3”. When the target increase value is divided by this unit increase value, the quotient is “83” and the remainder is “1”. In this case, “83” is set in the unit increase counter. If the remainder is 1 or more as a result of dividing the target increase value by the unit increase value, the remainder is stored in the work RAM 73 as a remaining value (step S2105).

  When the process of step S2105 is executed or when it is the update timing of the increase display effect (step S2106: YES), it is determined whether or not the value of the unit increase counter of the work RAM 73 is 1 or more (step S2107). When the value of the unit increase counter is 1 or more (step S2107: YES), the unit increase value calculated in step S2103 is added to the current value of the total counter provided in the work RAM 73 (step S2108). ). The total counter is a counter that determines the value when the remaining number of continuing games is displayed as a game number image, and the value stored in the total counter is displayed as a game number image. When the increase display effect is started, the remaining number of continuing games at that time is set in the total counter.

  In step S2108, the unit increment value is added to the current value of the total counter, whereby the value of the game number image increases by the unit increment value from the current value. Thereafter, 1 is subtracted from the value of the unit increase counter (step S2109).

  If the value of the unit increment counter is “0” (step S2107: NO), the remaining value is added to the total counter on the condition that the remaining value is stored in the work RAM 73 (step S2110: YES) ( Step S2111). As a result, the value of the game number image increases from the current value by the remaining value.

  When the process of step S2109 is executed, when a negative determination is made at step S2110, or when the process of step S2111 is executed, the image data corresponding to the total counter value is grasped as the image data to be used this time. (Step S2112). Then, parameter information to be applied to the image data is grasped (step S2113). As a result, in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605), image data for displaying an image corresponding to the current total counter value as a game number image is set as a drawing target. Is set. In addition, parameter information to be applied to the image data is set in the drawing list.

  According to the above configuration, when an effect is executed in which the number of remaining continuous games in the advantageous gaming state is increased, the unit increase value varies according to the target increase value, so the target increase value is added to the number of continuous games. It is possible to diversify the manner of increasing the number of games at each update timing of the number-of-games image.

  Further, even when diversifying the increase mode of the number of continued games in this way, the processing configuration for determining the unit increase value, the processing configuration for setting the value of the unit increase counter, and the game number image The processing configuration for updating is constant regardless of the type of target increase value. As a result, it is possible to achieve the excellent effects as described above while simplifying the processing configuration.

  Further, since the unit increase value corresponding to the target increase value is set, it is possible to cause the player to predict the target increase value by checking the unit increase value. Therefore, it becomes possible to make a player pay attention to the update mode of the number-of-games image, and as a result, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the increased display effect.

  It is also possible to prepare a plurality of types of division values when executing the target increase value division processing (step S2102) and execute the division processing using the division values determined by lottery. In this case, even if the target increase value is the same, it is possible to diversify the game number increasing mode at each update timing of the game number image when the target increase value is added to the number of continuing games.

<Configuration for performing simulated video production>
Next, a configuration for performing a pseudo moving image effect will be described.

  The pseudo moving image effect is an effect in which moving image display is executed by the symbol display device 41 over the pseudo moving image effect period. In the pseudo-video effect period, a specific update count (for example, 600 times) occurs at which the image update timing at which at least a part of the image displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed is a plurality of times. At each update timing of the image in the pseudo-video effect period, one still image data 171 to 173 that is a use target at the update timing is drawn on the entire frame regions 82a and 82b to be drawn. Images of the one still image data 171 to 173 are displayed over the entire symbol display device 41. In this case, the number of still image data 171 to 173 to be used in the pseudo moving image production period is smaller than the specific update count.

  Specifically, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 58, the memory module 74 includes first character image data 171, effect image data 172, as still image data 171 to 173 for executing the pseudo moving image effect. The second character image data 173 is stored in advance. As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 59A, the first character image data 171 includes, as the first character image G41, a first pseudo moving image character G42 representing a person and a first pseudo moving image character G42. The symbol display device 41 includes a second pseudo video character G43 representing a person different from the above and a pseudo video background G44 displayed behind the first pseudo video character G42 and the second pseudo video character G43. This is image data to be displayed on the entire screen. The first character image G41 is an image captured by an imaging device such as a camera.

  In the effect image data 172, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 59B, a light ray image G47 representing a state in which light is emitted from the light source to the vicinity of the effect background G46 is displayed as the effect image G45. This is image data for displaying the image to be displayed on the entire symbol display device 41. The effect image G45 is an image for enhancing the visual effect. In addition to the light ray image G47, the image representing the blast, the image representing the water splash, and the aura represented as if the surroundings of the character are emitting light. Examples include images. The effect image G45 is an image created using software for creating an image.

  As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 59 (c), the second character image data 173 includes a first pseudo moving image character G42 as the second character image G48, as well as the first character image G41. This is image data for displaying two pseudo moving image characters G43 and a pseudo moving image background G44 on the entire symbol display device 41. The second character image G48 is an image captured by an imaging device such as a camera.

  However, the display modes of the first pseudo moving image character G42 and the second pseudo moving image character G43 by the second character image data 173 are the first pseudo moving image character G42 and the second pseudo moving image by the first character image data 171. This is different from the display mode of the character G43. Specifically, the shape of the hand area representing the hand, which is a partial area in the first pseudo animation character G42, the direction of the torso area representing the torso, the relative position of the hand area with respect to the torso area, and the like are as follows. The image G41 differs from the second character image G48. In addition, the shape of the hand region representing the hand, which is a partial region in the second pseudo moving image character G43, the direction of the torso region representing the torso, the relative position of the hand region with respect to the torso region, and the like are described for the first character image G41. And the second character image G48.

  Between the first character image G41 and the second character image G48, the display mode of the first pseudo moving image character G42 is not continuous, and similarly, the display mode of the second pseudo moving image character G43 is also continuous. There is no. The fact that the display mode of the first pseudo moving image character G42 is not continuous means that the shape of a predetermined region such as the hand region of the first pseudo moving image character G42 in the second character image G48, and the predetermined region and the first pseudo image It means that the relative position between the moving image character G42 and another region is different from the mode at the next image update timing assumed from the display mode of the first character image G41. Similarly, the fact that the display mode of the second pseudo moving image character G43 is not continuous means that the shape of a predetermined region such as the hand region of the second pseudo moving image character G43 in the second character image G48 and the predetermined region. And the other area of the second pseudo moving image character G43 are different from the mode at the next image update timing assumed from the display mode of the first character image G41.

  A second display period for displaying the effect image G45 is set between a first display period for displaying the first character image G41 and a third display period for displaying the second character image G48. As a result, each pseudo moving image between the first character image G41 and the second character image G48 is displayed more than when the second character image G48 is displayed immediately after the first character image G41 is displayed. The discontinuity between the characters G42 and G43 becomes inconspicuous. Then, the pseudo video characters G42 and G43 are displayed in different display modes in the first display period and the third display period, respectively, while making the discontinuity of the pseudo video characters G42 and G43 inconspicuous. Thus, the number of character image data 171 and 173 is small with respect to the image update timing, and the character image data 171 and 173 having no continuity in the operation of the pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 are used. It is possible for the player to recognize that the moving image characters G42 and G43 are being displayed.

  In the first display period in which the first character image G41 is displayed, the second display period in which the effect image G45 is displayed, and the third display period in which the second character image G48 is displayed, the image update timing occurs multiple times. The display periods are the same as each other. In the configuration in which the image update timing occurs a plurality of times in each of the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period, the image data 171 to 173 to be used in each display period is one type as already described. Only. However, in each display period, the drawing mode of the image data 171 to 173 to be used in the frame areas 82a and 82b is changed at each update timing. Specifically, in each of the image data 171 to 173, the range to be drawn in the drawing target frame regions 82a and 82b is sequentially changed. The configuration will be described below.

  FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the ranges to be drawn in the drawing target frame regions 82a and 82b differ in each of the image data 171 to 173.

  When drawing data is created in the frame areas 82a and 82b to be drawn in the VDP 76, data is written in all unit areas of the frame areas 82a and 82b, but the resolution of each frame area 82a and 82b is 800 × 600. The number of dots. In contrast, the first character image data 171, the effect image data 172, and the second character image data 173 are larger than the number of dots in the frame regions 82 a and 82 b in the size stored in the memory module 74. The number of pixels. The range that can be drawn by the image data 171 to 173 at the initial magnification is larger than the frame regions 82a and 82b in both the horizontal dimension and the vertical dimension. This makes it possible to vary the range to be rendered in one type of image data 171 to 173 that is to be used in each display period. Furthermore, even if it is the structure which makes the range used as a drawing object differ in one kind of image data 171-173 used as this object, the one kind of image data 171-173 in the whole symbol display apparatus 41. It is possible to display an image corresponding to.

  The sizes of the first character image data 171, the effect image data 172, and the second character image data 173 stored in the memory modules 74 are the same. And the aspect which makes the range used as a drawing object different in each image data 171-173 is the same also in any of a 1st display period, a 2nd display period, and a 3rd display period. Specifically, at the start timing of each display period, a range brought closer to a predetermined corner in the image data 171 to 173 to be used is set as a drawing target range. Then, at the subsequent update timing of the image, the change mode of the range to be drawn is changed so that the range to be drawn gradually moves toward the opposite corner side with respect to the predetermined corner angle. Is set.

  Data for changing the range to be rendered is stored in advance in the memory module 74 as a pseudo moving image table 174 as shown in FIG. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the pseudo moving image table 174. As shown in FIG. 61, in the pseudo moving image table 174, pointer information that is a serial number is set, and drawing range information that determines a drawing target range is set in association with each pointer information. . The pointer information is set by the number of image update timings that occur in each display period. Thereby, in each display period, the drawing range information corresponding to all the update timings can be derived by referring to the pseudo moving image table 174. Further, since the pseudo moving image table 174 is also used in each display period, the pseudo moving image table 174 is stored in advance, compared to a configuration in which the pseudo moving image table 174 is prepared in advance corresponding to each display period. It is possible to reduce the storage capacity required for storage.

  FIG. 62 is a time chart showing a state in which the pseudo moving image effect is executed. 62 (a) shows the first display period, FIG. 62 (b) shows the second display period, FIG. 62 (c) shows the third display period, and FIG. 62 (d) is used in each display period. A mode that the range used as the drawing object of the target image data 171 to 173 is changed is shown.

  When the pseudo moving image effect is started at the timing of t1, the first display period is started as shown in FIG. The first display period continues from the timing t1 to the timing t2, and during this period, the range to be rendered in the first character image data 171 is as shown in FIG. It is gradually changed while having a certain direction.

  At the timing t2, the first display period ends as shown in FIG. 62A, and the second display period starts as shown in FIG. 62B. The second display period continues from the timing t2 to the timing t3. During this period, as shown in FIG. 62D, the range to be rendered in the effect image data 172 is in a certain direction. It is gradually changed while having sex. The amount of deviation of the drawing range between the directionality and the continuous update timing is the same as in the first display period.

  At the timing of t3, the second display period ends as shown in FIG. 62 (b), and the third display period starts as shown in FIG. 62 (c). The third display period continues from the timing t3 to the timing t4. During this period, as shown in FIG. 62D, the range to be rendered in the second character image data 173 is as follows. It is gradually changed while having a certain direction. The amount of shift in the drawing range between the directionality and the continuous update timing is the same as in the first display period and the second display period.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the pseudo animation effect will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the calculation process for the pseudo moving image effect executed by the display CPU 72. It should be noted that the calculation process for the pseudo animation effect is executed in the effect calculation process in step S704 in the task process (FIG. 19) in a situation where the pseudo animation effect is to be executed.

  If it is the first display period (step S2201: YES), it is determined whether this time is the start timing of the first display period (step S2202). The display CPU 72 reads out an execution target table for controlling the entire flow of the pseudo moving image effect from the memory module 74 when starting the pseudo moving image effect. It is specified whether the display period is applicable, and whether it is the start timing of each display period.

  When it is the start timing of the first display period (step S2202: YES), the pseudo moving image table 174 is read from the memory module 74 to the work RAM 73 (step S2203). If a negative determination is made in step S2202, or if the process of step S2203 is executed, the first character image data 171 is grasped as image data to be used this time (step S2204). Further, the drawing range information set in correspondence with the pointer information which is the current reference target in the pseudo moving image table 174 is grasped (step S2205). Thereafter, after grasping parameter information other than the drawing range information (step S2206), the pointer information of the reference target is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be referred to is added by 1 in the pseudo moving image table 174 (step S2206). S2207).

  When the calculation process for the pseudo animation effect is executed as described above, the first character image data 171 is set as the drawing target in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605). Is done. Also, the parameter information grasped in step S2205 and step S2206 is set in the drawing list.

  If it is the second display period (step S2201: NO, step S2208: YES), it is determined whether this is the start timing of the second display period (step S2209). If it is the start timing of the second display period (step S2209: YES), the value of the pointer information to be referred to in the pseudo moving image table 174 already read out to the work RAM 73 in the first display period is cleared to “0”. (Step S2210). Thereby, the drawing range information set in association with the first pointer information in the pseudo moving image table 174 becomes the use target at the start timing of the second display period.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2209, or when the process of step S2210 is executed, the effect image data 172 is grasped as image data to be used this time (step S2211). Further, the drawing range information set corresponding to the pointer information that is the current reference target in the pseudo moving image table 174 is grasped (step S2212). Thereafter, after grasping the parameter information other than the drawing range information (step S2213), the pointer information of the reference target is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be referred to in the pseudo moving image table 174 is incremented by 1 (step S2213). S2214).

  When the calculation process for the pseudo moving image effect is executed as described above, the effect image data 172 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605). Also, the parameter information grasped in step S2212 and step S2213 is set in the drawing list.

  If it is the third display period (step S2201 and step S2208: NO), it is determined whether this is the start timing of the third display period (step S2215). When it is the start timing of the third display period (step S2215: YES), the value of the pointer information to be referred to in the pseudo moving image table 174 that has already been read in the work RAM 73 in the first display period is cleared to “0”. (Step S2216). Thereby, the drawing range information set in association with the first pointer information in the pseudo moving image table 174 becomes the use target at the start timing of the third display period.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2215, or when the process of step S2216 is executed, the second character image data 173 is grasped as image data to be used this time (step S2217). Further, the drawing range information set in correspondence with the pointer information which is the current reference target in the pseudo moving image table 174 is grasped (step S2218). Thereafter, after grasping parameter information other than the drawing range information (step S2219), the pointer information of the reference object is updated so that the value of the pointer information to be referred to is added by 1 in the pseudo moving image table 174 (step S2219). S2220).

  When the calculation process for the pseudo animation effect is executed as described above, the second character image data 173 is set as a drawing target in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605). Is done. Further, the parameter information grasped in step S2218 and step S2219 is set in the drawing list.

  Here, the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 are individually used in an effect different from the pseudo moving image effect. Specifically, the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 are used as display images of round effects executed during different round games in the open / close execution mode that is the high-frequency winning mode. . FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing calculation processing for round effect executed by the display CPU 72. The calculation process for the round effect is executed in the effect calculation process in step S704 in the task process (FIG. 19) in a situation where the round effect is to be executed.

  When it is the execution period of the first round game (step S2301: YES), the first character image data 171 is grasped as image data to be used this time (step S2302), and other image data is used as image data to be used this time. Grasp (step S2303). Thereafter, parameter information to be applied to these image data is grasped (step S2304). When the calculation process for round effect is executed in this way, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605) is grasped in the first character image data 171 and step S2303. Image data is set as a drawing target. Also, the parameter information grasped in step S2304 is set in the drawing list.

  If it is the execution period of the eighth round game (step S2305: YES), the second character image data 173 is grasped as the image data to be used this time (step S2306), and other image data is to be used this time. (Step S2307). Thereafter, parameter information to be applied to these image data is grasped (step S2308). When the calculation process for round effect is executed in this way, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 76 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S605) is grasped in the second character image data 173 and step S2307. Image data is set as a drawing target. Also, the parameter information grasped in step S2308 is set in the drawing list.

  If it is not the first round game and the eighth round game, other processing is executed (step S2309). In this case, the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 are not selected as the image data to be used.

  As described above, the second display period for displaying the effect image G45 is set between the first display period for displaying the first character image G41 and the third display period for displaying the second character image G48. ing. As a result, each pseudo moving image between the first character image G41 and the second character image G48 is displayed more than when the second character image G48 is displayed immediately after the first character image G41 is displayed. The discontinuity between the characters G42 and G43 becomes inconspicuous. Then, the pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 are displayed in different display modes in the first display period and the second display period, respectively, while making the discontinuity of the pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 inconspicuous. Thus, the number of character image data 171 and 173 is small with respect to the image update timing, and the character image data 171 and 173 having no continuity in the operation of the pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 are used. It is possible for the player to recognize that the moving image characters G42 and G43 are being displayed.

  In particular, the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 are image data prepared for displaying images for round effects in different round games. The continuity of movement of the pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 between the image G41 and the second character image G48 is not required. In this case, as described above, the display period of the first character image G41 and the display period of the second character image G48 are generated so as to sandwich the display period of the effect image G45. Using the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 prepared for display, it is possible to execute a pseudo moving image effect.

  The drawing mode of the image data 171 to 173 to be used in each display period of the pseudo moving image effect in the frame regions 82a and 82b is changed at each update timing. Accordingly, it is possible to display a moving image while using one type of image data 171 to 173 in each display period.

  The pseudo moving image table 174 for changing the drawing mode of the image data 171 to 173 to be used in the display regions of the pseudo moving image effect in the frame regions 82a and 82b is also used in each display period. As a result, the above-described excellent effects can be achieved while suppressing the storage capacity required in the memory module 74.

<Another form of pseudo-video production>
The character image data 171 and 173 for displaying each of the pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 are not limited to the configuration in which only two types exist, and a configuration in which three or more types exist may be used. For example, separately from the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173, the pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 are displayed, and the first character image G41 and the second character image G48 are displayed in the pseudo state. A configuration may be adopted in which image data for third character that changes the display mode of the moving image characters G42 and G43 is stored in the memory module 74 in advance. In this case, as the pseudo animation effect period, a first display period in which the first character image data 171 is used, a second display period in which the effect image data 172 is used, and the second character image data 173 are: There is a third display period to be used, a fourth display period in which effect image data 172 or effect image data different therefrom is used, and a fifth display period in which third character image data is to be used. Will be.

  Each display period of the pseudo-video effect is not limited to the same period, and each display period may be a substantially identical period although it is a different period. Of these, at least one display period may be a period that is significantly different from other display periods. For example, although the first display period and the second display period are the same or substantially the same period, the effect period may be longer or shorter than the first display period and the second display period. When the display periods are different from each other, the pseudo moving image table 174 is created so as to correspond to all the update timings of the display period that is the longest period among the display periods. The pseudo moving image table 174 can also be used.

  If the drawing range information derived from the pseudo video table 174 has continuity at the start timing and the end timing, it is assumed that the pseudo video table 174 is used a plurality of times in one display period in the pseudo video production. There is no sense of incongruity. In this case, it is not necessary to set data corresponding to the entire display period in the pseudo moving image table 174, and it is sufficient if only data corresponding to a part of the display period is set. is there.

  The first character image data 171, the effect image data 172, and the second character image data 173 are configured to be larger than the frame regions 82 a and 82 b in the initial magnification size stored in the memory module 74. There is no limitation, and the size of the initial magnification is the same as or smaller than the frame regions 82a and 82b, and is enlarged so as to be larger than the frame regions 82a and 82b after being read from the memory module 74. It is good also as a structure by which a process is performed. In this case, when the image is used for displaying an image for a round effect, the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 are used at the initial magnification size, and the image for the pseudo moving image effect is used. When used for display, the first character image data 171 and the second character image data 173 may be used in a size enlarged from the size of the initial magnification.

  A method for changing the drawing mode of the image data 171 to 173 to be used in the frame areas 82a and 82b in each display period of the pseudo animation effect at each update timing is to be drawn in the image data 171 to 173. It is not limited to the method of making the range different. For example, it is possible to gradually narrow the range to be rendered in the image data 171 to 173 so that the display target image is gradually enlarged as a result. In addition, a method may be used in which the range to be drawn in the image data 171 to 173 is gradually widened so that the display target image is gradually reduced as a result.

  The first character image data 171 is not limited to a configuration in which only the first character image data 171 is used as the image data to be used in the first display period of the pseudo animation effect. In the first display period, the first character image data 171 is framed. After drawing in the areas 82a and 82b, another image data may be drawn in a partial range of the frame areas 82a and 82b. Even in this case, the first character image G41 is displayed behind the other image data, and the effect image G45 is displayed between the first character image G41 and the second character image G48. By displaying, it is possible to make the player recognize that a moving image by the pseudo moving image characters G42 and G43 is displayed.

<Further another form of pseudo-video production>
-The mode shown in Drawing 65 (a)-Drawing 65 (c) is also considered as a mode of pseudo animation production. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 65 (a) and 65 (c), the pseudo moving image character G51 is displayed in the pseudo moving image effect. First pseudo moving image image data and second pseudo moving image image data are stored in advance in the memory module 74 as image data for displaying the pseudo moving image character G51, and the first pseudo moving image image data is used. As a result, the first pseudo moving image image G52 is displayed as shown in FIG. 65 (a), and the second pseudo moving image image data is used as a second target as shown in FIG. 65 (c). A pseudo moving image G53 is displayed.

  In the first pseudo video image G52, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), a state before the predetermined part G51a (specifically both arms) of the pseudo video character G51 moves along a predetermined motion path is displayed. In the pseudo moving image G53, as shown in FIG. 65C, a state after the predetermined portion G51a of the pseudo moving image character G51 moves along a predetermined motion path is displayed. However, the position of the predetermined portion G51a of the pseudo video character G51 between the first pseudo video image G52 and the second pseudo video image G53 is far enough to make it difficult for the player to recognize the continuity of movement. .

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 65B, the pseudo-moving effect image G54 is displayed between the display period of the first pseudo moving image G52 and the display period of the second pseudo moving image G53. . In the pseudo moving image effect image G54, a large number of small individual images G54a such as bubbles are displayed. In addition, the pseudo moving image effect image G54 is displayed over a predetermined period, and in the predetermined period, a large number of small individual images G54a are moved along the predetermined movement path in the predetermined portion G51a of the pseudo moving image character G51. A moving image is displayed so as to move in the same direction.

  Due to the above configuration, the position of the predetermined portion G51a of the pseudo video character G51 between the first pseudo video image G52 and the second pseudo video image G53 makes it difficult for the player to recognize the continuity of movement. Even if the configuration is far apart, the visual effect due to the movement of the small individual image G54a in the pseudo-moving effect image G54 causes a gap between the first pseudo-moving image G52 and the second pseudo-moving image G53. It becomes possible for the player to recognize that the predetermined part G51a has moved along the predetermined movement path. As a result, even if the number of pieces of pseudo moving image data for displaying the pseudo moving image character G51 is small, the predetermined portion G51a between the first pseudo moving image image G52 and the second pseudo moving image image G53 is used. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the moving image display of the pseudo moving image character G51 is being performed while making the discontinuity of the position of the image not conspicuous.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the electrical configuration relating to display control is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, differences from the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration in the present embodiment.

  The configuration shown in FIG. 66 includes a main controller 50 as in the first embodiment. Further, the main control device 50 has a payout control device 55 for controlling the payout device 56 and a power supply for driving and controlling the game ball launching mechanism 58 as well as a function of supplying power to each device including the main control device 50. The launch control device 57, a special figure unit 37 for displaying the result of the game times, and a general figure unit 38 for displaying the result of the public power open lottery are electrically connected. In addition, an audio light emission control device 60 that drives and controls the display light emitting unit 44 and the speaker unit 45 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 50 is provided, and further, a command transmitted from the audio light emission control device 60 is provided. A display control device 200 that controls the symbol display device 41 is provided.

  As shown in FIG. 66, the display control apparatus 200 includes a display control board 206 on which a display CPU 201, a work RAM 202, a memory module 203, a VRAM 204, and a video display processor (VDP) 205 are mounted. .

  The display CPU 201 has a function as a main control unit in the display control device 200, and reads, interprets, and executes a control program and the like. Specifically, the display CPU 201 is connected to an input port 207 mounted on the display control board 206 via a bus, and various commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 60 are input to the display CPU 201 through the input port 207. Is done.

  The display CPU 201 is connected to the work RAM 202, the memory module 203, and the VRAM 204 via a bus, and transfers various data stored in the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 based on commands received from the sound emission control device 60. Instruct transfer. Further, the display CPU 201 is connected to the VDP 205 via a bus, and based on a command received from the sound emission control device 60, a display instruction for displaying a three-dimensional image (3D image) on the symbol display device 41 is provided. Do. Hereinafter, the memory module 203, the work RAM 202, the VRAM 204, and the VDP 205 will be described.

  The memory module 203 stores in advance control data including a control program and fixed value data, and also stores in advance various image data for displaying a three-dimensional image. The memory module 203 includes a nonvolatile semiconductor memory that does not require external power supply for storage. Incidentally, although the storage capacity is 4 Gbits, this storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control apparatus 200 is executed satisfactorily. Further, the memory module 203 is used as a non-write and read-only memory (ROM) when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  The various image data stored in the memory module 203 includes object data such as symbols and characters displayed on the symbol display device 41, texture data to be pasted on the object data, and the rearmost surface in the image for one frame. Image data for the back side that constitutes the image.

  Here, the object data is a three-dimensional virtual object arranged in a world coordinate system, which is a three-dimensional coordinate system corresponding to a virtual three-dimensional space, and is three-dimensional information composed of a plurality of polygons. A polygon is a polygonal plane defined by vertices of a plurality of three-dimensional coordinates. In order to apply, for example, a surface model to the object data, vertex coordinate information of each polygon is set with reference coordinates preset for each object data as the origin. That is, in each object data, the relative position (that is, direction and size) of each polygon is three-dimensionally defined in a self-contained local coordinate system.

  The texture data is an image to be pasted on each polygon of the object data. When the texture data is pasted on the object data, an image corresponding to the object data, for example, a display image including a pattern or a character is generated. The texture data may be held in any manner, but includes at least a combination of, for example, bitmap format data and a color palette that is referred to when determining the display color at each pixel of the bitmap image.

  The rearmost image constitutes a two-dimensional image (2D image). The manner of holding the image data for the back is arbitrary, but for example, it is stored and held as JPEG format data in a state in which two-dimensional still image data is compressed. Incidentally, plate-like object data (that is, plate polygon) is used when the image data for the back side is arranged in the world coordinate system.

  The work RAM 202 is a storage means for temporarily storing control data read and transferred from the memory module 203 and temporarily storing flags and the like. The work RAM 202 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for storing and holding, and in detail, a DRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to DRAM, and other RAM such as SRAM may be used. The storage capacity is 1 Gbit, but this storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control apparatus 200 is executed satisfactorily. The work RAM 202 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  Based on a data transfer instruction from the display CPU 201 to the memory module 203, control data is transferred from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202. The display CPU 201 reads the control data transferred to the work RAM 202 into an internal memory area (register group) as necessary, and executes various processes.

  The VRAM 204 is storage means for temporarily storing various data necessary for image output to the symbol display device 41. The VRAM 204 includes a volatile semiconductor memory that requires an external power supply for storing and holding, and in detail, an SDRAM is used as the semiconductor memory. However, it is not limited to SDRAM, and other RAM such as DRAM, SRAM or dual port RAM may be used. Note that the storage capacity is 2 Gbits, but the storage capacity is arbitrary as long as the control in the display control apparatus 200 is performed satisfactorily. The VRAM 204 is used for both reading and writing when the pachinko machine 10 is used.

  The VRAM 204 includes a development buffer 211, and image data is transferred from the memory module 203 to the development buffer 211 based on a data transfer instruction from the VDP 205 to the memory module 203. The VRAM 204 is provided with a frame buffer 212 in which drawing data is created by the VDP 205.

  The VDP 205 is an image generation device that performs drawing on the symbol display device 41 by specifically processing data stored in the development buffer 211 based on a drawing instruction from the display CPU 201. Yes, it is a kind of drawing circuit that operates an image processing device 41b incorporated in the symbol display device 41 so as to drive and control the liquid crystal display unit 41a. Since the VDP 205 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 205 can be said to be a microcomputer chip with built-in firmware dedicated to drawing.

  Specifically, the VDP 205 includes a geometry calculation unit 221, a rendering unit 222, a register 223, and a display circuit 225. These circuits are connected to each other via a bus, and are also connected to an I / F 226 for the display CPU 201 and an I / F 227 for the VRAM 204.

  The I / F 226 for the display CPU 201 stores a drawing list as drawing instruction information transmitted from the display CPU 201 in the register 223. The geometry calculation unit 221 reads various image data stored in the memory module 203 into the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 based on the drawing list stored in the register 223. Further, the geometry calculation unit 221 arranges the object data designated as the arrangement target in the world coordinate system. The geometry calculation unit 221 executes various coordinate conversion processes when and after the object data is arranged in the world coordinate system. Finally, the object is clipped in correspondence with the three-dimensional space corresponding to the screen coordinates of the display surface P.

  Based on the drawing list stored in the register 223, the rendering unit 222 adjusts the light source and pastes texture data on each clipped object data to determine the appearance of the object data. The rendering unit 222 projects each object data onto a predetermined two-dimensional plane to create two-dimensional data, and performs various adjustments based on depth information to frame drawing data for one frame that is two-dimensional data. Created in the buffer 212. The drawing data for one frame refers to data necessary for displaying an image at one update timing in a configuration in which the image on the display surface P of the symbol display device 41 is updated at a predetermined update timing. Say.

  Note that all of the control programs for operating the geometry calculation unit 221 and the rendering unit 222 may be provided by the drawing list. A memory in which the control program is stored in advance is built in the VDP 205, and the control program and the drawing list are stored. The geometry calculation unit 221 and the rendering unit 222 may execute processing depending on the contents of Alternatively, the control program may be read from the memory module 203 in advance. Further, the geometry calculation unit 221 and the rendering unit 222 may be configured to execute processing only by the operation of the hardware circuit corresponding to the drawing list without using a program.

  Here, the frame buffer 212 is provided with a plurality of frame regions 212a and 212b. Specifically, a first frame region 212a and a second frame region 212b are provided. Each of these frame areas 212a and 212b is set to a capacity capable of storing drawing data for one frame. Specifically, each of the frame regions 212a and 212b includes a large number of unit areas corresponding to the dots (pixels) of the liquid crystal display unit 41a (that is, the display surface P) at a predetermined magnification. Each unit area has a storage capacity capable of storing data for specifying which color to display. More specifically, a full color method is employed, and 256 colors can be set for each of R (red), G (green), and B (blue) in each dot. Corresponding to this, in each unit area, 1 byte (8 bits) is assigned to each RGB color. That is, each unit area has a storage capacity of at least 3 bytes.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the full-color method, and for example, in a configuration that can display only 256 colors in each dot, the storage capacity required to store color information in each unit area may be 1 byte.

  Since the first frame area 212a and the second frame area 212b are provided in the frame buffer 212, drawing on the symbol display device 41 is executed using drawing data created in one frame area. The creation of drawing data to be used in the future is executed for other frame regions. That is, a double buffer system is adopted as the frame buffer 212.

  In the display circuit 225, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the liquid crystal display unit 41a is generated based on the drawing data created in the first frame region 212a or the second frame region 212b, and the image signal is sent to the display circuit 225. It is output to the symbol display device 41 via the connected output port 208. Specifically, the drawing data is transferred from the frame areas 212 a and 212 b to be output to the display circuit 225. The transferred drawing data is converted into gradation data by adjusting the resolution by a scaler (not shown) so as to correspond to the resolution of the symbol display device 41. Based on the gradation data, an image signal corresponding to each dot of the symbol display device 41 is generated and output. Note that the display circuit 225 also outputs a synchronization signal such as a horizontal synchronization signal or a vertical synchronization signal.

<Basic Processing in Display CPU 201>
Next, basic processing in the display CPU 201 will be described.

  FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the V interrupt processing in this embodiment. In the V interrupt processing, if this time is the start timing of power supply to the display CPU 201 (step S2401: YES), all texture data stored in advance in the memory module 203 is provided in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204. Is read out to the texture area 211a (step S2402).

  If a negative determination is made in step S2401, or if the process of step S2402 is executed, a command analysis process is executed (step S2403). Specifically, the contents of the command stored in the command buffer of the work RAM 202 are analyzed. Here, when the display CPU 201 receives the strobe signal from the sound light side MPU 62, the display CPU 201 executes the command interruption process regardless of the process being executed at that time. In the command interrupt process, the command received at the input port 207 is transferred to a command buffer provided in the work RAM 202.

  Thereafter, on the condition that the result of the command analysis process corresponds to the result of receiving the new command (step S2404: YES), the command response process is executed (step S2405). In the command handling process, an execution target table for executing a program corresponding to the received command is read from the memory module 203. The execution target table is an information group in which processing necessary for displaying an image for one frame at each update timing of an image when displaying a moving image corresponding to the received command on the symbol display device 41 is defined. is there.

  As the command received by the display CPU 201 from the sound side MPU 62, as in the first embodiment, a command at the start of fluctuation, a command at the start of a notice effect, a command at the start of normal reach, a command at the start of super reach, There are a command at the start of a definite presentation, a command at the start of standby display, a definitive display start command and the like. When these commands are received, the execution target table necessary for executing the game-playing effects corresponding to the respective commands on the symbol display device 41 is read out.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2404, or if the process of step S2405 is executed, a task process is executed (step S2406). In the task processing, a drawing instruction is issued to the VDP 205 in order to display an image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing by referring to the control data of the current processing time in the data table set as a use target. Set the various data required above. Specifically, as the various data, the address information of the area where the image data to be controlled is stored in the memory module 203, the address information of the area to which the image data to be controlled is transferred in the VRAM 204, and the image data to be controlled are used. Thus, there are information on the target frame regions 212a and 212b for which drawing data is to be created, and various types of information for creating a 3D image using a virtual three-dimensional space.

  Thereafter, a drawing list output process is executed (step S2407). In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying an image for one frame corresponding to the update timing of the current processing time is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 205. In this case, in the drawing list, an image grasped in the immediately preceding task process is set as a drawing target, and parameter information updated in the task process is set together. The VDP 205 creates drawing data in the frame areas 212a and 212b of the VRAM 204 according to this drawing list.

  FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the task processing in step S2406.

  In the task process, first, a control start setting process is executed (step S2501). In the setting process for starting control, a process for setting an individual image for newly starting control (calculation) in the display CPU 201 in the current processing time is executed. An individual image is one 2D image defined by still image data such as back image data, or one 3D image defined by a combination of object image data and texture image data. That is.

  Specifically, regarding the setting process for starting the control, first, based on the currently set execution target table, it is determined whether or not there is an individual image to be controlled in the current processing round. If it exists, the work RAM 202 searches for an empty buffer area for performing various calculations in controlling the individual image, and corresponds one-to-one to the individual image that is grasped as a control start target. Reserve a free buffer area. Further, initialization processing is executed for all the reserved empty buffer areas, and parameters for starting control according to individual images are set for the initialized empty buffer areas.

  Thereafter, the control update target is grasped (step S2502). This control update target is an individual image for which the control start process has been completed, and an individual image that may be included in an image for one frame after the current processing time.

  Thereafter, background arithmetic processing is executed (step S2503). In the background calculation processing, coordinates, rotation angles, scales, light information for adding light and darkness, and projections are applied to the background image and background characters that make up the background image. Processing for calculating and deriving various parameters necessary for creating a drawing list such as camera information to be performed and Z test designation is executed.

  Thereafter, the effect calculation process is executed (step S2504). In the effect calculation process, a process for calculating and deriving the above-described various parameters is executed for individual images to be displayed in various effects such as reach display, notice display, and jackpot effect.

  Thereafter, symbol calculation processing is executed (step S2505). In the symbol calculation process, a process for calculating and deriving the above-described various parameters is performed on a symbol image to be subjected to variable display in each game round.

  Incidentally, in each process of step S2503 to step S2505, a process for updating the parameter for starting control set in step S2501 is executed. In each process of step S2503 to step S2505, animation data set to change various parameters of the individual image according to a specific pattern every time the image update timing is reached is used. This animation data is determined according to the type of individual image. The animation data is stored in advance in the memory module 203, and is transferred in advance to the work RAM 202 until the timing at which the display CPU 201 needs to read it.

  Thereafter, the process of grasping the placement target in the world coordinate system is executed (step S2506). In the process of grasping the arrangement target in the world coordinate system, the process of grasping the individual image to be set as the drawing target in the current drawing list among the individual images that have been controlled and updated by the processes in steps S2503 to S2505. Execute. The grasp is performed based on the currently set execution target table. The individual image grasped here is set as a drawing target in the drawing list.

  That is, since the individual images to be controlled by the display CPU 201 are set more than the individual images to be controlled by the VDP 205, the adjustment is performed in step S2506. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the individual image to be controlled in the display CPU 201 and the individual image to be controlled in the VDP 205 may be the same. In this case, the process of step S2506 is executed. There is no need.

<Basic processing in VDP 205>
Next, basic processing executed by the VDP 205 will be described.

  In the VDP 205, processing for setting the value of the register 223 based on a command transmitted from the display CPU 201, processing for creating drawing data in the frame areas 212a and 212b of the frame buffer 212 based on a drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 201, At least a process of outputting an image signal to the symbol display device 41 is executed based on the drawing data created in the frame areas 212a and 212b.

  Among the above processes, the process of setting the value of the register 223 is executed each time a drawing list is received by a circuit (not shown) attached to the I / F 226 for the display CPU 201. Further, the process of creating the drawing data is repeatedly executed at a predetermined cycle (for example, 20 msec) in cooperation with the geometry calculation unit 221 and the rendering unit 222. Further, the process of outputting the image signal is executed by the display circuit 225 at a predetermined output start timing of the image signal.

  Hereinafter, the process of creating the drawing data will be described in detail. Prior to the description of the processing, the contents of the drawing list transmitted from the display CPU 201 to the VDP 205 will be described. FIGS. 69A to 69C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the contents of the drawing list.

  Header information is set in the drawing list. In the header information, information of a target buffer, which is information indicating which one of the first frame area 212a and the second frame area 212b is to be created, is set for an image of one frame related to the drawing list. Yes. In addition, various designation information is set in the header information.

  In the drawing list, in addition to the header information, a plurality of types of image data to be arranged in the world coordinate system are set when creating the drawing data this time, and information on the drawing order of each image data, Parameter information of each image data is set. More specifically, the drawing order information is set so as to be sequential numerical value information, and parameter information is set in a one-to-one correspondence with each numerical information.

  In the drawing list of FIG. 69 (a), the back side image data is set as the first drawing target, the background object A is set as the second, the background object B is set as the third, and so on. Yes. Also, as the order after the background image data, the effect image data is set, for example, the effect object A is set as mth, the effect object B is set as m + 1, and so on. Yes. Further, as the order after the effect image data, symbol image data is set, for example, symbol object A is set as nth, symbol object B is set as n + 1th,... Yes.

  It should be noted that the order in which the image data is set in the drawing list is not limited to the above, and the set order may be the reverse of the above, and the design image The image data for presentation or the image data for background may be set after the data, and the image data for the design is set in the order between the predetermined presentation image data and the other presentation image data. May be.

  Parameter information P (1), P (2), P (3), ..., P (m), P (m + 1), ..., P (n), P (n + 1), ... Multiple types of parameter information are set. Specifically, the parameter information P (1) of the image data for the back side, as shown in FIG. 69B, the address information of the area where the image data for the back side is stored in the memory module 203, and the back side Information (X value information, Y value information, Z value information) indicating the position in the world coordinate system when setting image data for use, and world coordinates when setting image data for the back side The rotation angle information indicating the rotation angle in the system, the scale information indicating the magnification when setting to the world coordinate system with respect to the scale set as the initial state of the image data for the back surface, Uniform α value information indicating overall transmission information (or transparency information) when image data is set is set.

  Here, the coordinate information is individually set for all vertices of the object data. The coordinate information is set for the object data, but is not set for the texture data. In the texture data, the coordinate value of each pixel is predetermined in association with each vertex of the object data. This coordinate value is a UV coordinate value different from the coordinate value in the world coordinate system, and is stored in the memory module 203 in a state of being attached to a combination of object data and texture data. This UV coordinate value is referred to by the VDP 205 when texture mapping is performed.

  In the parameter information (P1), the camera information including the coordinates and orientation information of the virtual camera when the rear image data is projected onto the drawing virtual two-dimensional plane, and the rear image data are rendered. Light information including information on the position and orientation of the virtual light source that determines the shadow in the case is set.

  In the parameter information (P1), Z test designation information indicating whether or not to apply the Z buffer method, which is a type of hidden surface removal method, is set. The Z buffer method means that each pixel (or each voxel, each pixel, each polygon) arranged on the Z axis when a large number of objects or two-dimensional images overlap in the depth direction (Z axis direction) in the world coordinate system. This is a depth adjustment processing method in which the distance from the viewpoint is sequentially referred to, and numerical information set in the pixel closest to the viewpoint is set in the corresponding unit area in the frame regions 212a and 212b.

  In addition to the Z buffer method, the Z sort method is set as a method for performing the hidden surface removal. The Z sort method is a depth adjustment processing method in which numerical information set for each pixel is sequentially set in corresponding unit areas in the frame regions 212a and 212b for each pixel arranged on the Z axis. When the Z sort method is applied, the α value set for each pixel is referred to, and the corresponding α value is applied to the numerical information corresponding to the color information of each pixel arranged on the Z axis. In this state, the addition process of the numerical information and the calculation process for fusion are executed. The description of the specific processing configuration of the hidden surface processing by Z sort is omitted, but it is activated when an effect image is displayed.

  In the parameter information (P1), α data designation information indicating whether or not α data is applied and an application target, and fog specification information indicating whether or not fog is applied and the application target are set.

  Here, the α value is the transmission information of the corresponding pixel. As a method of setting the α value on the drawing list, there are a method of specifying the uniform α value and a method of specifying α data. The uniform α value is transmission information applied to all pixels of one image data, and is numerical information derived as a calculation result in the display CPU 201. The uniform α value is uniformly applied to all the pixels of the image data. On the other hand, the α data is transmission information applied in units of pixels of two-dimensional still image data or texture data, and is stored in advance in the memory module 203 as image data. The alpha data can have different transmission information for each pixel within the range of the same still image data or the same texture data. The α data has a larger data capacity than program data for setting a uniform α value.

  Since the α value and α data are set uniformly as described above, the transparency of two-dimensional still image data and texture data can be controlled uniformly for all pixels, not finely controlled in units of pixels. In a good situation, it is possible to cope with uniform α values, so that the required data capacity can be reduced, and by applying α data, it is possible to finely control the transparency in units of pixels.

  The fog is information for adjusting the degree of brightness with respect to a position in a predetermined direction, specifically, the Z-axis direction in the world coordinate system. Fog is used to express fog or inside a cave. Here, a single fog may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, fog is applied to the image for one frame in a certain manner. Alternatively, a plurality of fogs may be applied to the entire image for one frame. In this case, when a fog similar to that of other objects is applied to an object arranged on the far side in the Z-axis direction, another fog is set for the object in a situation where the material is not too dark due to being too dark. It may be configured. Thereby, the effect by setting fog can be acquired, without impairing the said texture.

  With other parameters such as parameter information P (2), as shown in FIG. 69 (c), the object information and texture are replaced with the information on the back image data among the various types of information shown in FIG. 69 (b). And information are set. As these pieces of information, information on addresses of areas in which objects and textures are stored in the memory module 203 is set.

  The drawing process in the VDP 205 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. In the following description, the manner in which drawing data is created as the drawing process is executed will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, it is determined whether or not a new drawing list is received from the display CPU 201 (step S2601). If a new drawing list has been received, background setting processing is executed (step S2602).

  In the setting process for the background, the image data for the back for displaying the background image and the object data for displaying the character among the image data specified in the current drawing list are grasped. Then, it is determined whether or not the image data and object data are already arranged in the world coordinate system.

  If it is not arranged, a free buffer area to be referred to for placement in the world coordinate system is searched for each image data, and if a free buffer area is secured, initialization processing of that area is executed. Thereafter, the memory module 203 grasps and reads out the address where the image data is stored, and at the same time, the coordinate value of the local coordinate system for the image data so that the coordinates, rotation angle and scale specified in the drawing list are obtained. A world conversion process is performed to convert to a coordinate value of the world coordinate system, and the buffer area is set as described above.

  If it is arranged, update processing of various parameters set in the already secured buffer area is executed. In the background setting process, a control end process for erasing the background image data not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system is executed.

  Thereafter, a setting process for effect is executed (step S2603). In the effect setting process, object data for displaying the effect image is grasped from the image data specified in the current drawing list. Then, it is determined whether the grasped object data is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If not, the process for starting the arrangement is executed in the same manner as described in the background setting process. If it is arranged, update processing of various parameters is executed. In the effect setting process, a control end process for erasing effect image data not specified in the current drawing list among image data already arranged in the world coordinate system is executed.

  After that, a symbol setting process is executed (step S2604). In the symbol setting process, object data for displaying symbols is grasped from the image data specified in the current drawing list. Then, it is determined whether the grasped object data is already arranged in the world coordinate system. If not, the process for starting the arrangement is executed in the same manner as described in the background setting process. If it is arranged, update processing of various parameters is executed. Further, in the symbol setting process, a control end process is executed to erase the symbol image data not specified in the current drawing list among the image data already arranged in the world coordinate system.

  As a result of the processing in steps S2602 to S2604 being performed, the drawing list designates an arrangement target within the world coordinate system defined by the X, Y, and Z axes, as shown in FIG. The setting of the scene in which the image data PC1 for the rearmost image and the various object data PC2 to PC10 are arranged with the coordinates, the rotation angle, and the scale specified by the drawing list is completed. In FIG. 71, the state in which the image data PC1 for the rearmost image and the various object data PC2 to PC10 are arranged is simply shown.

  Thereafter, a conversion process to the camera coordinate system (camera space) is executed (step S2605). In the conversion process to the camera coordinate system, the coordinates and orientation of the viewpoint are determined based on the camera information specified by the drawing list, and the world coordinate system is used as the origin based on the coordinates and orientation of the viewpoint. Convert to camera coordinate system (camera space). Thereby, as shown in FIG. 71, the viewpoint PC11 indicated by the camera shape is set, and the coordinate system corresponding to the viewpoint PC11 is set.

  Here, the camera information is set for each individual image (the image data PC1 for the backmost image and the various object data PC2 to PC10), and in fact, there is a camera coordinate system for each individual image. . Thus, by setting the camera coordinate system for each individual image, viewpoint switching can be performed individually, and the degree of freedom in creating drawing data is increased. However, for convenience of explanation, FIG. 71 shows a state in which all individual images are set to a single viewpoint.

  Thereafter, conversion processing to the visual field coordinate system (visual field space) is executed (step S2606). In the conversion process to the visual field coordinate system, each camera coordinate system is converted into a visual field coordinate system corresponding to the visual field (viewing angle) from the viewpoint. Thereby, when each individual image is included in the field of view of the corresponding viewpoint, it is extracted, the individual image close to the viewpoint is enlarged, and the individual image far from the viewpoint is reduced.

  Thereafter, clipping processing is executed (step S2607). In the clipping process, each individual image extracted in step S2606 is grasped with a corresponding viewpoint as a common origin. In this state, each individual image extracted in step S2606 is based on the space corresponding to the screen area PC12 (see FIG. 71) corresponding to the frame areas 212a and 212b (that is, the symbol display device 41) to be drawn. Clip.

  Thereafter, the lighting process is executed (step S2608). In the lighting process, the type, coordinates, and orientation of the virtual light source are determined based on the light information specified by the drawing list, and shadows and reflections are calculated based on the virtual light source for each object extracted by the clipping process. .

  Thereafter, color information setting processing is executed (step S2609). In the color information setting process, the appearance of each object is determined by setting color information for each object extracted by the clipping process in units of pixels (that is, in units of polygons) or in units of vertices. In such color information setting processing, basically, texture mapping processing for pasting texture data corresponding to each object data extracted by the clipping processing is executed. Further, depending on the situation, processes such as bump mapping and transparency mapping are executed.

  Thereafter, in step S2610 and step S2611, each individual image extracted in step S2607 and further subjected to lighting processing and color information setting processing is projected onto the screen region PC12 which is a virtual two-dimensional plane (for example, perspective projection). Drawing data is created by performing parallel projection.

  Specifically, a rendering data creation process for production and background is first executed (step S2610). In the rendering data creation process for the effect and the background, the image data for the rearmost image set as the background image and the object data are projected onto the screen area PC12 while performing hidden surface removal, thereby being used for the background. Create drawing data. Further, rendering data for rendering is created by projecting the object data set as the rendering image onto the screen area PC12 while performing hidden surface removal.

  Here, the screen buffer 214 is provided in the VRAM 204 as shown in FIG. 66, and the drawing data for the background and the drawing data for the effect are collectively written in the screen buffer 214. A buffer and a symbol buffer in which symbol drawing data are written are set. Further, an area having the same number of dots as the number of pixels of the screen area PC12 is set in the effect and background buffers and the design buffer. The drawing data for the background and the drawing data for the effect created in step S2610 are stored in the buffer for the effect and the background so that the drawing data for the effect is overwritten in a part of the area of the drawing data for the background. Written. It should be noted that if background image data is not specified in the drawing list, background drawing data is not created, and if no rendering image data is specified in the drawing list, Drawing data is not created.

  Thereafter, a drawing data creation process for symbols is executed (step S2611). In the drawing data creation process for symbols, the object data set as symbols is projected onto the screen area PC12 while performing hidden surface removal, so that the symbols for symbols in the symbol buffer in the screen buffer 214 are displayed. Create drawing data. In addition, when the image data for symbols is not specified in the drawing list, the drawing data for symbols is not created.

  Thereafter, drawing data composition processing is executed (step S2612). In the drawing data synthesis process, the rendering data and background drawing data created in the screen buffer 214 individually by the processes in steps S2610 and S2611 are synthesized with the drawing data for the design, and the synthesis result is obtained. The data is written as drawing data for one frame in the frame areas 212a and 212b to be drawn.

  In this case, the order of writing is defined to be arranged from the back side to the front side in the order of rendering data for background and background → drawing data for symbols. Accordingly, rendering data for rendering and background is first written in the frame areas 212a and 212b to be drawn, and then drawing data for symbols is written. At this time, if a completely transparent α value is set for the pixel to be rendered, the back image is used as it is, and if a semi-transparent α value is set, the α value is set. The back side image and the near side image are merged at the reference ratio, and when the opaque α value is set, the near side image is overwritten with the back side image. The blending operation is executed.

  Incidentally, although each drawing data is defined to have an area for one frame, a completely transparent α value is set for a blank portion that is not projected in the drawing data for symbols.

  The drawing data for one frame is generated so as to be completed within a 20 msec cycle. An image signal is output from the display circuit 225 to the symbol display device 41 based on the created drawing data. Since the double buffer method is adopted as described above, the output of the image signal is output to the output. This is performed in parallel with the creation of drawing data corresponding to the update timing one frame after the corresponding frame. Further, the display circuit 225 has a selector circuit that alternately switches the frame areas 212a and 212b to be referred to every time the output of the image signal for one frame is completed. The frame regions 212a and 212b that are the drawing target are restricted so as not to be the output target for outputting the image signal.

  Steps S2602 to S2607 are processes executed by the geometry calculation unit 221, and steps S2608 to S2612 are processes executed by the rendering unit 222.

<Configuration for performing time-related effects>
Next, a configuration for performing a time corresponding effect will be described.

  The time-related effect is an effect in which the pachinko machine 10 is in a time-related effect state for a predetermined time (for example, 10 minutes) every time a predetermined time is reached. As the predetermined time, for example, a configuration that is set to have an hour interval such as 10 o'clock, 11 o'clock, 12 o'clock,. In addition, the time display effect state is specifically displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the light emission mode of the display light emitting unit 44 and the music output mode from the speaker unit 45 are also time compatible. It becomes an aspect. In addition, when it becomes a time-corresponding effect state, a special-corresponding image can be displayed at the game times that are jackpot results, or the probability that a special-corresponding image is displayed at the game times that are jackpot results is time-corresponding It becomes higher than the case of the state that is not the production state. By adopting a configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 enters a time-corresponding presentation state when a predetermined time is reached, for example, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed in the game hall, the plurality of pachinko machines 10 It becomes possible to perform a time corresponding effect at the same time.

  In order to enable execution of the time-related effect, as shown in FIG. 66, the sound emission control device 60 is provided with an RTC 65. The RTC 65 can output time information to the sound light side MPU 62. The RTC 65 has its own backup power source, and can manage the passage of time even when the supply of operating power to the pachinko machine 10 is stopped. The sound light side MPU 62 can acquire whether or not the time at the acquisition timing corresponds to the start timing of the time corresponding effect by acquiring time information from the RTC 65 as necessary. Then, when the time information acquired from the RTC 65 is the time corresponding to the start timing of the time corresponding effect, the sound light side MPU 62 executes a process for starting the time corresponding effect.

  The manner in which the time corresponding effect is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. FIG. FIG. 72A shows a normal period that is a period in which the time-related effect is not executed, FIG. 72B shows a preparation period that is a part of the execution period of the time-related effect, and FIG. A special period which is a part of the execution period of the time corresponding effect and starts after the preparation period is shown. FIG. 73A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device 41 in the normal period, and FIG. 73B is an explanation for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device 41 in the preparation period. FIG. 73 (c) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the display contents of the symbol display device 41 during the special period.

  As shown in FIG. 72A, the time information supplied from the RTC 65 to the MPU 62 at the timing t1 in the normal period when the time-related effect is not executed becomes time information corresponding to the start timing of the time-related effect. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 72A and 72B, the normal period ends at the timing t1 and the preparation period starts. Thereby, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is changed from the display mode corresponding to the normal period as shown in FIG. 73A to the display mode corresponding to the preparation period as shown in FIG. 73B. .

  In the display mode corresponding to the normal period and the display mode corresponding to the preparation period, the content of the backmost image displayed in the background image is different, and the type of the background individual image displayed in front of the backmost image Is different. Specifically, the background individual images G61a and G61b displayed in the display mode corresponding to the normal period are two, whereas the background individual images G62a to G62a displayed in the display mode corresponding to the preparation period are displayed. There are four G62d. As a result, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 becomes more flashy in the preparation period than in the normal period, and the player's attention to the symbol display device 41 can be increased. In the preparation period, a remaining time notification image G63 for notifying information corresponding to the remaining time until the special period is started is displayed on the symbol display device 41. As the remaining time notification image G63, the remaining time until the start of the special period is displayed by a subtraction formula. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that the start of the special period is approaching. In addition, although the display mode of a symbol is the same in a normal period and a preparation period, it is good also as a structure by which the display mode of a symbol is changed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 72B and 72C, the preparation period ends at the timing of t2 and the special period starts. Thereby, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is changed from the display mode corresponding to the preparation period as shown in FIG. 73 (b) to the display mode corresponding to the special period as shown in FIG. 73 (c). .

  In the display mode corresponding to the preparation period and the display mode corresponding to the special period, the content of the backmost image displayed in the background image is different and the type of the individual background image displayed in front of the backmost image Is different. Specifically, the background individual images G62a to G62d displayed in the display mode corresponding to the preparation period are four, whereas the background individual images G64a to G64a displayed in the display mode corresponding to the special period are displayed. There are 7 G64g. Thereby, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 becomes more flashy in the special period than in the preparation period, and the player's attention to the symbol display device 41 can be increased. In the special period, a special notification image G65 for notifying that the period is a special period is displayed on the symbol display device 41. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that it is a special period. In addition, although the display mode of a symbol is the same in a preparation period and a special period, it is good also as a structure by which the display mode of a symbol is changed.

  At the timing t3 when the predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the special period, the special period ends as shown in FIG. 72 (c) and returns to the normal period as shown in FIG. 72 (a). . Thereafter, the time corresponding effects are executed at each of the timings t4 to t6 and t7 to t9. In this case, the period from the start of the time-related effect at the predetermined execution time to the start of the time-related effect at the next execution time is constant at Tf1. In addition, the period from the start of the preparation period to the start of the special period is constant at Tf2 in the execution time of each time-related effect. Thereby, while the time corresponding | compatible effect can be started simultaneously in several pachinko machines 10, a special period can be started simultaneously in several pachinko machines 10. FIG.

  As described above, the time-corresponding effect is periodically executed using the time information of the RTC 65. However, when the time-corresponding effect starts in the opening / closing execution mode, the opening / closing execution mode continues. During this time, the rearmost image for the preparation period and the background individual images G62a to G62d for the preparation period are not displayed as the background image of the symbol display device 41, and further, the background image of the symbol display device 41 is special. The backmost image for the period and the individual background images G64a to G64g for the special period are not displayed. However, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed so as to be superimposed on a part of the image for the opening / closing execution mode in the preparation period, and displayed on the part of the image for the opening / closing execution mode in the special period. The special notification image G65 is displayed so as to be superimposed. This gives the player that it is during the execution period of the time-related effect while suitably enhancing the player's satisfaction with the occurrence of the opening / closing execution mode by giving priority to the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. It can be recognized. In addition, even in the open / close execution mode, it is possible for the game hall manager to grasp that it is originally the execution period of the time-related effect, and there is an abnormality regarding the RTC 65 by comparing a plurality of pachinko machines 10. It is possible to check whether or not it has occurred regardless of whether or not it is in the opening / closing execution mode.

  On the other hand, the display mode in the display light emitting unit 44 and the music output mode from the speaker unit 45 are time-corresponding from the start timing of the time-corresponding effect even in the open / close execution mode. Thereby, the display mode in the display light emitting unit 44 and the music output mode from the speaker unit 45 can be arranged in a time-corresponding mode in the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

  When the opening / closing execution mode ends in the situation where the time-based effect is started during the opening / closing execution mode and the time-based effect is originally being executed, the end timing corresponds to the preparation period. If there is, the display of the rearmost image for the preparation period and the background individual images G62a to G62d for the preparation period is started as the background image of the symbol display device 41, and the display of the remaining time notification image G63 is continued. If the end timing of the opening / closing execution mode corresponds to during the special period, the back image for the special period and the individual images G64a to G64g for the special period are used as the background image of the symbol display device 41. The display is started and the special notification image G65 is continuously displayed. As a result, it is possible to increase the opportunities for the execution of the time corresponding effect according to the original execution mode.

  The maximum duration of the opening / closing execution mode is longer than the preparation period but shorter than the special period. Thereby, when it becomes the start timing of the time corresponding effect during the opening / closing execution mode, the opening / closing execution mode ends in the middle of the execution time of the time corresponding effect. As a result, it is possible to increase the opportunities for the execution of the time corresponding effect according to the original execution mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the longest continuous period of the opening / closing execution mode may be longer than the execution period of the time corresponding effect.

  When the timing for starting the time-based effect is reached in the situation where the effect for game times is being executed, the time is handled in the state where the effect for game times is not being executed and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is not being executed The start mode of the time corresponding effect is different from the case where the start timing of the effect is reached. Specifically, when the start timing of the time-related effect is reached in the situation where the effect for game times is being executed, the background image, the effect image, and the design image have been processed so far as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. The display mode of the effect for the game times is continued. That is, the display of the rearmost image for the preparation period and the background individual images G62a to G62d for the preparation period is not started as the background image of the symbol display device 41. However, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed so as to be superimposed on a part of the background image displayed as an effect for game times. Incidentally, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed so as not to overlap with the symbol so as not to reduce the visibility of the symbol.

  Hereinafter, a state in which the time corresponding effect is executed in relation to the execution state of the effect for game times will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 75 (a) shows the start timing of the time-related effect, and FIG. 75 (b) is an execution period of the demonstration display that is executed in a situation where neither the game-time effect nor the opening / closing execution mode effect is executed. 75 (c) shows the execution period of the effects for game times, FIG. 75 (d) shows the preparation period, and FIG. 75 (e) is during the delay in which the image display as shown in FIG. 74 is performed. 75 (f) shows a display period of a preparation period image in which an image as shown in FIG. 73 (b) is displayed as a background image, FIG. 75 (g) shows a special period, and FIG. (H) indicates a light emission control period corresponding to the time.

  First, the case where the start timing of the time-related effect will be described in the situation where the effect for the game times and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode are not executed.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (b), at the timing of t1 in the execution period of the demonstration display, it becomes the start timing of the time corresponding effect as shown in FIG. 75 (a). In this case, at the timing t1, the preparation period starts as shown in FIG. 75 (d) and the display of the preparation period image starts as shown in FIG. 75 (f). Further, at the timing t1, the display light emitting unit 44 starts light emission in a time-corresponding manner as shown in FIG. 75 (h). Note that the speaker unit 45 also starts outputting music in a time-corresponding manner at the timing t1.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t2 in the middle of the preparation period, an effect for game times is started as shown in FIG. 75 (c). In this case, the variation display of the symbol is started in the state where the background image for the preparation period is displayed. That is, the variable display of the symbol is started in a state where the display of the background image for the preparation period according to the mode according to the display pattern so far is continued.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3 during the execution of the effect for game times, the preparation period ends as shown in FIG. 75 (d) and the special period starts as shown in FIG. 75 (g). In this case, the display of the background image for the special period is started in a state where the variable display of the symbols according to the mode according to the display pattern is continued. Then, as shown in FIG. 75 (g), the execution period secured as the special period elapses at the timing t4 when the demonstration display is executed as shown in FIG. 75 (b). The special period ends, and accordingly, the time corresponding performance of the current execution time ends. At the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 75 (h), the light emission in the time-corresponding manner in the display light emitting unit 44 is terminated. Note that the speaker unit 45 also stops outputting music in a time-corresponding manner at the timing t4. In addition, when the performance period guaranteed as the special period has elapsed in the situation where the effect for game times is being executed, the effect for game times is ended and the effect for game times is newly started. Or the special period ends when the demonstration display starts.

  Next, a description will be given of a case where the start timing of a time-related effect is achieved in a situation where an effect for game times is being executed.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (c), at the timing of t5 in the execution period of the effect for game times, it becomes the start timing of the time-related effect as shown in FIG. 75 (a). In this case, although the preparation period is started as shown in FIG. 75D at the timing t5, the display of the background image for the preparation period as shown in FIG. 73B is not started. As shown in FIG. 75 (e), the delay period is started. During the delay period, as already described, the remaining time notification image G63 is added while the image display of the effect for the game times based on the display pattern so far is continued.

  On the other hand, at the timing t5, as shown in FIG. 75 (h), the display light emitting unit 44 starts light emission in a time-corresponding manner. Note that the speaker unit 45 also starts outputting music in a time-corresponding manner at the timing t5. Thereby, the display mode in the display light emitting unit 44 and the music output mode from the speaker unit 45 can be arranged in a time-corresponding mode in the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 75 (c), the effect for the game round that has been executed so far is completed at the timing of t6, and a new game-round effect is started at the timing of t7. At the timing t7, the delay period ends as shown in FIG. 75 (e), and the display of the background image for the preparation period is started as shown in FIG. 75 (f). In other words, if the time-based effect start timing is reached in the middle of the performance for the game times, the background image for the preparation period is not displayed as the delay period until the effect for the game times is over, The display of the background image for the preparation period is started when the effect for game times is finished and the new effect for game times is started. In addition, when the effect for the game times is finished and the effect for the new game times is not started, the display of the background image for the preparation period is started when the demonstration display is started. As a result, the display of the background image for the preparation period is started during the period from the end of the effect for game times to the start of the new effect for game times or the start of the demonstration display. It can be used as a control period for The demonstration display is started when 0.5 sec elapses without the start of a new game-time effect or the opening / closing execution mode effect after the game-time effect ends.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t8 during the execution of the effect for game times, the preparation period ends as shown in FIG. 75 (d) and the special period starts as shown in FIG. 75 (g). In this case, the display of the background image for the special period is started in a state where the variable display of the symbols according to the mode according to the display pattern is continued. Then, as shown in FIG. 75 (g), when the execution period secured as the special period elapses at the timing of t9, which is the situation where the demonstration display is being executed as shown in FIG. 75 (b). The special period ends, and accordingly, the time corresponding performance of the current execution time ends. At the timing of t9, as shown in FIG. 75 (h), the light emission in the mode corresponding to the time in the display light emitting unit 44 is terminated. Note that the speaker unit 45 also stops outputting music in a time-corresponding manner at the timing t9.

  As described above, when the start timing of the time-related effect is reached in the situation where the effect for game times is being executed, the display mode of the effect for game times so far is continued for the background image, effect image, and pattern image. However, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed so as to be superimposed on a part of the background image displayed as an effect for game times. Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is during the execution period of the time corresponding effect while maintaining the display of the image according to the content already determined as the effect for the game times.

  In particular, when the display of the background image for the preparation period is started in a situation where super reach is performed in which the reach character image is displayed as an effect for game play, the image is displayed on the symbol display device 41. There is a risk that the number of types of image data used in the process will be extremely large and the processing load will be extremely high. On the other hand, when the start timing of the time-related effect is reached in the situation where the effect for game times is being executed, it is already determined as the effect for game times only by adding the remaining time notification image G63. The display of the image according to the contents is maintained. As a result, it is possible to prevent the processing load from becoming extremely high as described above.

  Here, the continuation period Tf3 of the preparation period is constant, and the continuation period Tf3 is set as a time longer than the longest variable display time that can be selected in the effect for game play. As a result, even if the time-based effect start timing is reached in the situation where the game-time effect is being executed, regardless of the variation display time of the game-time effect and the time-related effect start timing, The effect for the game round in the middle of execution ends before the preparation period elapses. Therefore, it is possible to secure a period during which the background image for the preparation period is displayed before the special period starts.

  In this way, when the special period is started by securing the period during which the background image for the preparation period is displayed, the background image for the special period as shown in FIG. 73 (c) from the start timing. Can be displayed. As a result, the display of the background image for the special period can be easily started simultaneously on the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

  Next, a data configuration for executing the time corresponding effect will be described.

  As shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 76A, a data table 231 for time corresponding effects is stored in the sound light ROM 63 in advance. The data table 231 for time corresponding effects is a table that is referred to in order to perform execution control of the time corresponding effects in the sound light side MPU 62. FIG. 76B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the data table 231 for time-related effects.

  Pointer information corresponding to the update timing of the image for one frame is set in the data table 231 for time corresponding effects, and various timing information, light emission data, and sound output data are associated with each pointer information. A combination is set. By referring to various timing information corresponding to the pointer information to be referred to, the preparation period start timing, the special period image data group 233 transfer timing, the preparation period end timing, and the special period start timing The sound light side MPU 62 can specify the return timing of the image data group for normal production and the end timing of the execution period secured as the special period. Further, by executing the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 using the light emission data (PD (0), PD (1)...) Corresponding to the pointer information that is the reference target, The light emission mode can be set to a time-corresponding mode, and the sound output data (SD (0), SD (1)...) Corresponding to the pointer information to be referred to is used for the speaker unit 45. By executing the sound output control, the sound output mode from the speaker unit 45 can be changed to a time-corresponding mode.

  77, the memory module 203 of the display control apparatus 200 includes a preparation period image data group 232, a special period image data group 233, a remaining time correspondence table 234, and a preparation period table 235. The special notification correspondence table 236 and the special period table 237 are stored in advance. In the image data group 232 for the preparation period, image data for displaying the backmost image for the preparation period, image data for displaying the background individual images G62a to G62d for the preparation period, and the remaining time notification Image data for displaying the image G63 is included. The image data group 233 for the special period includes image data for displaying the backmost image for the special period, image data for displaying the individual images for background G64a to G64g for the special period, and the special notification image. Image data for displaying G65 is included.

  The remaining time correspondence table 234 is data for controlling the display of the remaining time notification image G63 in the preparation period regardless of whether it is a delay period, and stores each pointer information corresponding to the image update timing for one frame. Correspondingly, parameter information to be applied to image data for displaying the remaining time notification image G63 is set. The preparation period table 235 is data for controlling display of a background image for a preparation period in a preparation period that is not a delay period, and is prepared in correspondence with each pointer information corresponding to the update timing of an image for one frame. Parameter information to be applied to image data for displaying a period background image is set. By providing the remaining time correspondence table 234 and the preparation period table 235 separately, display control for the preparation period is performed in the delay period in which the background image for the preparation period is not displayed even in the preparation period. By referring only to the remaining time correspondence table 234, it is possible to display the remaining time notification image G63 in a situation where the background image for the preparation period is not displayed. On the other hand, in the period other than the delay period during the preparation period, the remaining time notification is performed in the situation where the background image for the preparation period is displayed by referring to both the remaining time correspondence table 234 and the preparation period table 235. The image G63 can be displayed.

  The special notification correspondence table 236 is data for controlling the display of the special notification image G65 in the special period regardless of whether it is in the opening / closing execution mode, and stores each pointer information corresponding to the image update timing for one frame. Correspondingly, parameter information to be applied to image data for displaying the special notification image G65 is set. The special period table 237 is data for controlling the display of the background image for the special period in the special period that is not the opening / closing execution mode, and is associated with each pointer information corresponding to the update timing of the image for one frame. Parameter information to be applied to image data for displaying a background image for a special period is set. Since the special notification correspondence table 236 and the special period table 237 are provided separately, display control for the special period is performed in a period in which the background image for the special period is not displayed even in the special period. By referring only to the special notification correspondence table 236, the special notification image G65 can be displayed in a situation where the background image for the special period is not displayed. On the other hand, in the situation where the special period is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the special notice is displayed in the situation where the background image for the special period is displayed by referring to both the special notice correspondence table 236 and the special period table 237. The image G65 can be displayed.

  As already explained, the special period ends when the execution period secured as the special period has elapsed, but when the effect for game times is being executed or the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is executed If the execution period guaranteed as a special period has elapsed, the effect for the game round in the middle of execution or the effect for the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the effect for the game round starts newly The process ends when the demonstration display is started or when the demonstration display is newly started. Then, when the special period ends, the normal performance is restored. Correspondingly, the special period table 237 is set so as to correspond to a period longer than the longest period in which the special period can continue. As a result, even if the end timing of the special period occurs irregularly, it is possible to continue the special period until the end timing occurs.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the time corresponding effect will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the RTC handling process executed by the sound light side MPU 62. The RTC handling process is executed in the table setting process in step S301 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9).

  If it is the start timing of the preparation period (step S2701: YES), a setting process for starting the preparation period is executed (step S2702). In the setting process for starting the preparation period, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 79, the data table 231 for time corresponding effects is first read from the sound side ROM 63 to the sound side RAM 64 (step S2801). Thereafter, a preparation period data read instruction command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S2802).

  FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing command handling processing executed by the display CPU 201. The command handling process is executed in step S2405 of the V interrupt process (FIG. 67). When the display CPU 201 receives the preparation period data read instruction command (step S2901: YES), the display CPU 201 transfers data other than texture data in the preparation period image data group 232 from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204. Transfer (step S2902). Note that the texture data in the image data group 232 for the preparation period is transferred from the memory module 203 to the texture area 211 a provided in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 201 is started. By executing the processing in step S2902, all of the image data group 232 for the preparation period is stored in the VRAM 204 at the start of the preparation period regardless of whether the delay period is started when the preparation period is started. The data is read into the development buffer 211. This makes it possible to smoothly update the background image for the preparation period and the remaining time notification image G63 during the preparation period.

  Returning to the description of the setting process for starting the preparation period (FIG. 79), after executing the process of step S2802, it is determined whether or not the current state is a delay target state (step S2803). A situation in which an effect for game times is executed or a situation in which an effect for an opening / closing execution mode is executed corresponds to a delay target situation. If it is a delay target situation (step S2803: YES), “1” is set to the in-delay flag provided in the sound side RAM 64 (step S2804). The in-delay flag is a flag for the sound light side MPU 62 to specify that it is a delay period. Thereafter, a delay command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S2805).

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when receiving a delay command (step S2903: YES), the display CPU 201 transfers the remaining time correspondence table 234 from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S2904). Thereby, the display of the remaining time notification image G63 is started on the symbol display device 41.

  Returning to the description of the setting process for starting the preparation period (FIG. 79), if the current state is not the delay target state (step S2803: NO), “1” is set to the preparation display flag provided in the sound side RAM 64. (Step S2806). The preparation display flag is a flag for the sound light side MPU 62 to specify that the background image for the preparation period is being displayed. Thereafter, a preparation display start command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S2807).

  As illustrated in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives a preparation display start command (step S2905: YES), the display CPU 201 executes a read process for the preparation period (step S2906). In the read processing for the preparation period, if the remaining time correspondence table 234 is already read to the work RAM 202, the preparation time table 235 is read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202, so that the work RAM 202 is supported. It is assumed that both the table 234 and the preparation period table 235 have been read. In the read process for the preparation period, if the remaining time correspondence table 234 is not read to the work RAM 202, both the remaining time correspondence table 234 and the preparation period table 235 are read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202. . By reading both the remaining time correspondence table 234 and the preparation period table 235 into the work RAM 202, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed in a situation where the background image for the preparation period is displayed.

  Returning to the description of the RTC handling process (FIG. 78), if it is during the preparation period (step S2703: YES), the setting process during the preparation period is executed (step S2704). In the setting process during the preparation period, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 81, neither the end timing of the preparation period nor the data transfer timing (step S3001 and step S3002: NO), and the delay flag of the sound side RAM 64 is set. If “1” is set (step S3003: YES), it is determined whether or not it is a delay cancellation timing (step S3004). If a delay period occurs due to the start timing of a time-based effect in a situation where an effect for game times is being executed, the effect for the game times ends and a new effect for game times Is started, or when the demonstration display is started, it is determined that it is the delay release timing. In addition, when the delay period occurs due to the start timing of the time-based effect in the situation where the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is being executed, the effect for the opening / closing execution mode ends and a new game It is determined that it is the delay release timing when the presentation effect is started or when the demonstration display is started.

  If it is the delay release timing (step S3004: YES), the delay flag in the sound light side RAM 64 is cleared to “0” (step S3005), and “1” is set to the preparation display flag in the sound light side RAM 64 ( Step S3006). Thereafter, a preparation display start command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3007). The processing contents of the display CPU 201 when the preparation display start command is received are as described above.

  In the setting process during the preparation period, when it is determined that it is the data transfer timing based on the data table 231 for time corresponding effects (step S3002: YES), a special period data read instruction command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 ( Step S3008). As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives a special period data read instruction command (step S2907: YES), the display CPU 201 stores data other than texture data in the special period image data group 233 as a memory module. The data is transferred from 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 (step S2908). Note that the texture data in the image data group 233 for the special period is transferred from the memory module 203 to the texture area 211 a provided in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 201 is started. By executing the processing in step S2908, all of the image data group 233 for the special period is read into the development buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 until the special period is started. This makes it possible to start displaying the background image for the special period and the special notification image G65 early at the start of the special period, and updating the background image for the special period and the special notification image G65 in the special period. It becomes possible to carry out smoothly.

  Returning to the description of the setting process (FIG. 81) during the preparation period, if it is determined that the preparation period is ended based on the time-corresponding effect data table 231 (step S3001: YES), the sound side RAM 64 is being delayed. The flag and the preparation display flag are cleared to “0” (step S3009), and “1” is set to the special period flag provided in the sound side RAM 64 (step S3010). The special period flag is a flag for the sound light side MPU 62 to specify that it is a special period. Thereafter, a special period start command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3011).

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives the special period start command (step S2909: YES), the display CPU 201 transfers the special notification correspondence table 236 and the special period table 237 from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S2909). S2910). By reading the special notification correspondence table 236 to the work RAM 202, the display of the special notification image G65 is started on the symbol display device 41 regardless of whether the mode is the opening / closing execution mode. If the situation is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the display of the special effect background image is started on the symbol display device 41.

  Returning to the description of the RTC handling process (FIG. 78), if it is during the special period (step S2705: YES), the setting process during the special period is executed (step S2706). In the setting process during the special period, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 82, if it is not the end timing of the special period (step S3101: NO), whether or not it is the data return timing based on the data table 231 for the time corresponding effect. Is determined (step S3102). When it is determined that it is the data recovery timing (step S3102: YES), a normal period data read instruction command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3103).

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives a normal period data read instruction command (step S2911: YES), the display CPU 201 displays a normal effect background image in a situation where the time-corresponding effect is not executed. Data other than texture data in the image data group to be transferred is transferred from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 (step S2912).

  Returning to the description of the setting process during the special period (FIG. 82), when it is determined that it is the end timing of the execution period secured as the special period based on the data table 231 for time corresponding effects (step S <b> 3101: YES), The process proceeds to step S3104. In step S3104, it is determined whether or not it is possible to return from the time-related effect to the normal effect. The returnable status is the end timing of the execution period when the demonstration display is performed at the end timing of the execution period guaranteed as the special period, and the end timing of the execution period guaranteed as the special period When a game-game effect or an opening / closing execution mode effect is being executed, the game-game effect or opening-and-closing execution mode effect in the middle of execution is finished and a game-game effect is newly started. Or a timing at which demonstration display is started.

  If it is possible to recover (step S3104: YES), the light emission control and sound output control for the special period are terminated (step S3105). Thereby, the light emission control of the display light emitting unit 44 in the state for the normal effect in the situation where the time corresponding effect is not executed, and the speaker unit 45 in the aspect for the normal effect in the situation where the time corresponding effect is not executed. Sound output control is resumed. Thereafter, the special period flag in the RAM 64 is cleared to “0” (step S3106), and a special period end command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3107).

  As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, when the display CPU 201 receives a special period end command (step S2913: YES), the table for displaying a background image for a normal effect in a situation where a time-related effect is not executed. Are transferred from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S2914). Thereby, the display of the background image for the special period is ended in the symbol display device 41, and the display of the background image for the normal effect is resumed. In the command handling process, when another command is received, a process corresponding to the command is executed (step S2915).

  Next, the table setting process in the present embodiment executed by the sound light side MPU 62 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 83. The table setting process is performed in step S301 in the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9). Executed.

  When the variation command and the type command are received from the main MPU 52 (step S3201: YES), a game result storing process is executed (step S3202). Specifically, from the information included in the type command, specify which of the jackpot occurrence lottery and distribution lottery results determined by the main MPU 52 at the start of the current game round, and the identification The written information is written in the sound light side RAM 64.

  Thereafter, when the variable display time corresponding to the change command received this time from the main MPU 52 is the variable display time corresponding to the occurrence of the reach effect (step S3203: YES), the lottery process for determining the type of reach effect The selection process of the lottery table used in is executed. Specifically, regarding the selection process of the lottery table, when “1” is set in the preparation display flag of the sound side RAM 64 (step S3204: YES), the lottery table for the preparation period is stored in the sound side ROM 63. To the sound light side RAM 64 (step S3205). If the special period flag of the sound side RAM 64 is set to “1” (step S3206: YES), the special period lottery table is read from the light side ROM 63 to the sound side RAM 64 (step S3207). . If “1” is not set in either the preparation display flag or the special period flag (step S3206: NO), the normal period lottery table is read from the sound side ROM 63 to the sound side RAM 64. Then, the reach effect lottery process is executed using the lottery table selected as the current use target among the lottery table for the preparation period, the lottery table for the special period, and the lottery table for the normal period (step S3209). In the reach production lottery process, the current value of the reach lottery counter is acquired, and the acquired value is checked against the lottery table selected as the current use target. Then, the reach lottery result corresponding to the value acquired from the reach lottery counter is acquired as the result of the current reach production lottery process.

  Here, a plurality of types of reach effects are set, and each reach effect has a different processing load on the VDP 205 for displaying a reach effect image on the symbol display device 41. The difference in processing load occurs according to the type of image data and the size of the image data used for displaying the reach effect image. The reach effect includes a large load effect with the largest processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the reach effect image, and a medium load effect with a processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the reach effect image smaller than the large load effect. In addition, a small load effect is included in which the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the reach effect image is smaller than the medium load effect. In this case, the normal period lottery table includes all of the large load effect, the medium load effect, and the small load effect as the types of reach effects to be selected. On the other hand, the lottery table for the preparation period does not include the large load effect and the medium load effect as the types of reach effects to be selected, and includes the small load effect. In addition, the special period lottery table does not include a large load effect and includes a medium load effect and a small load effect as the types of reach effects to be selected.

  Since the background image for the special period is displayed in the special period as described above, the processing load of the VDP 205 for displaying the image on the symbol display device 41 is larger than that in the preparation period and the normal period. On the other hand, during the special period, the heavy load effect is not selected as the reach effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a large load effect is displayed while displaying a background image for the special period in the special period, and the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large. It can be prevented from occurring.

  When starting the special period, it is necessary to perform initial setting to the world coordinate system for all image data necessary to display the background image for the special period. The processing load increases. On the other hand, in the preparation period that occurs before the special period, the large load effect and the medium load effect are not selected as the reach effect. As a result, even if the transition to the special period occurs in the situation where the effect for the game round started in the preparation period is being executed, the transition to the special period is in the middle of the execution of the heavy load effect and the medium load effect. It is possible to prevent this from occurring. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large.

  As already described, the execution period of the preparation period is set as a time longer than the longest variable display time that can be selected as an effect for game times. As a result, even if a large load effect or a medium load effect can be executed as a reach effect in an effect for game times started in the normal period, the reach effect ends by the end timing of the preparation period. And as already demonstrated, in the effect for game times started in the preparation period, a heavy load effect and a medium load effect are not selected. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transition to the special period from occurring in a situation where a heavy load effect or a medium load effect is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large.

  It should be noted that the special period lottery table includes a reach effect in which a special-corresponding image is displayed as a reach effect that can be selected in a game round that results in a jackpot. The normal period lottery table and the preparation period lottery table include The reach effect in which the special corresponding image is displayed is not included. This makes it possible to set an effect that occurs only during the special period.

  If a negative determination is made in step S3203, or if the process of step S3209 is executed, a stop symbol determination process is executed (step S3210). The contents of the stop symbol determination process are the same as step S407 in the table setting process (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment.

  Thereafter, control pattern table setting processing is executed (step S3211). In the setting process of the control pattern table, it corresponds to the combination of the presence / absence of reach effect and the result of reach effect lottery process (step S3209) and the result of stop symbol determination process (step S3210) when reach effect occurs. The control pattern table is read from the sound light side ROM 63 and stored in the sound light side RAM 64.

  After that, the variable display time determination process is executed (step S3212). In this processing, information on the variable display time of the current game time is specified from the contents of the variable command received this time from the main MPU 52, and the information on the specified variable display time is provided in the sound light side RAM 64. Set the variable time counter. The variation time counter is a counter for specifying at the sound light side MPU 62 the timing at which the symbol variation display on the symbol display device 41 is ended and the symbol fixed display is started in the current game round. The value set in the variation time counter is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 9) is started in the sound light side MPU 62, that is, every 4 msec.

  Thereafter, a variation pattern command including information corresponding to the control pattern table selected in step S3211 is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3213). Thereby, the display CPU 201 starts an effect for game times on the symbol display device 41 and advances the effect for game times in a manner according to the effect contents determined by the sound light side MPU 62. In this case, if it is determined that a reach effect will occur in the current game round, the reach effect selected in step S3209 is executed on the symbol display device 41. In the table setting process, in addition to the above processes, other processes are executed in step S3214. The contents of the other processes are the same as step S415 of the table setting process (FIG. 10) in the first embodiment.

  As described above, when the time information of the RTC 65 is the time corresponding to the start timing of the time corresponding effect, the time corresponding effect is started. As a result, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect when the predetermined time is reached. In addition, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed in the game hall, it is possible to simultaneously start a time corresponding effect on the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

  In this case, when the time corresponding effect is started, the preparation period occurs first, and when the preparation period elapses, the display content of the image on the symbol display device 41 becomes more flashy than the preparation period. A period occurs. This makes it possible for the player to recognize that a special period will occur in the future, and to increase the sense of expectation that a special period will occur. In addition, the remaining time notification image G63 is displayed on the symbol display device 41 during the preparation period, and the remaining time until the special period is started is displayed by a subtraction formula in the remaining time notification image G63. This makes it possible for the player to clearly recognize that the start of the special period is approaching.

  When the timing for starting the time-based effect is reached in the situation where the effect for the game times is being executed, the background image, the effect image, and the pattern image are maintained while the display mode of the effect for the game times so far is continued. The remaining time notification image G63 is displayed so as to be superimposed on a part of the background image displayed as a recreation effect. Thereby, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is during the execution period of the time corresponding effect while maintaining the display of the image according to the content already determined as the effect for the game times.

  In particular, when the display of the background image for the preparation period is started in a situation where super reach is performed in which the reach character image is displayed as an effect for game play, the image is displayed on the symbol display device 41. There is a risk that the number of types of image data used in the process will become extremely large and the processing load will become extremely large. On the other hand, when the start timing of the time-related effect is reached in the situation where the effect for game times is being executed, it is already determined as the effect for game times only by adding the remaining time notification image G63. The display of the image according to the contents is maintained. Thereby, it becomes possible to prevent the processing load from becoming extremely large as described above.

  The duration of the preparation period is constant, and the duration is set as a time longer than the longest variable display time that can be selected in the effect for game times. As a result, even if the time-based effect start timing is reached in the situation where the game-time effect is being executed, regardless of the variation display time of the game-time effect and the time-related effect start timing, The effect for the game round in the middle of execution ends before the preparation period elapses. Therefore, it is possible to secure a period during which the background image for the preparation period is displayed before the special period starts.

  In this way, when the special period is started by securing the period during which the background image for the preparation period is displayed, the display of the background image for the special period can be started from the start timing. Become. As a result, the display of the background image for the special period can be easily started simultaneously on the plurality of pachinko machines 10.

  Since the background image for the special period is displayed in the special period, the processing load on the VDP 205 for displaying the image on the symbol display device 41 is larger than that in the preparation period and the normal period. On the other hand, during the special period, the heavy load effect is not selected as the reach effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a large load effect is displayed while displaying a background image for the special period in the special period, and the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large. It can be prevented from occurring.

  When starting the special period, it is necessary to perform initial setting to the world coordinate system for all image data necessary to display the background image for the special period. The processing load increases. On the other hand, in the preparation period that occurs before the special period, the large load effect and the medium load effect are not selected as the reach effect. As a result, even if the transition to the special period occurs in the situation where the effect for the game round started in the preparation period is being executed, the transition to the special period is in the middle of the execution of the heavy load effect and the medium load effect. It is possible to prevent this from occurring. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large.

  The execution period of the preparation period is set as a time longer than the longest variable display time that can be selected as an effect for game times. As a result, even if a large load effect or a medium load effect can be executed as a reach effect in an effect for game times started in the normal period, the reach effect ends by the end timing of the preparation period. Then, the large load effect and the medium load effect are not selected in the effects for the game times started in the preparation period. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transition to the special period from occurring in a situation where a heavy load effect or a medium load effect is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes extremely large.

  Whether or not the light emission in the time corresponding mode in the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output in the time corresponding mode in the speaker unit 45 is in the middle of the execution of the effect for game times when the start timing of the time corresponding effect is reached. Starts regardless. As a result, in the situation where the effect for the game times is being executed, when the start timing of the time-related effect is reached, the background image for the preparation period in the symbol display device 41 is ended until the effect for the game times is finished. Even if the contents of the background images in the plurality of pachinko machines 10 are not aligned due to the delay of the display, the light emission content of the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output content from the speaker unit 45 are the plurality of pachinko machines. The machine 10 can be started simultaneously. Therefore, it is possible to give the player the impression that the time-corresponding effects have been started at the same time with a plurality of pachinko machines 10.

<Another form related to time-related effects>
In the preparation period, in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the background image for the preparation period is displayed on the symbol display device 41, the display mode of the symbols variably displayed in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is the display for the preparation period. It is good also as a structure which becomes a mode, and it is good also as a structure by which a predetermined character image is displayed by the display mode corresponding to a preparation period. In addition, in addition to or instead of the configuration in which the background image for the special period is displayed on the symbol display device 41 in the special period, the display mode of the symbols variably displayed in the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is for the special period. The display mode may be configured, or a predetermined character image may be displayed in a display mode corresponding to the special period.

  -When the execution period guaranteed as a special period has elapsed in the situation where the demonstration display is being performed on the symbol display device 41, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 sec) has elapsed from the timing at which the execution period has elapsed Alternatively, the special period may end and the normal performance may be restored. In this case, the normal effect image data group can be returned to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 using the predetermined time, and the normal effect image data group is set for the world coordinate system. It is possible to make an initial setting for this.

  -When the execution period guaranteed as a special period has elapsed in the situation where the effect for game times is being executed, even if the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is executed following the effect for the game times The special period may be ended when the effect for game play is ended. This makes it possible to prevent the special period from continuing for an extremely long time.

  -It is not limited to the structure which uses RTC65 in order to specify the start timing of a time corresponding | compatible effect, For example, since the time corresponding | compatible effect was started last time using the timer counter provided in sound-light side RAM64 It is good also as a structure which measures the elapsed time and specifies that the sound light side MPU 62 is the start timing of the time corresponding effect when the measured elapsed time becomes the time corresponding to the generation period of the time corresponding effect. .

  Not all of the texture data is read out from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 at the start of the supply of operating power to the display CPU 201. It is good also as a structure read out each time. In this case, in step S2902 in the command handling process (FIG. 80), all of the image data group 232 for the preparation period is read out, all of the image data group 233 for the special period is read out in step S2908, and in step S2912 All of the image data group for displaying the background image for normal presentation is read out.

  In the preparation period, as shown in the explanatory diagram of FIG. 84, the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 are displayed in the partition display region G66 set as a part of the symbol display device 41, and the regions other than the partition display region G66 The background image for the preparation period may be displayed. As a result, it is possible to display the preparation period with emphasis.

  -In the preparation period, the new start of the effect for game times is restricted, and the restricted state may be canceled when the special period is started. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the special period from being started in the middle of the performance for the game times being executed.

  ・ When the start timing of the time-related effect is reached, if neither the effect for the game times nor the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is executed, the special period starts without going through the preparation period, and the time response If an effect for game times or an effect for opening / closing execution mode is executed at the start timing of the effect, a preparation period is in effect while the effect is being executed, It is good also as a structure where a special period is started when it complete | finishes.

  At least one of the light emission control period corresponding to the time in the display light emitting unit 44 and the sound output control period corresponding to the time in the speaker unit 45 is after a predetermined second has elapsed with respect to the start timing of the time corresponding effect in the symbol display device 41. The configuration may be started. In this case, it is preferable that the control period to be started after a predetermined second has elapsed before the special period is started in the symbol display device 41.

<Further another form related to time-related effects>
-In this embodiment, when the start timing of the time-based effect is reached in the situation where the effect for the game times or the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is being executed, the effect for the game times or the opening / closing execution mode being executed Until the production effect is completed, the image for the preparation period including the remaining time notification image G63 is not displayed at all. Hereinafter, a processing configuration for causing the action will be described. The description of the same configuration as that of the above embodiment is basically omitted.

  FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing a setting process for starting a preparation period in this embodiment.

  First, the data table 231 for time corresponding effects is read from the ROM 63 to the RAM 64 (step S3301). Thereafter, a preparation period data read instruction command is transmitted to the display CPU 201 (step S3302). As a result, as in the above embodiment, the display CPU 201 causes the data other than the texture data in the image data group 232 for the preparation period to be transferred from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204. Note that the texture data in the image data group 232 for the preparation period is transferred from the memory module 203 to the texture area 211 a provided in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 201 is started.

  After executing the process of step S3302, it is determined whether or not the current state is a delay target state (step S3303). A situation in which an effect for game times is executed or a situation in which an effect for an opening / closing execution mode is executed corresponds to a delay target situation. If it is a delay target situation (step S3303: YES), “1” is set to the in-delay flag provided in the sound side RAM 64 (step S3304).

  When the current state is not the delay target state (step S3303: NO), “1” is set to the preparation display flag provided in the sound side RAM 64 (step S3305). Thereafter, the duration for displaying the background image for the preparation period and the remaining time notification image G63 as the preparation display is calculated (step S3306). Since this time is the case where the preparation period is started at the start timing of the time-related effect, the continuation period of the preparation display is the time from the start timing of the time-related effect to the start timing of the special period. Then, the information corresponding to the preparation display duration calculated in step S3306 is set in the preparation display start command read from the sound-side ROM 63 (step S3307), and the preparation display start command is displayed on the display CPU 201. Transmit (step S3308).

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing command response processing according to this embodiment. When the display CPU 201 receives the preparation display start command (step S3401: YES), the display CPU 201 grasps the remaining period of the preparation period from the preparation display start command (step S3402). When the count value is subtracted in the remaining time notification image G63 from the fixed start value (for example, “60”) to the fixed end value (for example, “0”) within the remaining period of the preparation period. An update cycle of the count value is set (step S3403). Specifically, the display of the count value is started from a fixed start value, and the count value update period and the subtraction value of the count value (specifically “1”) in one update period are kept constant, A count value update cycle necessary to make the count value a fixed end value in the remaining period of the preparation period is calculated. Then, the preparation period table corresponding to the calculation result is read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S3404). Thus, the count value in the remaining time notification image G63 is updated according to the update cycle calculated in step S3403. In the command handling process, processes other than the above process are also executed.

  FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the setting process during the preparation period in this embodiment.

  If neither the end timing of the preparation period nor the data transfer timing (step S3501 and step S3502: NO) and “1” is set in the delay flag of the sound side RAM 64 (step S3503: YES), the delay It is determined whether or not it is a release timing (step S3504). If a delay period occurs due to the start timing of a time-based effect in a situation where an effect for game times is being executed, the effect for the game times ends and a new effect for game times Is started, or when the demonstration display is started, it is determined that it is the delay release timing. In addition, when the delay period occurs due to the start timing of the time-based effect in the situation where the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is being executed, the effect for the opening / closing execution mode ends and a new game It is determined that it is the delay release timing when the presentation effect is started or when the demonstration display is started.

  If it is the delay release timing (step S3504: YES), the delay flag in the RAM 64 is cleared to “0” (step S3505), and “1” is set to the preparation display flag in the RAM 64 (step S3506). Thereafter, the duration for displaying the background image for the preparation period and the remaining time notification image G63 as the preparation display is calculated (step S3507). Since this time is a case where the preparation period is started at a timing later than the start timing of the time corresponding effect, the remaining period until the start timing of the special period becomes the preparation display continuation period. Then, the information corresponding to the duration for the preparation display calculated in step S3507 is set in the preparation display start command read from the sound side ROM 63 (step S3508), and the preparation display start command is displayed on the display CPU 201. Transmit (step S3509). As a result, the processing in steps S3402 to S3404 already described in the command corresponding processing (FIG. 86) in the display CPU 201 is executed, so that the remaining time notification image G63 is counted in the remaining period of the preparation period as already described. Subtraction is displayed until the value reaches a fixed end value from a fixed start value.

  The processing contents of steps S3510 to S3513 are the same as the processing contents of steps S3008 to S3011 in the setting process (FIG. 81) during the preparation period in the above embodiment.

  As described above, in the situation where the effect for the game times or the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is being executed, when the start timing of the time-based effect is reached, the effect for the game times during the execution or for the opening / closing execution mode Display of the image for the preparation period, including the remaining time notification image G63, is not started until the effect is finished. As a result, for example, in a situation where the expectation that a jackpot result will be obtained due to the execution of a predetermined reach effect, the display of the image for the preparation period is suddenly started, and the predetermined reach effect is displayed. It is possible to prevent an event that the player's attention level is reduced.

  Further, in the configuration in which the display of the image for the preparation period including the remaining time notification image G63 is not started until the effect for the game time being executed or the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is finished in this way, When the display for the preparation period is started after the effect for the game times or the opening / closing execution mode is ended, the count value in the remaining time notification image G63 is related to the remaining duration of the preparation period. An update cycle is set. Thereby, even when the display of the image for the preparation period is started at a timing later than the start timing of the time corresponding effect, the display of the count value in the remaining time notification image G63 is fixed from the fixed start value. This can be done until the end value is reached.

<Configuration for performing another storage effect>
Next, the structure for performing another preservation | save effect is demonstrated.

  With another saved effect, drawing data created by projecting three-dimensional image data arranged in the world coordinate system onto a virtual two-dimensional plane is saved as separately saved data, and then the separately saved data is stored. By setting to the plate-like object data, it is arranged in the world coordinate system and drawing data is created by projecting the other saved data along with other image data arranged in the world coordinate system onto the virtual two-dimensional plane. This is an effect of displaying an image. In addition, during the period in which images are displayed using drawing data created based on the arrangement of the separately stored data in the world coordinate system, the object to be projected onto the virtual two-dimensional plane is generated when the separately stored data is created. Mask control is performed on the three-dimensional image data that has been excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane. The image data that is excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane in the mask control may not be arranged in the world coordinate system, and the arrangement position and shape of the elements arranged in the world coordinate system are updated. Further, the configuration may be further excluded from the projection target. In this way, by creating drawing data using separately stored data and executing mask control, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the VDP 205 even when the types of images to be displayed increase. It becomes.

  FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the specific contents of another storage effect. FIGS. 88 (a1) and 88 (b1) show a state in which three-dimensional image data is arranged in the world coordinate system. 88 (a2) and 88 (b2) show the contents of an image displayed using drawing data created by projecting onto a virtual two-dimensional plane.

  In a situation where the separate saving effect is not executed, as shown in FIG. 88 (a1), when the viewpoint PC11 is used as a reference, the rearmost image data 241 is arranged at the farthest position, and the first image data 241 is placed in front of it. Image data 242 for one background individual image and image data 243 for second background individual image are arranged, and image data 244 for effect character is arranged on the front side. The backmost image data 241 is image data in which texture data for the backmost surface is pasted on plate-like object data (ie, plate polygon). The plate-like object data is object data with no thickness, and the data capacity is small and the processing load at the time of geometry calculation and rendering in the VDP 205 is smaller than that of thick three-dimensional object data.

  As shown in FIG. 88 (a2), projection data is created by projecting onto a virtual two-dimensional plane in a state where the three-dimensional image data 241 to 244 are arranged as shown in FIG. 88 (a1). Such an image for one frame can be displayed on the symbol display device 41. In the image for one frame, the first background individual image G72 and the second background individual image G73 are displayed in front of the backmost image G71, and the effect character image G74 is further displayed in front of it. Then, between the update timings of the plurality of images, the arrangement position and shape of the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, and the image data 244 for the effect character in the world coordinate system, etc. It is possible to change the display positions and shapes of the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74 in the image for one frame.

  In the state where the three-dimensional image data 241 to 244 are arranged as shown in FIG. 88 (a1), the backmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data for the second background individual image By executing the projection processing on the virtual two-dimensional plane so that the image data 244 for the effect character is not the projection target while the projection character 243 is the projection target, the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and It becomes possible to create two-dimensional drawing data that enables the display of the still image of the second background individual image G73 as the first saved data. By pasting the first separately stored data on the plate-shaped polygon data, the first separately stored data is arranged in the world coordinate system as the first separately stored image data 245, and the effect character image data 244 and the additional individual image image are placed in front of it. By arranging the data 246, the state shown in FIG. 88 (b1) is obtained. In this state, the first separate stored image data 245, the effect character image data 244, and the additional individual image image data 246 are projected onto a virtual two-dimensional plane to generate drawing data. Thus, an image for one frame as shown in FIG. 88 (b2) can be displayed on the symbol display device 41. In the image for one frame, the first background individual image G72 and the second background individual image G73 are displayed in front of the backmost image G71, and the effect character image G74 and the additional individual image G75 are further displayed in front of it. Is displayed.

  However, since the image data for displaying the first background individual image G72 and the second background individual image G73 is arranged in the world coordinate system as a still image using the first separate saved image data 245, a plurality of images are displayed. The arrangement positions and shapes of the first background individual image G72 and the second background individual image G73 cannot be individually changed between update timings. On the other hand, the image data for displaying the effect character image G74 and the additional individual image G75 are individually arranged in the world coordinate system as the image data 244 for the effect character and the image data 246 for the additional individual image. It is possible to individually change the arrangement positions and shapes of the effect character image G74 and the additional individual image G75 between the update timings of the images.

  In the case where drawing data is created using the first separately stored image data 245 as described above, the first separately stored image data 245 is the rearmost surface when the first separately stored data is created in the world coordinate system. The image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are arranged on the near side. Then, the space MS1 on the back side of the first separate saved image data 245 is excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane by mask control. Thus, when drawing data is created using the first separate saved image data 245, a virtual two-dimensional image is displayed to display the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73. The number of image data to be projected onto the plane is reduced, and the processing load on the VDP 205 for displaying these images G71 to G73 is reduced. Therefore, even if the additional individual image G75 is newly added as a display target, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load of the VDP 205.

  By executing the mask control, the backmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane. Even in the situation, parameter information such as coordinate information and scale information about the image data 241 to 243 is stored and held in the work RAM 202. Thereby, when returning to the period during which the image is displayed by projecting the image data 241 to 243 onto the virtual two-dimensional plane, an area for updating the parameter information of the image data 241 to 243 is secured in the work RAM 202. There is no need to execute a process for this. In order to newly set the parameter information of the image data as an update target, initial processing such as search processing of the storage area of the work RAM 202 for storing and holding the parameter information and clear processing of the storage area searched by the search processing, etc. The setting process needs to be executed, and the processing load of the initial setting process is larger than the processing load for updating the parameter information. Under such circumstances, the parameter information of the image data 241 to 243 that is the target of mask control is stored and held in the work RAM 202, so that the processing load on the display CPU 201 when the mask control is released is extremely large. It becomes possible to prevent becoming.

  Further, even when the display CPU 201 executes the mask control and the image data 241 to 243 are excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane, the image data for the first background individual image is displayed. The update process of the parameter information for the image data 243 for 242 and the second background individual image is continued. As a result, immediately after the period when the display of the image using the first separate saved image data 245 is completed, the first background individual image G72 and the second background individual image G73 are displayed from the state immediately before the start of the period. The first background individual image from the state in which the movement is not resumed but the movement state is continued for the duration of the period according to the display pattern until the display state just before the start of the period. It becomes possible to resume the movement of G72 and the second background individual image G73.

  Further, by executing the mask control, the backmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane. Even in such a situation, the VRAM 204 retains a buffer area in which information that is referred to in order to place the image data 241 to 243 in the world coordinate system is stored. As a result, when returning to a period during which an image is displayed by projecting these image data 241 to 243 onto a virtual two-dimensional plane, information referred to for arranging these image data 241 to 243 in the world coordinate system is displayed. There is no need to execute processing for securing the buffer area to be stored in the VRAM 204. In order to secure the buffer area, it is necessary to execute an initial setting process such as a search process of the storage area of the VRAM 204 and a clear process of the storage area searched by the search process. By holding the buffer areas of the image data 241 to 243 as they are in the VRAM 204, it becomes possible to prevent the processing load of the VDP 205 from becoming extremely large when the mask control is released.

  Here, in the situation where the mask control is being performed, if it is necessary to create other stored data using image data that has been excluded from the projection target by the mask control, the image data is excluded from the projection target. Therefore, it is not possible to create separate storage data using the image data. A case where such an event occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 (a) to 89 (c). 89 (a1) to 89 (c1) show a state in which three-dimensional image data is arranged in the world coordinate system, and FIGS. 89 (a2) to 89 (c2) project onto a virtual two-dimensional plane. The contents of the image displayed by using the drawing data created in the above are shown.

  As shown in FIG. 89 (a1), the backmost image data 241 is arranged at the farthest position in the world coordinate system, and the image data 242 for the first background individual image and the second background individual image are in front of it. 89 is arranged, and the drawing data is created by projecting onto the virtual two-dimensional plane in a state where the image data 244 for the effect character is arranged on the near side, thereby creating drawing data. An image for one frame as shown in (a2) can be displayed on the symbol display device 41. In this case, the drawing data created in the arrangement state of the image data 241 to 244 as shown in FIG. 89 (a1) is stored as the second separate storage data.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 89 (b1), the second separate storage data is pasted on the plate-shaped polygon data to be arranged as the second separate storage image data 247 in the world coordinate system. The effect image data 248 for displaying the effect image G76 is arranged in front of the stored image data 247. Then, the second stored image data 247 and the effect image data 248 are projected onto a virtual two-dimensional plane to generate drawing data, thereby generating one frame as shown in FIG. 89 (b2). Can be displayed on the symbol display device 41. The effect image data 248 is data in which texture data for effect images is pasted on plate-shaped polygon data. The effect image data 248 is set to a transparent or translucent α value as a whole and is opaque. Since the α value is not set, the effect image data 248 is overwritten on the second separately stored image data 247 in a state where the transparency process or the semi-transparency process is performed.

  As described above, when drawing data is created using the second separate saved image data 247, the second separate saved image data 247 is the rearmost surface when the second separate saved data is created in the world coordinate system. The image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, and the image data 244 for the effect character are arranged on the near side. The space MS2 on the back side of the second separate saved image data 247 is excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane by mask control. Accordingly, when drawing data is created using the second separate saved image data 247, the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74 are displayed. Therefore, the number of image data to be projected onto the virtual two-dimensional plane is reduced, and the processing load on the VDP 205 for displaying these images G71 to G74 is reduced. Therefore, even if the effect image G76 is newly added as a display target, it is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load of the VDP 205.

  However, immediately after an image is displayed using the second separate saved image data 247, the first separate saved image data 245, the effect character image data 244 and the additional individual image as shown in FIG. 88 (b1) are displayed. When it is necessary to display an image using the image data 246 for the image, the backmost image data 241 and the first background are displayed during the period in which the image is displayed using the second separate saved image data 247. Since the mask control is performed on the image data 242 for the individual image and the image data 243 for the second background individual image, the first separate saved image data 245 cannot be created. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 88 (c1), the first separate saved image data 245 cannot be arranged on the back side of the effect character image data 244 and the additional individual image image data 246 in the world coordinate system. 88 (c2), the effect character image G74 and the additional individual image G75 are displayed in a state where the background image is not displayed. Further, for example, in the world coordinate system, not only the image data 244 for the effect character and the image data 246 for the additional individual image, but also the backmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the second background individual image If the image data 243 is arranged and all the image data 241 to 244 and 246 are projected onto the virtual two-dimensional plane to create drawing data, the processing load of the VDP 205 becomes large. As a case where such a situation occurs, the pachinko machine 10 generates an operation-compatible effect in which an image is displayed using the second separate stored image data 247 when the effect operation device 48 is operated. In such a configuration, there is a case where it is necessary to display an image using the first separate saved image data 245 immediately after the operation-corresponding effect is finished.

  On the other hand, in this pachinko machine 10, it is possible to display an image using the first separate stored image data 245 immediately after the image is displayed using the second separate stored image data 247. It has a configuration. Hereinafter, a state where another saving effect is performed will be described with reference to FIG. 90 is a time chart showing a state where another storage effect is performed. FIG. 90A shows a normal drawing period in which mask control is not executed, and FIG. 90B shows a mask control period in which mask control is executed. 90 (c) shows the timing at which at least one of the first separate storage data and the second separate storage data is executed. FIG. 90 (d) shows that the first separate storage data is provided in the VRAM 204. 90 (e) shows a period during which the second separate storage data is stored and held in the second separate storage buffer 252 provided in the VRAM 204, and FIG. 90 (f) shows the operation effective period of the effect operating device 48, FIG. 90 (g) shows the operation timing of the effect operating device 48, and FIG. 90 (h) shows the execution period of the operation corresponding effect.

  First, a case where an image is displayed using the first separate saved image data 245 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 90 (a), in the normal drawing period when mask control is not performed, the timing of execution of saving the first separate saved data is reached at the timing t1, as shown in FIG. 90 (c). In this case, as shown in FIGS. 88 (a) and 88 (b), the first separate storage data is created, and the first separate storage data is stored and held in the first separate storage buffer 251 of the VRAM 204. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 90 (d), the first separately stored image data 245 is stored and held in the first separately stored buffer 251 at the timing of t1.

  After that, at the timing of t2, it becomes a period for displaying an image using the first separate saved image data 245, so that the mask control period is performed as shown in FIGS. 90 (a) and 90 (b). . In this case, even during the period in which the mask control is performed, each of the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73 to be displayed in the first separate saved image data 245 corresponds. Various parameter information regarding the image data 241 to 243 to be performed is stored and held in the work RAM 202, and update processing of the various parameter information is continued in the display CPU 201.

  After that, at the timing of t3, the period for displaying the image using the first separate saved image data 245 is finished, so that the mask control is finished as shown in FIGS. 90 (a) and 90 (b), It returns to the normal drawing period when mask control is not performed. In this case, as described above, the CPU 201 displays various parameter information for the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73 even during the mask control period. Since the updating process in is continued, the display of these images G71 to G73 is started from a display mode corresponding to the timing when the mask control execution period has elapsed with respect to the timing when the mask control is started.

  Next, a case will be described in which an image is displayed using the first separate stored image data 245 immediately after the image display using the second separate stored image data 247 is performed. In the following description, FIGS. 91A to 91C are referred to as appropriate. 91 (a) to 91 (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a state in which an image is displayed using the first separately stored image data 245 and an image is displayed using the second separately stored image data 247. 91 (a1) to 91 (c1) show how three-dimensional image data is arranged in the world coordinate system, and FIGS. 91 (a2) to 91 (c2) are projected onto a virtual two-dimensional plane. The contents of the image displayed by using the drawing data created by doing so are shown.

  As shown in FIG. 90 (a), in the normal drawing period when mask control is not performed, the operation effective period of the effect operation device 48 is started at the timing t4 as shown in FIG. 90 (f). In this case, separate storage is executed at the timing t4 as shown in FIG. 90 (c). In this separate storage execution timing, both the first separate storage data and the second separate storage data are the targets of the separate storage execution.

  The manner in which both the first separate storage data and the second separate storage data are created will be described with reference to FIG. 91 (a). As shown in FIG. 91 (a1), the backmost image data 241 is arranged at the farthest position in the world coordinate system, and the image data 242 for the first background individual image and the second background individual image are in front of it. The image data 243 and the rendering character image data 244 are arranged on the front side, and projection is performed on the virtual two-dimensional plane to generate drawing data. An image for one frame as shown in (a2) can be displayed on the symbol display device 41. In this case, drawing data created by projecting all of the image data 241 to 244 shown in FIG. 91 (a1) onto the virtual two-dimensional plane is stored in the second separate storage buffer 252 as second separate storage data. The The second separate storage data is data that enables display of still images of the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74.

  Further, in the state where the three-dimensional image data 241 to 244 are arranged as shown in FIG. 91 (a1), the backmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the second background individual image are used. The projection processing on the virtual two-dimensional plane is executed while the image data 243 is the projection target and the effect character image data 244 is not the projection target, so that the backmost image G71 and the first background individual Two-dimensional drawing data that enables display of still images of the image G72 and the second background individual image G73 is created as the first saved data. Then, the first separate storage data is stored in the first separate storage buffer 251.

  Returning to the description with reference to FIG. 90, the first separate storage data and the second separate storage data are created at the timing of t4, whereby the first separate storage buffer 251 stores the first separate storage data 251 as shown in FIG. 90 (d). As shown in FIG. 90 (e), the second saved data is stored and held in the second saved buffer 252 as shown in FIG. 90 (e).

  Thereafter, at time t5, the operation operation device 48 is operated as shown in FIG. 90 (g), whereby an operation corresponding effect is started as shown in FIG. 90 (h). In this case, as shown in FIG. 91 (b1), the second separate storage data is pasted on the plate-shaped polygon data and arranged as the second separate storage image data 247 in the world coordinate system. The effect image data 248 for displaying the effect image G76 is arranged in front of the saved image data 247. Then, the second stored image data 247 and the effect image data 248 are projected onto a virtual two-dimensional plane to generate drawing data, thereby generating one frame as shown in FIG. 91 (b2). Can be displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  When the operation corresponding effect is started at the timing t5, the mask control is performed at the timing t5 as shown in FIG. 90 (a) and FIG. 90 (b). In this case, even in the period in which the mask control is performed, the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image to be displayed in the second separate saved image data 247 are displayed. Various parameter information regarding the image data 241 to 244 corresponding to each of G74 is stored and held in the work RAM 202, and the update processing of the various parameter information is continued in the display CPU 201.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t6, the operation corresponding effect ends as shown in FIG. 90 (h). In this case, display of an image using the first separate saved image data 245 is started at the timing t6. In this case, as shown in FIG. 91 (c1), the first separate storage data is pasted on the plate-shaped polygon data and arranged in the world coordinate system as the first separate storage image data 245. Image data 244 and additional individual image image data 246 are arranged. In this state, the first separate stored image data 245, the effect character image data 244, and the additional individual image image data 246 are projected onto a virtual two-dimensional plane to generate drawing data. As a result, an image for one frame as shown in FIG. 91 (c2) can be displayed on the symbol display device 41. In this case, since the update processing in the display CPU 201 of the parameter information for the effect character image data 244 is continued even during the mask control period as described above, mask control is started for the display of the effect character image G74. The display mode corresponding to the timing when the execution period of the mask control has elapsed with respect to the timing is started.

  By starting the display of the image using the first separate saved image data 245 at the timing of t6, the mask control is continued as shown in FIGS. 90 (a) and 90 (b). However, the object of mask control is the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74 and the additional individual images. The image data 244 and 246 corresponding to the image G75 are not subject to mask control. Various parameter information regarding the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to each of the images G71 to G73 to be masked is stored and held in the work RAM 202, and update processing of these various parameter information is continued in the display CPU 201. The

  Thereafter, at the timing of t7, the period for displaying the image using the first separate saved image data 245 is ended, so that the mask control is ended as shown in FIGS. 90 (a) and 90 (b), It returns to the normal drawing period when mask control is not performed. In this case, as described above, the CPU 201 displays various parameter information for the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73 even during the mask control period. Since the updating process in is continued, the display of these images G71 to G73 is started from a display mode corresponding to the timing when the mask control execution period has elapsed with respect to the timing when the mask control is started. Thereby, it becomes possible to match the effect content with the effect execution devices other than the symbol display device 41 such as the speaker unit 45.

  Next, both the first separately stored data and the second separately stored data are stored separately, but the first separately stored image data 245 is used without displaying the image using the second separately stored image data 247. The case where the displayed image is displayed will be described.

  In the normal drawing period in which mask control is not performed as shown in FIG. 90 (a), the operation effective period of the effect operating device 48 becomes the start timing at the timing t8 as shown in FIG. 90 (f). In this case, as in the case of the timing t4, as shown in FIG. 90 (c), it is the execution timing of the separate storage for both the first separate storage data and the second separate storage data. Therefore, the first separate storage data is stored and held in the first separate storage buffer 251 as shown in FIG. 90 (d), and the second separate storage buffer 252 stores the first separate storage data as shown in FIG. 90 (e). The second saved data is stored and held.

  However, as shown in FIG. 90 (f) and FIG. 90 (g), the operation valid period elapses without the operation device for presentation 48 being operated at the timing of t9. In this case, since the image display using the second separate saved image data 247 is not performed, the mask control is not executed from the timing t8 to the timing t9. Accordingly, at the timing of t9, first separate saved data to be used thereafter is created again. That is, the first separate storage data created at the timing t8 and stored and held in the first separate storage buffer 251 is erased, and the first separate storage data created at the timing t9 is stored in the first separate storage buffer 251. New memory is retained. As a result, it is possible to display the images G71 to G73 in the display mode closer to the timing of using the first separately stored image data 245 as images using the first separately stored image data 245. Become. Note that the timing at which the first saved data is newly created is the update timing of the next image with respect to the update timing of the image after the operation valid period has elapsed.

  Thereafter, display of an image using the first separate saved image data 245 is started at the timing t10, whereby mask control is started as shown in FIGS. 90 (a) and 90 (b). However, the object of mask control is the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74 and the additional individual images. The image data 244 and 246 corresponding to the image G75 are not subject to mask control. Various parameter information regarding the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to each of the images G71 to G73 to be masked is stored and held in the work RAM 202, and update processing of these various parameter information is continued in the display CPU 201. The

  Then, at the timing of t11, the mask control is ended as shown in FIGS. 90 (a) and 90 (b) by completing the period for displaying the image using the first separate saved image data 245. It returns to the normal drawing period when mask control is not performed. In this case, as described above, the CPU 201 displays various parameter information for the image data 241 to 243 corresponding to the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73 even during the mask control period. Since the updating process in is continued, the display of these images G71 to G73 is started from a display mode corresponding to the timing when the mask control execution period has elapsed with respect to the timing when the mask control is started. Thereby, it becomes possible to match the effect content with the effect execution devices other than the symbol display device 41 such as the speaker unit 45.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing another storage effect will be described. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing another storage effect calculation process executed by the display CPU 201. It should be noted that the calculation process for the separate storage effect is executed in the background calculation process in step S2503 in the task process (FIG. 68) in the game times in which the separate storage effect is to be executed.

  First, by updating the pointer information to be referred to in the execution target table read to the work RAM 202 in order to control the effect for the current game round, the contents of the data to be referenced in the execution target table are updated this time. Data corresponding to the processing times of (step S3601). After that, when neither the operation-corresponding effect is being executed nor the operation effective period (step S3602 and step S3603: NO), it is determined whether or not it is the use period of the first separate stored data (step S3604). The use period of the first separate stored data is a game time in which the operation effective period does not occur and a game time in which another save effect occurs, and occurs when the elapsed time of the game time reaches a predetermined time. In the game times in which the operation effective period occurs, this occurs when the operation effective period elapses without the operation corresponding effect being executed or when the operation corresponding effect ends.

  If it is not the use period of the first separate saved data (step S3604: NO), the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S3605). The image data includes the backmost image data 241, image data 242 for the first background individual image, image data 243 for the second background individual image, and image data 244 for the effect character. Thereafter, the parameter information is calculated and derived for each of the effect character image data 244, the backmost image data 241, the first background individual image image data 242, and the second background individual image data 243, The derived parameter information is written in areas secured in the work RAM 202 in correspondence with these image data 241 to 244 (steps S3606 and S3607). Thereafter, the non-use instruction information of the separately stored data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3608). If it is the creation timing of the first separately stored data (step S3609: YES), the first creation instruction information of the separately stored data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3610).

  When the calculation process for another saved effect is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S2407) includes various image data 241 to 244 grasped in step S3605. Is set as the placement target in the world coordinate system. In the drawing list, parameter information applied to the image data 241 to 244 is set. In addition, the non-use instruction information of the separate storage data is set in the drawing list, and the first creation instruction information of the separate storage data is set when this time is the creation timing of the first separate storage data.

  If the first saved data is being used in the calculation process for another saved effect (step S3604: YES), the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is selected based on the currently set execution target table. Grasping (steps S3611 to S3613). The image data includes first separate storage data stored in the first separate storage buffer 251, effect character image data 244, and additional individual image image data 246. Thereafter, the image data 244 for the effect character, the backmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, the image data 246 for the additional individual image, and the first The parameter information is calculated and derived for each of the different storage data, and the derived parameter information is written in the area secured in the work RAM 202 corresponding to each of the image data 241 to 244 and 246 (steps S3614 to S3617). . In this case, the backmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are not to be arranged in the world coordinate system, but these image data 241 to 244 are provided. The storage and storage of the parameter information for H.246 in the work RAM 202 and the update of the parameter information are continued. Thereafter, the use instruction information of the separate saved data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3618).

  When the calculation process for another saving effect is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S2407) includes various image data grasped in steps S3611 to S3613. 241 to 244, 246 are set as arrangement targets in the world coordinate system. In the drawing list, parameter information applied to the image data 241 to 244 and 246 is set. In addition, the use instruction information of the separately stored data is set in the drawing list.

  In the calculation process for another saving effect, when it is the operation effective period (step S3603: YES), the process during the operation effective period is executed in step S3618, and when the operation corresponding effect is being performed (step S3602: YES), an operation corresponding effect production process is executed in step S3619. The process during the operation effective period and the process during the operation corresponding effect will be described below.

  FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing processing during an operation valid period.

  When it is the start timing of the operation valid period (step S3701: YES), the second creation instruction information of the separately stored data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3702). When the process of step S3702 is executed, or when it is not the start timing of the operation valid period and the production operation device 48 is not operated (step S3701 and step S3703: NO), based on the currently set execution target table. The type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped (step S3704). The image data includes the backmost image data 241, image data 242 for the first background individual image, image data 243 for the second background individual image, and image data 244 for the effect character. Thereafter, the parameter information is calculated and derived for each of the effect character image data 244, the backmost image data 241, the first background individual image image data 242, and the second background individual image data 243, The derived parameter information is written in areas secured in the work RAM 202 in correspondence with these image data 241 to 244 (steps S3705 and S3706). Thereafter, the valid period information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3707). If it is the end timing of the operation valid period (step S3708: YES), the first creation instruction information of the separately stored data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3709).

  When the processing during the operation valid period is executed as described above, various image data 241 to 244 grasped in step S3704 are included in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output processing (step S2407). Set as an object to be placed in the coordinate system. In the drawing list, parameter information applied to the image data 241 to 244 is set. In addition, effective period information is set in the drawing list, and if the current timing is the start timing of the operation effective period, second creation instruction information of another stored data is set, and this time is the end timing of the operation effective period. For example, the first creation instruction information of the separately stored data is set.

  When the production operating device 48 is operated during the operation effective period (step S3703: YES), the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped based on the currently set execution target table (step S3703). S3710 and step S3711). The image data includes second separate save data and effect image data 248 stored and held in the second separate save buffer 252. Thereafter, the image data 244 for the effect character, the backmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, the effect image data 248, and the second separately stored data The parameter information is calculated and derived for each, and the derived parameter information is written in the area secured in the work RAM 202 corresponding to each of the image data 241 to 244 and 248 (steps S3712 to S3715). In this case, the image data 244 for the effect character, the backmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are not arranged in the world coordinate system. The storage of parameter information for the image data 241 to 244 in the work RAM 202 and the update of the parameter information are continued. Thereafter, the operation corresponding effect information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3716).

  When the calculation process for another saving effect is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S2407) includes various image data grasped in step S3710 and step S3711. 248 is set as a placement target in the world coordinate system. In the drawing list, parameter information applied to the image data 248 is set. In addition, operation corresponding effect information is set in the drawing list.

  FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the processing corresponding to the operation corresponding effect.

  First, based on the currently set execution target table, the type of image data corresponding to the current update timing is grasped (steps S3801 and S3802). The image data includes second separate save data and effect image data 248 stored and held in the second separate save buffer 252. Thereafter, the image data 244 for the effect character, the backmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, the effect image data 248, and the second separately stored data The parameter information is calculated and derived for each, and the derived parameter information is written in areas secured in the work RAM 202 in correspondence with these image data 241 to 244 and 248 (steps S3803 to S3806). In this case, the image data 244 for the effect character, the backmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are not arranged in the world coordinate system. The storage of parameter information for the image data 241 to 244 in the work RAM 202 and the update of the parameter information are continued. Thereafter, the operation corresponding effect information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S3806).

  When the calculation process for another saving effect is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S2407) includes various image data grasped in steps S3801 and S3802. 248 is set as a placement target in the world coordinate system. In the drawing list, parameter information applied to the image data 248 is set. In addition, operation corresponding effect information is set in the drawing list.

  Next, setting processing for separate storage display executed in the VDP 205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The separate storage display setting process is executed as a part of the background setting process executed in step S2602 of the drawing process (FIG. 70). In addition, when the non-use instruction information of the separate storage data, the use instruction information of the separate storage data, the valid period information, or the operation corresponding effect information is set in the drawing list, the separate storage display setting process is executed.

  If the use instruction information of the separately stored data is not set in the current drawing list, and the operation corresponding effect information is not set in the current drawing list (step S3901: NO), the latest drawing list is used based on the current drawing list. The image data 241 on the back side, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, and the image data 244 for the effect character are grasped as arrangement targets in the world coordinate system (step S3902). . Also, parameter information applied to the image data 241 to 244 is grasped based on the current drawing list (step S3903). Then, setting processing for the world coordinate system is executed in a state where the parameter information grasped this time is applied to the image data 241 to 244 to be arranged (step S3904). Thereby, an image for one frame as shown in FIG. 91 (a2) is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  When the use instruction information of the separate saved data is set in the current drawing list (step S3905: YES), the first separate saved data, the image data 244 for the effect character, and the additional individual image are used based on the current drawing list. The image data 246 is grasped as an arrangement target in the world coordinate system (steps S3906 to S3908). Also, parameter information applied to the first separate saved data, the effect character image data 244, and the additional individual image image data 246 is grasped based on the current drawing list (step S3909). Then, the setting processing for the world coordinate system is executed in a state where the parameter information obtained this time is applied to the first separate saved data, the image data 244 for the effect character, and the image data 246 for the additional individual image (step) S3904). Thereby, an image for one frame as shown in FIG. 91 (c2) is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  When operation-related effect information is set in the current drawing list (step S3905: NO), based on the current drawing list, the second saved data and the effect image data 248 are grasped as arrangement targets in the world coordinate system. (Step S3910 and Step S3911). Also, parameter information applied to the second separate storage data and the effect image data 248 is grasped based on the current drawing list (step S3912). Then, the setting process to the world coordinate system is executed in a state where the parameter information grasped this time is applied to the second separate saved data and the effect image data 248 (step S3904). Thereby, an image for one frame as shown in FIG. 91 (b2) is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  Next, drawing data creation processing for separate storage display executed in the VDP 205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The drawing data creation process for separate storage display is executed as a part of the rendering and background drawing data creation process executed in step S2610 of the drawing process (FIG. 70). In addition, when the non-use instruction information of the separate storage data, the use instruction information of the separate storage data, the validity period information, or the operation corresponding effect information is set in the drawing list, the drawing data creation process for the separate storage display is executed. The

  When the first creation instruction information of the separately stored data or the second creation instruction information of the separately stored data is set in the current drawing list (step S4001: YES), the rearmost image data 241 and the first background individual image are used. The first separate storage data is created by projecting the image data 242 and the image data 243 for the second background individual image onto the virtual two-dimensional plane (step S4002). Then, the created first separate storage data is written into the first separate storage buffer 251 of the VRAM 204 (step S4003). As a result, the first separate storage data is stored and held in the first separate storage buffer 251.

  When a negative determination is made in step S4001 or when the process of step S4002 is executed, drawing data for displaying one of the images in FIGS. 91 (a2), 91 (b2), and 91 (c2) is created. (Step S4004). The drawing data is used in the drawing data composition processing in step S2612 in the drawing processing (FIG. 70) in order to display an image of one frame.

  After that, when the second creation instruction information of the separately stored data is set in the current rendering list (step S4005: YES), the rendering data created in the immediately preceding step S4004 is used as the second separately stored data in the second of the VRAM 204. The data is written into the separate storage buffer 252 (step S4006). As a result, the second separate save data is stored and held in the second separate save buffer 252. Further, since the second saved data uses the drawing data used for displaying an image for one frame as it is, it is possible to reduce the processing load for creating the second saved data.

  As described above, when an image is displayed using the first separate storage data, the rearmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are displayed. It is possible to display the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73 while performing mask control on the surface. This reduces the processing load on the VDP 205 for displaying the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, and the second background individual image G73, and even if the additional individual image G75 is newly added as a display target. It is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load of the VDP 205. Further, when the image is displayed using the second saved data, the rearmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, the image data 243 for the second background individual image, and the effect character It is possible to display the backmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74 while performing mask control on the image data 244 for use. This reduces the processing load on the VDP 205 for displaying the rearmost image G71, the first background individual image G72, the second background individual image G73, and the effect character image G74, and the effect image G76 is newly added as a display target. Even if it is done, it becomes possible to prevent the processing load of the VDP 205 from increasing.

  The parameter information of the image data excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane by executing the mask control is stored and held without being erased from the work RAM 202. As a result, when returning to the period in which the image is displayed by projecting the image data onto a virtual two-dimensional plane, a process for securing an area for updating the parameter information of the image data in the work RAM 202 is executed. There is no need to do this. In order to newly set the parameter information of the image data as an update target, initial processing such as search processing of the storage area of the work RAM 202 for storing and holding the parameter information and clear processing of the storage area searched by the search processing, etc. The setting process needs to be executed, and the processing load of the initial setting process is larger than the processing load for updating the parameter information. Under such circumstances, the parameter information of the image data subject to mask control is stored and held in the work RAM 202, so that the processing load on the display CPU 201 when the mask control is released becomes extremely large. It becomes possible to prevent this.

  Further, the display CPU 201 performs the update process of the parameter information for the predetermined image data even when the predetermined image data is excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane by executing the mask control. continue. As a result, immediately after the period in which the display of the image using the first separate storage data or the second separate storage data is completed, the motion of the image corresponding to the predetermined image data from the state immediately before the start of the period. Is not resumed, but instead of the display state immediately before the start of the period, the state changes from the state in which the movement continues for the duration of the period according to the display pattern until then to the predetermined image data. It is possible to resume the movement of the corresponding image. Thereby, it becomes possible to match the effect content with the effect execution devices other than the symbol display device 41 such as the speaker unit 45.

  Further, by executing the mask control, the backmost image data 241, the image data 242 for the first background individual image, and the image data 243 for the second background individual image are excluded from the projection target on the virtual two-dimensional plane. Even in such a situation, the VRAM 204 retains a buffer area in which information that is referred to in order to place the image data 241 to 243 in the world coordinate system is stored. As a result, when returning to a period during which an image is displayed by projecting these image data 241 to 243 onto a virtual two-dimensional plane, information referred to for arranging these image data 241 to 243 in the world coordinate system is displayed. There is no need to execute processing for securing the buffer area to be stored in the VRAM 204. In order to secure the buffer area, it is necessary to execute an initial setting process such as a search process of the storage area of the VRAM 204 and a clear process of the storage area searched by the search process. By holding the buffer areas of the image data 241 to 243 as they are in the VRAM 204, it becomes possible to prevent the processing load of the VDP 205 from becoming extremely large when the mask control is released.

  If a period for displaying an image using the first separate storage data can occur immediately after the period for displaying the image using the second separate storage data has ended, an image using the second separate storage data is displayed. Before the period to start, not only the second separate stored data but also the first separate stored data is created. As a result, even if the mask control is performed on the image data 241 to 243 for creating the first separate storage data during the period of displaying the image using the second separate storage data, Immediately after the period for displaying the image using the stored data is completed, it is possible to display the image using the first separate stored data.

  Further, even when the first separate storage data is created before the period for displaying the image using the second separate storage data is started, the period for displaying the image using the second separate storage data is long. When the mask control is not performed on the image data 241 to 243 for creating the first separate storage data because it does not occur, the first data immediately before the display of the image using the first separate storage data is started. One-by-one stored data is newly created. As a result, it is possible to display the images G71 to G73 in the display mode closer to the timing of using the first separately stored data as images using the first separately stored data.

<Another form related to another storage effect>
-When the operation effective period starts, instead of the configuration in which both the first separate storage data and the second separate storage data are stored, the first separate storage data at a predetermined timing before the operation effective period starts. One of the second stored data is stored and held, and the other stored data is stored after the predetermined timing and before the start of the operation effective period or at the start timing of the operation effective period. It is good also as a structure hold | maintained. In this case, it is possible to distribute the processing load as compared with a configuration in which both the first separate storage data and the second separate storage data are stored and held in the same processing time.

  When the mask control is being executed, the image data that is the target of mask control is not arranged in the world coordinate system, and the image data that is the target of mask control is also the world coordinate system. It is good also as a structure excluded from the projection object to a virtual two-dimensional plane although arrange | positioned. In this case, it is not necessary to execute processing for re-arranging the image data that has been the target of mask control when the mask control is completed in the world coordinate system. In the configuration, the image data that is the target of the mask control may be configured such that the parameter information applied to the image data in the VDP 205 is not changed although it is the placement target in the world coordinate system. However, it is preferable that the update of the parameter information of the image data in the display CPU 201 is continued.

  In place of the configuration in which the display CPU 201 continues to update the parameter information for the image data subject to mask control, the parameter information in the display CPU 201 is updated for the image data subject to mask control. It is good also as a structure which is not performed. In this case, the operation of the image corresponding to the image data targeted for mask control is resumed from the display state of the image corresponding to the other saved data. Even in this configuration, it is preferable that the state in which the parameter information to be masked is stored in the work RAM 202 is stored and held during execution of the mask control.

  The separately stored data separately stored in advance is not limited to two types, and may be three or more types. Further, the configuration of the mask control described above may be applied to a configuration in which the different saved data is one type.

<Configuration for performing angle display effects>
Next, a configuration for performing an angle display effect will be described.

  The angle display effect uses a plurality of types of moving images that can display a display object whose movement changes with time as viewed from different angles, and is used based on the operation of the effect operating device 48. It is an effect that changes the target of use to a video with an angle different from that of the target video. The specific display contents of the angle display effect will be described with reference to the explanatory diagrams of FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b). As shown in FIGS. 97A and 97B, in the angle display effect, a live-action image is displayed as a moving image. In this live-action video, a person is displayed as the live-action character image G81, and the movement of the live-action character image G81 is displayed as a moving image. FIG. 97 (a) corresponds to a moving image in which a person of the live-action character image G81 is captured from an A angle that is a predetermined angle with respect to the live-action character image G81, and FIG. 97 (b) is different from the A angle. This corresponds to a moving image in which a person of the live-action character image G81 is captured from an angle. In addition to the A-angle moving image and the B-angle moving image, there is a moving image in which a person of the photographed character image G81 is captured from a C angle different from the A angle and the B angle.

  The contents of the data stored in advance in the memory module 203 for executing the angle display effect will be described with reference to the explanatory diagram of FIG.

  In the memory module 203 as data for executing the angle display effect, the first moving image data group 261 for A angle, the second moving image data group 262 for A angle, and A An angle third moving image data group 263 is stored in advance. The memory module 203 also includes a B-angle first moving image data group 264, a B-angle second moving image data group 265, and a B-angle third moving image data group 266 as moving image data for displaying a B-angle moving image. Is stored in advance. The memory module 203 also includes C angle first moving image data group 267, C angle second moving image data group 268 and C angle third moving image data group 269 as moving image data for displaying C angle moving images. Is stored in advance.

  FIG. 99 is an explanatory diagram for explaining each of the moving image data groups 261 to 269. FIG. 99 (a) shows the first moving image data group 261 of A angle, and FIG. 99 (b) shows the second moving image of A angle. 99 (c) shows an A-angle third moving image data group 263, FIG. 99 (d) shows a B-angle first moving image data group 264, and FIG. 99 (e) shows a B-angle. 99 (f) shows a B angle third moving image data group 266, FIG. 99 (g) shows a C angle first moving image data group 267, and FIG. 99 (h). ) Shows the second moving image data group 268 of C angle, and FIG. 99 (i) shows the third moving image data group 269 of C angle.

  As shown in FIGS. 99A to 99I, each moving image data group 261 to 269 has a plurality of moving image data 271a to 273c, respectively. The moving image data 271a to 273c is image data that has been compressed between frames so as to have a plurality of difference data on the basis of one frame of still image data as described above, and encoded in, for example, the MPEG2 system. . When the moving image data 271a to 273c are decoded, the moving image data 271a to 273c are expanded into still image data for a plurality of frames.

  Each piece of moving image data 271a to 273c included in each of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 has a data amount so that still image data corresponding to the minimum number of units that can be set as moving image data can be reproduced. Is set. Specifically, with regard to the minimum number of units of still image data, each moving image data 271a to 273c can reproduce 48 still image data, in other words, 48 images can be updated (48 frames updated). It has become. Each of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 has the same number (specifically, 20) of such moving image data 271a to 273c.

  The A-angle first moving image data group 261, the A-angle second moving image data group 262, and the A-angle third moving image data group 263 all correspond to the A angle when the live-action character image G81 moves according to a predetermined motion pattern. This is for displaying a series of videos as if viewed at an angle. A series of moving images as viewed at an angle corresponding to the A angle is divided into a plurality of moving image data 271a to 271c in the moving image data groups 261 to 263 of the A angle. In this case, in each of the A-angle moving image data groups 261 to 263, the final still image data in the moving image data 271a to 271c in which the decoding target order is a predetermined order and the predetermined order are the following. The motion of the photographed character image G81 is continuous in the predetermined motion pattern from the first still image data in the sequence of moving image data 271a to 271c. Therefore, in the case of the first moving image data group 261 of A angle, the image display is performed while sequentially decoding the moving image data 271a included in the first moving image data group 261 of the A angle in accordance with a predetermined decoding order. As a result, it is possible to display a series of motions in which the live-action character image G81 is viewed according to a predetermined motion pattern at an angle corresponding to the A angle. Further, in the case of the second moving image data group 262 of A angle, image display is performed while sequentially decoding the moving image data 271b included in the second moving image data group 262 of the A angle in accordance with a predetermined decoding order. As a result, it is possible to display a series of motions in which the live-action character image G81 is viewed according to a predetermined motion pattern at an angle corresponding to the A angle. Further, in the case of the third moving image data group 263 of A angle, the image display is performed while sequentially decoding the moving image data 271c included in the third moving image data group 263 of the A angle in accordance with a predetermined decoding order. As a result, it is possible to display a series of motions in which the live-action character image G81 is viewed according to a predetermined motion pattern at an angle corresponding to the A angle.

  The B-angle first moving image data group 264, the B-angle second moving image data group 265, and the B-angle third moving image data group 266 all correspond to the B angle when the live-action character image G81 moves according to a predetermined motion pattern. This is for displaying a series of videos as if viewed at an angle. A series of moving images as seen at an angle corresponding to the B angle is divided into a plurality of moving image data 272a to 272c in each of the B angle moving image data groups 264 to 266. In this case, in each of the B-angle moving image data groups 264 to 266, the still image data in the last order in the moving image data 272a to 272c in which the decoding target order is a predetermined order and the predetermined order are the following. The motion of the live-action character image G81 has continuity in the predetermined motion pattern as compared with the first still image data in the sequence of moving image data 272a to 272c. Therefore, in the case of the B-angle first moving image data group 264, image display is performed while sequentially decoding the moving image data 272a included in the first B-angle moving image data group 264 in accordance with a predetermined decoding order. Thus, it is possible to display a series of actions in which a state in which the photographed character image G81 moves according to a predetermined action pattern is viewed at an angle corresponding to the B angle. In the case of the B-angle second moving image data group 265, image display is performed while sequentially decoding the moving image data 272b included in the B-angle second moving image data group 265 in accordance with a predetermined decoding order. Thus, it is possible to display a series of actions in which a state in which the photographed character image G81 moves according to a predetermined action pattern is viewed at an angle corresponding to the B angle. In the case of the B-angle third moving image data group 266, image display is performed while sequentially decoding the moving image data 272c included in the B-angle third moving image data group 266 in accordance with a predetermined decoding order. Thus, it is possible to display a series of actions in which a state in which the photographed character image G81 moves according to a predetermined action pattern is viewed at an angle corresponding to the B angle.

  The C angle first moving image data group 267, the C angle second moving image data group 268, and the C angle third moving image data group 269 all correspond to the C angle when the live-action character image G81 moves according to a predetermined motion pattern. This is for displaying a series of videos as if viewed at an angle. A series of moving images as viewed at an angle corresponding to the C angle is divided into a plurality of moving image data 273a to 273c in each moving image data group 267 to 269 of the C angle. In this case, in the C-angle moving image data groups 267 to 269, the still image data in the last order in the moving image data 273a to 273c in which the decoding target order is a predetermined order and the predetermined order are the following. The motion of the photographed character image G81 is continuous in the predetermined motion pattern from the first still image data in the first sequence of the moving image data 273a to 273c. Accordingly, in the case of the C-angle first moving image data group 267, image display is performed while sequentially decoding the moving image data 273a included in the first C-angle moving image data group 267 in accordance with a predetermined decoding order. As a result, it is possible to display a series of movements in which the photographed character image G81 moves according to a predetermined movement pattern as seen at an angle corresponding to the C angle. In addition, in the case of the C-angle second moving image data group 268, image display is performed while sequentially decoding the moving image data 273b included in the C-angle second moving image data group 268 in accordance with a predetermined decoding order. As a result, it is possible to display a series of movements in which the photographed character image G81 moves according to a predetermined movement pattern as seen at an angle corresponding to the C angle. In the case of the C-angle third moving image data group 269, image display is performed while sequentially decoding the moving image data 273c included in the C-angle third moving image data group 269 in accordance with a predetermined decoding order. As a result, it is possible to display a series of movements in which the photographed character image G81 moves according to a predetermined movement pattern as seen at an angle corresponding to the C angle.

  Since the moving image data 271a to 273c are for deriving still image data by executing a decoding process, the display of the image cannot be started from the middle of the moving image data 271a to 273c. When the display of an image is started from a timing in the middle of the data 271a to 273c, a processing wait time occurs until still image data at the middle timing is derived. In this case, since each moving image data group 261 to 269 includes a plurality of moving image data 271a to 273c, moving image data 271a to 273c in a predetermined order and moving image data 271a to 273c in the next order Can be used as the angle change timing. Therefore, the angle type can be changed among the A angle, the B angle, and the C angle during the execution of the angle display effect.

  Here, the angle change trigger in the angle display effect is generated by the operation of the effect operating device 48. In this case, if the change of the angle does not occur at an early stage with respect to the operation timing of the production operation device 48, it is difficult to give the player the impression that the angle has been changed by the operation of the production operation device 48. End up. On the other hand, as already explained, there are a plurality of moving image data groups 261 to 269 for displaying the same moving image at each angle A to C, specifically three. Furthermore, the number of updates (number of frames) of the image after starting the angle display effect corresponding to the first still image data in the first order in the arbitrary moving image data 271a to 273c is between the moving image data groups 261 to 269 within the same angle. It is different.

  Specifically, in the first moving image data groups 261, 264, and 267 at the respective angles A to C, the first still image data in the first moving image data 271a, 272a, and 273a starts the angle display effect. The moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a in the subsequent order corresponds to the timing, and the moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a in the subsequent order are still image data that can be set as moving image data 271a-273c. This corresponds to the timing at which the video display progresses by the number corresponding to the minimum unit number. In this case, the first moving image data group 261 of A angle, the first moving image data group 264 of B angle, and the first moving image data group 267 of C angle have the same number of moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a. The number of update times of the images after starting the angle display effect corresponding to the still image data in the first order in the moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a in the order corresponding to each other is the same.

  In the second moving image data group 262, 265, 268 at each angle of A to C, the first moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b in each order is the first moving image data of each angle of A to C. Corresponding to the timing at which moving image display progresses for the first reference period K1 with respect to the first order still image data in the corresponding sequence of moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a in the data groups 261, 264, 267. Yes. In other words, the second moving image data group 262, 265, 268 in each angle of A to C is the first order still image data in the first order moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b, the start timing of the angle display effect. The moving image data 271b, 272b, and 273b in the subsequent order correspond to the moving image data 271b, 272b, and 273b in the previous order. This corresponds to the timing at which moving image display progresses by the number corresponding to the minimum unit number of still image data that can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c. In this case, the moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b included in the second moving image data group 262, 265, 268 are moving images included in the first moving image data group 261, 264, 267 at the same angle. Data 271a, 272a, and 273a and corresponding moving image data 271a, 272a, and 273a partially overlap the content of still image data created by the decoding process. Furthermore, all of the still image data created by the single moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b included in the second moving image data group 262, 265, 268 is the first moving image data group 261, 264, 267. Are included in still image data created by two continuous moving image data 271a, 272a, and 273a.

  In the third moving image data group 263, 266, 269 at each angle of A to C, the first moving image data 271c, 272c, 273c in each order is the second moving image of the angles A to C. Corresponding to the timing at which the moving image display progresses for the second reference period K1 with respect to the first still image data in the first order in the moving image data 271b, 272b, 273b in the corresponding order in the data groups 262, 265, 268. Yes. In other words, in each of the angles A to C, the third moving image data group 263, 266, 269 has the first still image data in the first moving image data 271c, 272c, 273c as the start timing of the angle display effect. The moving image data 271c, 272c, and 273c in the subsequent order correspond to the timing at which the moving image display proceeds by the second reference period K2 corresponding to twice the first reference period K1. The moving image data 271c, 272c, and 273c correspond to the timing at which moving image display proceeds by the number corresponding to the minimum unit number of still image data that can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c. In this case, each moving image data 271c, 272c, 273c included in the third moving image data group 263, 266, 269 is a moving image included in the first moving image data group 261, 264, 267 at the same angle. The moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a of the data 271a, 272a, 273a and the content of the still image data created by the decoding process partially overlap, and the second moving image data at the same angle The moving image data 271b, 272b, and 273b included in the groups 262, 265, and 268 and corresponding moving image data 271b, 272b, and 273b and the content of still image data created by the decoding process partially overlap doing. Furthermore, all the still image data created by the single moving image data 271c, 272c, 273c included in the third moving image data group 263, 266, 269 is the first moving image data group 261, 264, 267. Two continuous moving images included in the second moving image data group 262, 265, 268 included in the still image data created by the two continuous moving image data 271a, 272a, 273a included in It is included in still image data created by image data 271b, 272b, 273b.

  The number of still image data that can be reproduced in the first reference period K1 is smaller than the number of still image data that can be reproduced by one moving image data 271a to 273c included in each moving image data 271a to 273c. In other words, the number of image updates (number of frames) in the first reference period K1 is smaller than the number of image updates by one moving image data 271a to 273c included in each moving image data 271a to 273c. Furthermore, the number of still image data that can be reproduced in the first reference period K1 is smaller than the minimum unit number of still image data that can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c. Specifically, the number of still image data that can be reproduced in the first reference period K1 is 16, and the number of image updates in the first reference period K1 is 16.

  The number of still image data that can be reproduced in the second reference period K2 is smaller than the number of still image data that can be reproduced by one moving image data 271a to 273c included in each moving image data 271a to 273c. In other words, the number of image updates (the number of frames) in the second reference period K2 is smaller than the number of image updates by one moving image data 271a to 273c included in each moving image data 271a to 273c. Furthermore, the number of still image data that can be reproduced in the second reference period K2 is smaller than the minimum unit number of still image data that can be set as the moving image data 271a to 273c. Specifically, the number of still image data that can be reproduced in the first reference period K1 is 32, and the number of image updates in the first reference period K1 is 32.

  As described above, a plurality of moving image data groups 261 to 269 for displaying the same moving image at each of the angles A to C are provided. In each angle, the second moving image data group 262, 265, 268 is smaller than the minimum unit number of still image data that can be set as moving image data 271a to 273c with respect to the first moving image data group 261, 264, 267. And the third moving image data group 263, 266, 269 can be set as moving image data 271a to 273c with respect to the second moving image data group 262, 265, 268. There is a shift of the first reference period K1 corresponding to a number smaller than the minimum unit number of data. Accordingly, it is possible to cause many switching timings between the moving image data 271a to 273c in a predetermined order and the moving image data 271a to 273c in the next order at each angle. This makes it possible to change the angle at an early stage.

  Next, how the angle display effect progresses will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 100 (a) shows the operation timing of the production operation device 48, FIG. 100 (b) shows a waiting period until the angle is switched with respect to the operation of the production operation device 48, and FIG. The timing at which the angle can be switched is shown, FIG. 100 (d) shows the period during which the A-angle moving image is displayed, and FIG. 100 (e) shows one piece included in the A-angle moving image data group 261-263. The moving image data 271a to 271c are read from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204, FIG. 100 (f) shows the period during which the B-angle moving image is displayed, and FIG. Is one moving image data 272a to 272c included in the B-angle moving image data group 264 to 266 from the memory module 203 to the VRAM 20 Indicate the period during which the are read deployed buffer 211. In the following description, a case where the angle is changed from the A angle to the B angle will be described, but the same applies to other patterns for changing the angle.

  As shown in FIG. 100C, in the situation where the moving image is displayed using the first moving image data group 261 among the A angle moving image data groups 261 to 263 as shown in FIG. A switchable timing for switching to the second moving image data group 265 of B angle occurs at the timing t1, and a switching timing for switching to the third moving image data group 266 of B angle occurs at the timing t2. However, since the effect operating device 48 has not been operated until each of the timings t1 and t2, the angle is not switched.

  The angle switching triggered by the operation of the effect operating device 48 is performed by looping in a predetermined order among the A angle, the B angle, and the C angle. Specifically, the A angle is selected at the start timing of the angle display effect, and then the A angle → B angle → C angle → A angle → B angle → C angle → A when the effect operating device 48 is operated. Angle switching occurs in the order of angle →.

  Thereafter, at the timing t3, the next moving image data 271a is read and decoded in the first A-angle first moving image data group 261 that is the target of moving image display. Therefore, at the timing t3, the next moving image data 271a is read from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 as shown in FIG. Decoding processing is started on the image data 271a. In this case, only one moving image data 271a is read from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b and the decoding process is started. The plurality of still image data after the decoding processing is written in the moving image data area 211b. In the reading and decoding processing of the single moving image data 271a, the moving image data area 211b is used so that still image data created from the single moving image data 271a that is currently displayed is not deleted. The data is set to.

  Thereafter, at the timing t4 when the decoding process is completed, a switchable timing to the B-angle first moving image data group 264 occurs as shown in FIG. However, since the effect operating device 48 has not been operated by the timing t4, the angle does not change, and the moving image of the first moving image data group 261 of the A angle that has been decoded at the timing t4. Display of a moving image using the data 271a is started.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t5, the effect operation device 48 is operated as shown in FIG. In this case, since the moving image of the moving image data 271a that is the current display target is being displayed and it is not the switching timing to the B-angle moving image data group 264 to 266, the angle as shown in FIG. Is in a standby state.

  After that, at the timing of t6, the time before the timing of t7, which is the switchable timing to the B-angle moving image data group 264 to 266, by a period that enables decoding of one moving image data 271a to 273c. This is the timing at which decoding can be started. Therefore, at the timing t6, as shown in FIG. 100 (g), decoding of the switching destination moving image data 272b in the B-angle second moving image data group 265 is started. Specifically, in the B-angle second moving image data group 265, the moving image data 272b of the current switching destination is read from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b, and decoding processing is performed on the moving image data 272b. Be started. The plurality of still image data after the decoding processing is written in the moving image data area 211b. In the reading and decoding processing of the single moving image data 272b, the moving image data area 211b is used so that still image data created from the single moving image data 271a that is the current display target is not deleted. The data is set to. Note that the period between the decode startable timing and the switchable timing is a period shorter than the period during which moving image display is performed by one moving image data 271a to 273c. This corresponds to the image update timing two times before the possible timing.

  After that, at the timing t7 when the decoding process is completed, the display of the moving image using the moving image data 272b of the B-angle second moving image data group 265 that has been decoded at the timing t7 is started. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 100F, display of a B-angle moving image is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 100C, a switchable timing to the third moving image data group 269 of the C angle occurs at the timing of t8. However, since the effect operating device 48 has not been operated until the timing t8, the angle does not change, and the second moving image data group 265 of the B angle that has been decoded at the timing t7. The moving image display using the moving image data 272b is continued.

  As described above, the angle is changed based on the operation of the production operation device 48. However, the operation timing of the production operation device 48 is decoded at the operation timing of the moving image data 271a to 273c of the switching destination. Even if it is started, if the decoding process is not completed by the switchable timing of the next angle, the switchable timing of the next angle is not switched at the switchable timing of the next angle. The angle is switched at. Such an operation will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 100 (d), in the situation where a moving image is displayed using the first moving image data group 261 among the A angle moving image data groups 261 to 263, the timing shown in FIG. As shown, the production operating device 48 is operated. In this case, since the moving image of the moving image data 271a that is the current display target is being displayed and it is not the switching timing to the B-angle moving image data group 264 to 266, the angle as shown in FIG. Is in a standby state.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t10, as shown in FIG. 100 (c), it is possible to switch to the B-angle moving image data groups 264 to 266. However, the period between the timing t9 when the production operation device 48 is operated and the timing t10 that is the switching timing to the B-angle moving image data group 264 to 266 is one moving image data 271a to 271a. It is less than the period required to complete the decoding process for 273c. Therefore, switching to the B-angle moving image data group 264 to 266 does not occur at the timing of t10. At the time t10, the B-angle moving image data 272a to 272c has not yet been read and decoded.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t11, the timing of t12, which is the switching timing to the B-angle moving image data group 264 to 266, is preceded by a period that enables decoding of one moving image data 271a to 273c. This is the timing at which decoding can be started. Therefore, at the timing of t11, as shown in FIG. 100 (g), decoding of the switching destination moving image data 272c is started in the B-angle third moving image data group 266. Specifically, the moving image data 272c of the current switching destination is read from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b in the B-angle third moving image data group 266, and decoding processing is performed on the moving image data 272c. Be started. The plurality of still image data after the decoding processing is written in the moving image data area 211b. Further, when reading and decoding the single moving image data 272c, the moving image data area 211b prevents the still image data created from the single moving image data 271a that is currently displayed from being deleted. The data is set in.

  Thereafter, at the timing t12 when the decoding process is completed, the display of the moving image using the moving image data 272c of the third moving image data group 266 of the B angle that has been decoded at the timing t12 is started. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 100F, display of a B-angle moving image is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 100C, a switchable timing to the first moving image data group 267 of the C angle occurs at the timing of t13. However, since the effect operating device 48 has not been operated until the timing t13, the angle is not switched, and the third moving image data group 266 of the B angle that has been decoded at the timing t12. The moving image display using the moving image data 272c is continued.

  As described above, when the effect operating device 48 is operated immediately before the switchable timing of the angle, the angle switching is performed at the next switchable timing, so that the moving image of the angle at the switching destination is obtained. The angle is switched at the timing when the decoding of the data 271a to 273c is completed. Thus, it is possible to prevent the decoding waiting time of the moving image data 271a to 273c from occurring when the angle is switched.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the angle display effect will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the calculation process for the angle display effect executed by the display CPU 201. The calculation process for the angle display effect is executed in the effect calculation process in step S2504 in the task process (FIG. 68) in the opening / closing execution mode in which the angle display effect is to be executed.

  If it is the opening period immediately before starting the angle display effect (step S4101: YES), an opening process is executed (step S4102). The opening period is a period that is set before starting the display of the moving image by any one of the A angle to the C angle, and the display of the moving image by any one of the A angle to the C angle is started in the opening period. And that the angle can be changed by operating the effect operating device 48. Further, during the opening period, an angle to be displayed can be selected at the start timing of moving image display based on the operation of the production operating device 48.

  The opening process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, it is determined whether or not it is the readout period of the moving image data 271a to 273c (step S4201). In the opening period, an angle selection period in which an angle can be selected is set first, and thereafter, a reading period for moving image data 271a to 273c is set. If it is the angle selection period (step S4201: NO), it is determined whether or not an operation generation command is received from the sound light side MPU 62 (step S4202). The effect operation device 48 is electrically connected to the sound light side MPU 62, and when the effect operation device 48 is operated, an operation generation command is transmitted from the sound light side MPU 62 to the display CPU 201.

  When an operation generation command is received from the sound light side MPU 62 (step S4202: YES), an update process of an angle counter provided in the work RAM 202 is executed (step S4203). The angle counter is a counter for the display CPU 201 to specify which angle of the moving image data 271a to 273c is to be read at the reading timing of the moving image data 271a to 273c. The case where the angle counter value is “0” corresponds to the A angle, the case where the angle counter value is “1” corresponds to the B angle, and the angle counter value is “2”. The case corresponds to the C angle. When the opening period is started, the value of the angle counter is “0”, the operation generation command is received, the process of step S4203 is executed, and 1 is added to the value of the angle counter. When the value of the angle counter after adding 1 is “3”, the value of the angle counter is cleared to “0”.

  On the other hand, when it is the reading period of the moving image data 271a to 273c (step S4201: YES), the moving image data 271a to 273c corresponding to the current value in the angle counter of the work RAM 202 is grasped (step S4204). In this case, if the value of the angle counter is “0”, the first moving image data 271a in the first moving image data group 261 of the A angle is grasped, and if the value of the angle counter is “1”, the B angle The first moving image data 272a in the first moving image data group 264 is grasped. If the value of the angle counter is “2”, the first moving image data 273a in the first moving image data group 267 of the C angle is grasped. To do. Thereafter, the decode designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4205).

  When a negative determination is made in step S4202, when the process of step S4203 is executed, or when the process of step S4205 is executed, various image data necessary for displaying an image corresponding to the current update timing in the opening period (Step S4206), and parameter information to be applied to the image data is calculated and derived (step S4207). Then, the opening information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4208).

  When the opening process is executed as described above, various image data grasped in step S4206 are arranged in the world coordinate system in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S2407). Set as a target. In the drawing list, parameter information to be applied to these various image data is set. In addition, opening information is set in the drawing list. The drawing process (FIG. 70) is executed in the VDP 205 in accordance with the drawing list, so that an image for the opening period is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  If the decode designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201, the decode designation information is set in the drawing list and the moving image data 271a to 273c grasped in step S4204 are stored. The address information of the memory module 203 and the area address for developing the moving image data 271a to 273c as still image data in the moving image data area 211b are set. In this case, the VDP 205 reads the moving image data 271a to 273c specified in the drawing list from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b and executes the decoding process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

  Specifically, the address of the moving image data 271a to 273c is grasped from the information specified in the drawing list (step S4301), and the moving image data 271a to 273c is determined from the information specified in the drawing list as a still image. The address of the area developed as data is grasped (step S4302). Then, the moving image data 271a to 273c are read from the address of the memory module 203 grasped in step S4301, and the moving image data 271a to 273c are decoded. Then, the decoded still image data group is written in each area of the moving image data area 211b grasped in step S4302 (step S4303).

  Returning to the description of the calculation process for the angle display effect (FIG. 101), when it is not the opening period (step S4101: NO), it is a condition that an operation generation command is received from the sound light side MPU 62 (step S4103: YES). ), “1” is set to the operation acceptance flag provided in the work RAM 202 (step S4104). The operation acceptance flag is a flag for the display CPU 201 to specify that the angle should be switched. Only one operation acceptance flag is provided, and even if the production operation device 48 is operated a plurality of times before the angle is switched, the operation reception is accepted for the operation of the production operation device 48 for the second and subsequent times. Only the state in which “1” is set in the flag is maintained. As will be described in detail later, when “1” is set in the operation acceptance flag, the next order from the current angle regardless of how many times the effect operating device 48 is operated before the angle is switched. Switching to the other angle occurs. As a result, when the angle is switched, the angles are switched in a predetermined order as the contents of the angle display effect displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  In the calculation process for the angle display effect, it is determined in step S4105 whether or not it is a timing at which the moving image data 271a to 273c can be decoded. The timing at which decoding can be started is the timing at which an angle can be switched thereafter (timing t1, timing t2, timing t4, timing t7, timing t8, timing t10, timing t12, timing t13 in FIG. 100). Is set as an image update timing before a predetermined period, in other words, a predetermined number of times before. More specifically, the period between the decode startable timing and the switchable timing is shorter than the period during which moving image display is performed by one moving image data 271a to 273c. Corresponds to the image update timing two times before the switchable timing immediately after. Whether or not it is the decoding timing of the moving image data is grasped based on the execution table for the angle display effect read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 when the angle display effect is started.

  If it is time to start decoding the moving image data 271a to 273c (step S4105: YES), it is determined whether or not “1” is set in the operation acceptance flag of the work RAM 202 (step S4106). If “1” is not set in the operation acceptance flag (step S4106: NO), 1 is subtracted from the value of the timing counter provided in the work RAM 202 (step S4107). The timing counter displays the same moving image data group 261 when the moving image display by one moving image data 271a to 273c is continued for the same moving image data group 261 to 269 without switching the angle. This is a counter for the display CPU 201 to specify the timing for executing the decoding processing of the next sequence of moving image data 271a to 273c. The timing counter is set to “3” when the decoding process of the moving image data 271a to 273c is newly executed, and the moving image data 271a to 273c is used in a situation where the same moving image data 271a to 273c is used. The value of the timing counter is decremented by “1” every time the decoding timing is reached. At the timing when the opening period ends in the angle display effect, the value of the timing counter is “3”.

  When the value of the timing counter after subtracting “1” is “0” (step S4108: YES), the next moving image data 271a to 273c in the same moving image data group 261 to 269 is decoded at the timing. It means that there is. In this case, the process for decoding the moving image data 271a to 273c shown in steps S4109 to S4112 is executed.

  Specifically, first, the moving image correspondence table 275 corresponding to the current value of the angle counter is read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S4109). As described above, the angle counter is a counter for the display CPU 201 to specify which angle of the moving image data 271a to 273c is to be read at the reading timing of the moving image data 271a to 273c. The moving image correspondence table 275 is stored in advance in the memory module 203 in a one-to-one correspondence with each of the A angle, the B angle, and the C angle. In the moving image correspondence table 275, the relationship between the timing at which switching to new moving image data 271a to 273c can occur and the type of moving image data 271a to 273c at the switching timing is determined in advance. In each angle, the first moving image data groups 261, 264, 267, the second moving image data groups 262, 265, 268, and the third moving image data groups 263, 266, 269 are transferred to new moving image data 271 a to 273 c. Since the timing at which switching can occur is different and the types of moving image data 271a to 273c to be switched are also different, the above data is set for each moving image data group 261 to 269 to be used in the moving image correspondence table 275. Yes.

  FIG. 104A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the moving image correspondence table 275 corresponding to the A angle. The contents of the moving image correspondence table corresponding to the B angle and the moving image correspondence table corresponding to the C angle are the same as those in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 104 (a), pointer information corresponding to switching is set as information for specifying the timing at which switching to new moving image data 271a to 271c can occur. The pointer information corresponds to the number of times the image is updated using the moving image data 271a to 271c. Specifically, every time the image is updated using the moving image data 271a to 271c. 1 is added to the pointer information to be referenced. When the display of the image using the first moving image data 271a to 271c is started in the angle display effect, the pointer information to be referred to is “0”. The updating of the pointer information to be referred to is continued without being cleared to “0” halfway until the display of the image using the moving image data 271a to 271c is completed in the angle display effect. Therefore, the pointer information “16” means that the image update using the moving image data 271a to 271c has been performed 16 times so far, and the pointer information “32” means that the moving image data has been updated so far. This means that images have been updated 32 times using 271a to 271c.

  One type of moving image data 271a to 271c is set in correspondence with each piece of pointer information corresponding to switching. As described above, in the first moving image data group 261, the moving image data 271a in the first order corresponds to the start timing of the angle display effect, and the moving image data 271a in the subsequent order is the moving image data 271a in the previous order. On the other hand, this corresponds to the timing at which the moving image display proceeds by the number of still image data that can be displayed using one moving image data 271a. Therefore, in the first moving image data group 261, the moving image data 271a in the first order is not set in the moving image correspondence table 275, and the number of still image data that can be displayed using one moving image data 271a is set. On the other hand, pointer information corresponding to each value multiplied by an integer is set as pointer information for switching. Then, for each of the pointer information corresponding to each switching, information on the type of the corresponding moving image data 271a, specifically, an area in which each moving image data 271a is expanded in the moving image data area 211b of the VRAM 204. Address information is set.

  As described above, each moving image data 271b of the second moving image data group 262 corresponds to the timing at which moving image display proceeds for the first reference period K1 with respect to each moving image data 271a of the first moving image data group 261. doing. Therefore, for the second moving image data group 262, as the pointer information corresponding to the switching of the moving image data 271b in the first order, the timing at which the moving image display progresses for the first reference period K1 with respect to the start timing of the angle display effect. Pointer information is set. For the moving image data 271b after the first order in the second moving image data group 262, pointer information corresponding to each switching set in the moving image data 271a of the first moving image data group 261 as the switching corresponding pointer information. On the other hand, the pointer information of the timing at which the moving image display has progressed for the first reference period K1 is set.

  As described above, each moving image data 271c of the third moving image data group 263 corresponds to the timing at which moving image display proceeds for the second reference period K2 with respect to each moving image data 271a of the first moving image data group 261. doing. Therefore, for the third moving image data group 263, as the pointer information corresponding to the switching of the moving image data 271c in the first order, the timing at which the moving image display progresses for the second reference period K2 with respect to the start timing of the angle display effect. Pointer information is set. In addition, for the moving image data 271c after the first order in the third moving image data group 263, the pointer information corresponding to each switching set in the moving image data 271a of the first moving image data group 261 as the switching corresponding pointer information. On the other hand, the pointer information at the timing when the moving image display has progressed for the second reference period K2 is set.

  Returning to the explanation of the calculation processing for angle display effects (FIG. 101), after reading the moving image correspondence table 275, the moving image data 271a to 273c to be read and executed for decoding are grasped (step S4110). For the grasping, a target moving image counter provided in the work RAM 202 is referred to. The target moving image counter is a counter for the display CPU 201 to specify which moving image data groups 261 to 269 are to be read at the read timing of the moving image data 271a to 273c. The case where the value of the target moving image counter is “0” corresponds to the first moving image data group 261, 264, 267, and the case where the value of the target moving image counter is “1” is the second moving image data group 262, 265. , 268, and the value of the target moving image counter is “2” corresponds to the third moving image data group 263, 266, 269. In step S4110, based on the value of the target moving image counter, the type of moving image data groups 261 to 269 to be read is specified in the moving image correspondence table 275 read in step S4109. Of the pointer information corresponding to the switching set for the moving image data groups 261 to 269 to be read, the pointer information is larger than the current pointer information in the angle display effect and becomes the current pointer information. On the other hand, the information of the moving image data 271a to 273c set in correspondence with the pointer information corresponding to switching of the closest value is grasped. Thereby, the display CPU 201 grasps information on the moving image data 271a to 273c to be read this time and to be decoded.

  Thereafter, “3” is set in the timing counter of the work RAM 202 (step S4111), and the decode designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4112). When these processes are executed, decoding designation information is set in the current drawing list, and address information and moving images of the memory module 203 in which the moving image data 271a to 273c grasped in step S4110 are stored. In the data area 211b, an address of an area where the moving image data 271a to 273c is developed as still image data is set. The VDP 205 that has received the drawing list executes the decoding process (FIG. 103) as described above, thereby reading the moving image data 271a to 273c to be read from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b. The decoding process is executed, and each still image data after the decoding process is written in the designated area in the moving image data area 211b.

  On the other hand, in the calculation processing for the angle display effect (FIG. 101), when “1” is set in the operation acceptance flag of the work RAM 202 at the decode startable timing (step S4105 and step S4106: YES), the operation concerned The acceptance flag is cleared to “0” (step S4113), and the switching reference table 276 is read from the memory module 203 to the work RAM 202 (step S4114). The switching reference table 276 indicates the switching destination angle and the types of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 in relation to the current angle and the types of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 when the angle is changed based on the operation of the effect operating device 48. It is a table for specifying.

  FIG. 104B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the switching reference table 276. As shown in FIG. 104 (b), pointer information corresponding to switching is set as information for specifying the timing at which switching to new moving image data 271a to 273c can occur. The content of the pointer information is the same as the content described for the moving image correspondence table 275 in FIG. The pointer information corresponding to the switching is set in correspondence with the switchable timing of each of the first moving image data group 261, 264, 267, the second moving image data group 262, 265, 268 and the third moving image data group 263, 266, 269. Has been. Specifically, the pointer information corresponding to the first switching is set to pointer information at a timing when the moving image display has progressed for the first reference period K1 with respect to the start timing of the angle display effect. The pointer information at the timing at which the display of the moving image has progressed for the first reference period K1 with respect to the pointer information corresponding to the previous switching is set.

  For the pointer information corresponding to each switching, information on the correspondence relationship between the current angle, the switching destination angle, and the combination of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 is set. Specifically, as described above, when the angle is changed in response to the operation of the production operation device 48, A angle → B angle → C angle → A angle → B angle → C angle → A angle →. Angle switching occurs in this order. The switchable timing to the first moving image data group 261, 264, 267, the switchable timing to the second moving image data group 262, 265, 268, and the switchable timing to the third moving image data group 263, 266, 269 are as follows. This is as described for the moving image correspondence table 275 in FIG. Therefore, the correspondence is as shown in FIG.

  Returning to the description of the calculation processing for the angle display effect (FIG. 101), after reading the switching reference table 276, the setting processing of the angle counter and the target moving image counter is executed based on the switching reference table 276 (step S4115). In the setting process, among the switching compatible pointer information set in the switching reference table 276, the switching corresponding to the value closest to the current pointer information is larger than the current pointer information in the angle display effect. The pointer information is specified, and the information set in correspondence with the current angle is specified in the pointer information corresponding to the switching. For example, when the current pointer information in the angle display effect is “10” and the current angle is the A angle, the B angle information is specified as the switching destination angle information based on the switching reference table 276, and the switching is performed. The information of the second moving image data group 265 is specified as the information of the previous moving image data groups 261 to 269. Also, for example, when the current pointer information in the angle display effect is “68” and the current angle is the C angle, the information of the A angle is specified as the angle information of the switching destination based on the switching reference table 276, The information of the third moving image data group 263 is specified as the information of the moving image data groups 261 to 269 of the switching destination. The specified angle information of the switching destination is set in the angle counter, and the information of the specified moving destination data group 261 to 269 is set in the target moving image counter.

  After executing the processing of step S4113 to step S4115, the processing of step S4109 to step S4112 already described is executed. In this case, in step S4109, the moving image correspondence table 275 corresponding to the value of the angle counter newly set in step S4115 is read, and in step S4110, the value of the target moving image counter newly set in step S4115 is handled. The moving image data 271a to 273c to be grasped.

  In the calculation process for the angle display effect, it is determined whether or not it is time to change the type of the moving image data 271a to 273c (step S4116). When the processing of step S4109 to step S4112 is executed, “1” is set to the change trigger flag provided in the work RAM 202. In step S4116, when the change trigger flag is set to “1” and the switching timing of the moving image data 271a to 273c comes, the timing for changing the type of the moving image data 271a to 273c. Affirmative determination is made. The switchable timing of the moving image data 271a to 273c is as described above, and the first switchable timing corresponds to the timing at which the moving image display proceeds for the first reference period K1 with respect to the start timing of the angle display effect. The subsequent switchable timing corresponds to the timing at which the moving image display proceeds for the first reference period K1 with respect to the immediately preceding switchable timing.

  If it is time to change the moving image data 271a to 273c (step S4116: YES), the value of the frame counter provided in the work RAM 202 is cleared to “0” (step S4117). If an affirmative determination is made in step S4116, the change trigger flag is cleared to “0”. The frame counter is a counter for the display CPU 201 to specify which of the still image data of the moving image data 271a to 273c developed in the moving image data area 211b of the VRAM 204 is to be used. It is. When the value of the frame counter is “0”, still image data in the first order in one piece of developed moving image data 271a to 273c is grasped as a use target. Further, when still image data is grasped as an object of use in step S4118 described later, the frame counter value is incremented by 1, and in the next step S4118, still images in the order corresponding to the frame counter value after the increment of 1 is added. Data is grasped as a target of use.

  If a negative determination is made in step S4116, or if the process of step S4117 is executed, still image data corresponding to the value of the frame counter in the work RAM 202 is grasped as image data used at the current update timing (step S4118). . In this case, 1 is added to the value of the frame counter. In addition, other image data necessary for displaying an image corresponding to the current update timing is grasped (step S4119), and parameter information applied to the image data grasped in step S4118 and step S4119 is calculated. Derived (step S4120). Then, the angle effect information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4121).

  When the calculation process for the angle display effect is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S2407) includes various image data grasped in step S4118 and step S4119. Is set as the placement target in the world coordinate system. In the drawing list, parameter information to be applied to these various image data is set. In addition, angle effect information is set in the drawing list.

  When the VDP 205 receives the drawing list, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 105 as the angle display effect setting process, the VDP 205 first grasps the still image data grasped in step S4118 (step S4401), and then step S4119. The other image data grasped in the step is grasped (step S4402). Further, the parameter information grasped in step S4120 is grasped (step S4403). Then, the image data grasped in step S4401 and step S4402 is set in the world coordinate system in a state where the parameter information grasped in step S4403 is applied (step S4404). As a result, drawing data for displaying an angle display effect image is finally created, and the angle display effect image is displayed on the symbol display device 41. The setting process for the angle display effect is executed in the effect setting process in step S2603 in the drawing process (FIG. 70) when the drawing list in which the angle effect information is set is received.

  As described above, each moving image data group 261 to 269 includes a plurality of moving image data 271a to 273c, so that the moving image data 271a to 273c in a predetermined order and the moving image data 271a to 273c in the next order are included. The switching timing can be used as the angle change timing. Therefore, the angle type can be changed among the A angle, the B angle, and the C angle during the execution of the angle display effect.

  In addition, the moving image data 271a to 273c has a data amount set so that the minimum number of units of still image data that can be set as moving image data can be reproduced. Thereby, it is possible to set many timings at which the moving image data 271a to 273c to be used can be switched. Further, according to this configuration, it is possible to reduce the amount of image data read at a time.

  A plurality of moving image data groups 261 to 269 for displaying the same moving image at each of the angles A to C are provided. In each angle, the second moving image data group 262, 265, 268 is smaller than the minimum unit number of still image data that can be set as moving image data 271a to 273c with respect to the first moving image data group 261, 264, 267. And the third moving image data group 263, 266, 269 can be set as moving image data 271a to 273c with respect to the second moving image data group 262, 265, 268. There is a shift of the first reference period K1 corresponding to a number smaller than the minimum unit number of data. Accordingly, it is possible to cause many switching timings between the moving image data 271a to 273c in a predetermined order and the moving image data 271a to 273c in the next order at each angle. This makes it possible to change the angle at an early stage.

  The moving image data 271a to 273c is not read out for each angle to be selected, but is used in the situation where one moving image data 271a to 273c is decoded and used. When it is time to decode the moving image data 271a to 273c, the moving image data 271a to 273c to be used is read and decoded. As a result, the storage capacity necessary for reading the moving image data 271a to 273c in the moving image data area 211b of the VRAM 204 can be suppressed.

  In a situation where one moving image data 271a to 273c is decoded and used, the moving image data 271a to 273c to be used next is read and decoded. Accordingly, when new moving image data 271a to 273c are to be used, it is possible to prevent a waiting time for decoding the moving image data 271a to 273c from occurring.

  In the configuration in which the angle is changed based on the operation of the production operation device 48, even if the operation timing of the production operation device 48 is before the switching timing of the moving image data 271a to 273c, it is after the decoding start timing. In such a case, the change of the angle with respect to the operation of the effect operating device 48 occurs not at the immediately switchable timing but at the next switchable timing with respect to the immediately switchable timing. This makes it possible to smoothly switch the angle with respect to the operation of the effect operating device 48.

<Another form of angle display effect>
The number of images that can be displayed by one moving image data 271a to 273c is not limited to the same configuration, and the number of images that can be displayed by at least some moving image data is other moving images. It is good also as a structure different from data. In this case, it is necessary to set the timing for switching to the new video data 271a to 273c and the timing for starting decoding according to the types of the video data 271a to 273c.

  In a configuration in which moving image display using moving image data is started when the production operating device 48 is operated during the operation effective period, the moving image display starts from the timing corresponding to the elapsed time from the start timing of the operation effective period. A moving image data group capable of displaying a series of specific moving images and another moving image data group capable of displaying a moving image starting from a timing in the middle of the specific moving images with respect to the configuration to be started A configuration in which and are provided individually may be applied.

  The number of moving image data groups prepared for one angle is not limited to three types, and may be two types or four or more types. Moreover, the types of angles are not limited to three types, and may be two types or four or more types.

<Configuration for performing special video use effects>
Next, a configuration for performing a special moving image use effect will be described.

  The special moving image use effect is an effect that uses the special moving image data 282 when displaying an image on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 106 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the special moving image data 282. FIG. 106 (a) shows the normal moving image data 281 such as the moving image data 271a to 273c already described, and FIG. 106 (b). Indicates special moving image data 282.

  As shown in FIG. 106A, in the normal moving image data 281, file data is set at the first address, and subsequently, compressed data of each frame is set. The compressed data of each frame is accompanied by a frame header. The compressed data includes one frame of I picture data corresponding to the reference data, a plurality of frames of P picture data corresponding to the first difference data, and a plurality of frames of B picture data corresponding to the second difference data. And have.

  The I picture data is data that can create still image data for one frame by the data alone at the time of decoding. P picture data is data that can generate still image data for one frame by performing forward prediction with reference to I picture data or P picture data of one frame or a plurality of frames before decoding. . B picture data is decoded by bi-directional prediction with reference to I picture data or P picture data before one frame or plural frames and I picture data or P picture data after one frame or plural frames. This is data that can create still image data for one frame.

  In the compressed data in the normal moving image data 281, I picture data is set as the data of the first frame. In addition, B picture data is set as data of the second frame,..., M−1 frame. Also, P picture data is set as the data of the mth frame. Further, B picture data is set as data of the (m + 1) th frame,..., The (n−1) th frame. Also, P picture data is set as the nth frame data. Note that the arrangement pattern of the picture data is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary.

  By executing the decoding process on the normal moving image data 281, still image data 283 a to 283 d (hereinafter referred to as normal decoded image data 283 a to 283 d) corresponding to a plurality of update timings from the normal moving image data 281 is stored in the VRAM 204. It is created in the moving image data area 211b. In this case, the normal decoded image data 283a to 283d are image data in which the contents of some of the images displayed by the normal decoded image data 283a to 283d are different from each other.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 106B, in the special moving image data 282, file data is set at the first address, and subsequently, I-picture data for one frame corresponding to the reference data is set. No compressed data other than the I picture data is set. By performing decoding processing on the special moving image data 282, still image data 284 corresponding to a plurality of update timings from the special moving image data 282 (hereinafter referred to as special decoded image data 284) is stored in the moving image data area of the VRAM 204. 211b. However, the special decoded image data 284 has the same image data as the contents of the images displayed by the special decoded image data 284.

  The amount of data of the special moving image data 282 is set so that the minimum number of units of still image data that can be set as moving image data can be reproduced. Specifically, the special moving image data 282 can reproduce 48 still image data, in other words, 48 images can be updated (48 frames can be updated). ing. Therefore, when the special moving image data 282 is decoded, the same special decoded image data 284 as the content of the image is created for the minimum number of units. Note that the moving image data 271a to 273c corresponding to the normal moving image data 281 has a data amount set so that still image data corresponding to the minimum number of units that can be set as moving image data can be reproduced as described above. However, the normal moving image data 281 other than the moving image data 271a to 273c has a data amount set so that a larger number of still image data than the minimum unit number that can be set as moving image data can be created. Yes.

  The special moving image data 282 is stored in advance in the memory module 203 like the normal moving image data 281, but a plurality of types of special moving image data 282 are stored in the memory module 203. The content of the image by the special decoded image data 284 after the decoding process is different for each type of the special moving image data 282.

  The special decoded image data 284 is used as texture data. In this case, the memory module 203 stores in advance predetermined object data for applying the special decoded image data 284 as texture data. The type of the image displayed using the special decoded image data 284 and the predetermined object data is arbitrary. For example, a character image of an animal such as a person, cat, fish or dog may be displayed. It is also possible to display an individual image in the shape of an object.

  By setting the special moving image data 282 as described above, one texture data can be stored in the memory module 203 as moving image data. As already described, the texture data stored in the memory module 203 in advance as still image data is read from the memory module 203 when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 201 is started, and is used for developing the VRAM 204. It is written in the texture area 211a in the buffer 211. In this case, the required storage capacity in the texture area 211a increases as the type of texture data increases. On the other hand, every time the type of texture data to be used changes, the processing load of the VDP 205 increases if the type of texture data read to the texture area 211a is changed.

  On the other hand, by storing some of the texture data as the special moving image data 282, some texture data can be read out to the VRAM 204 as necessary while replacing the texture area 211a is unnecessary. It becomes. In addition, since texture data is not stored in the memory module 203 but is stored as special moving image data 282, texture data is created from the special moving image data 282 using the moving image data area 211b. Is possible. Furthermore, when the moving image data area 211b is also used as an area for using the texture data, the moving image data area 211b is not read with the texture data itself, but with the special moving image data 282. There is no need to change the handling of the moving image data area 211b in the VDP 205 according to the type of data read to the moving image data area 211b.

  Next, how the special moving image use effect is executed will be described with reference to the time chart of FIG. FIG. 107 (a) shows the supply start timing of the operating power, FIG. 107 (b) shows the reading period of the texture data from the memory module 203 to the texture area 211a, and FIG. 107 (c) shows the texture area 211a. FIG. 107 (d) shows the start timing of the special video use effect, and FIG. 107 (e) is the execution period of the special video use effect, and the special moving image data 282 is used. FIG. 107 (f) shows a previous period, FIG. 107 (f) shows a period for reading the special moving image data 282 from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b, and FIG. 107 (g) shows a period for using the special moving image data 282. .

  At the timing of t1, the operation power supply start timing to the display CPU 201 as shown in FIG. 107 (a) is reached, so that the texture data from the memory module 203 to the texture area 211a as shown in FIG. 107 (b). Is started, and the reading of the texture data is completed at the timing t2. As a result, as shown in FIG. 107 (c), while the supply of operating power to the VRAM 204 is continued, all the texture data stored in advance in the memory module 203 is stored and held in the texture area 211a. . Since the backup power is not supplied to the VRAM 204, the texture data cannot be stored and held in the texture area 211a when the supply of operating power to the display control device 200 is stopped.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t3, as shown in FIG. However, the use of the special moving image data 282 is not started at the timing t3. Therefore, at the timing of t3, the object data read from the memory module 203 to the area other than the texture area 211a and the moving image data area 211b in the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 and the texture at the start of supply of operating power as necessary. Drawing data is created using the texture data read to the area 211a, and an image is displayed on the symbol display device 41 using the drawing data.

  Thereafter, at the timing of t4, as shown in FIG. 107 (f), the reading timing of the special moving image data 282 from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b is started at the timing of reading the special moving image data 282. At the same time, a decoding process is performed on the special moving image data 282 read out to the moving image data area 211b. At time t5, the decoding process of the special moving image data 282 is completed, and a plurality of special decoded image data 284 created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 282 is used for moving image data. It is written in the area 211b.

  At the timing t5 when the decoding process of the special moving image data 282 is completed, the display of the image using the special decoded image data 284 is started as shown in FIG. 107 (g). In this case, the special decoded image data 284 is used as texture data to be pasted to predetermined object data, and the predetermined decoded object data and special decoded image data 284 are projected onto the virtual two-dimensional plane. Drawing data is created. Then, an image is displayed using the special decoded image data 284 by displaying the image on the symbol display device 41 using the drawing data. Thereafter, the display of the image using the special moving image data 282 ends at the timing of t6.

  Hereinafter, a specific processing configuration for executing the special moving image use effect will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing a calculation process for special moving image use effects executed by the display CPU 201. It should be noted that the calculation process for the special movie use effect is executed in the effect calculation process in step S2504 in the task process (FIG. 68) in the game times where the special movie use effect is to be executed.

  If it is not the use period of the special moving image data 282 (step S4501: NO), the special moving image data 282 is read by referring to the execution target table read to the work RAM 202 in order to perform execution control of the special moving image use effect. It is determined whether or not it is a read timing (step S4502). If it is the read timing of the special moving image data 282 (step S4502: YES), the special moving image data 282 to be read and executed for decoding processing is grasped (step S4502). Note that there are a plurality of types of special movie use effects, and the type of special moving image data 282 to be used is different for each type of special movie use effect. Further, the decode designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4504).

  Thereafter, various image data necessary for displaying an image corresponding to the current update timing is grasped (step S4505), and parameter information applied to the image data is calculated and derived (step S4506). Then, the special moving image use effect information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4507). Note that the various image data grasped in step S4505 includes the object data stored in the memory module 203 and the texture data read out to the texture area 211a.

  When the calculation process for the special moving image use effect is executed as described above, various image data grasped in step S4505 are displayed in the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S2407). Set as an object to be placed in the coordinate system. In the drawing list, parameter information to be applied to these various image data is set. Also, special moving image use effect information is set in the drawing list.

  When the decode designation information is stored in the register of the display CPU 201, the decode designation information is set in the drawing list and the special moving image data 282 grasped in step S4503 is stored. The address information of the memory module 203 and the address of the area where the special moving image data 282 is developed as the special decoded image data 284 in the moving image data area 211b are set. In this case, the VDP 205 reads the special moving image data 282 of the type specified in the drawing list from the memory module 203 to the moving image data area 211b, and executes the decoding process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

  Specifically, the address of the special moving image data 282 is grasped from the information specified in the drawing list (step S4301), and the special moving image data 282 is converted into the special decoded image data from the information specified in the drawing list. The address of the area to be developed as 284 is grasped (step S4302). Then, the special moving image data 282 is read from the address of the memory module 203 grasped in step S4301, and the special moving image data 282 is decoded. Then, a plurality of special decoded image data 284 of the decoding result is written in each area of the address of the moving image data area 211b grasped in step S4302 (step S4303). As a result, all the special decoded image data 284 created from the special moving image data 282 is written in the moving image data area 211b.

  Returning to the description of the calculation process for the special moving image use effect (FIG. 108), when it is the usage period of the special moving image data 282 (step S4501: YES), the special decoded image data 284 corresponding to the value of the frame counter of the work RAM 202. Is grasped as image data to be used at the current update timing (step S4508). The frame counter is for the display CPU 201 to specify which of the special decoded image data 284 of the special moving image data 282 expanded in the moving image data area 211b is to be used. It is a counter. The frame counter is also used when the normal moving image data 281 is used such as an angle display effect. Also, when the use period of the special moving image data 282 is started, the value of the frame counter is “0”, and when the value of the frame counter is “0”, the first order in the special moving image data 282 is set. The special decoded image data 284 is grasped as a use target. Further, when the special decoded image data 284 is grasped as an object of use in step S4508, the value of the frame counter is incremented by 1, and in the next step S4508, the special decoding in the order corresponding to the value of the frame counter after the addition of 1 is performed. Image data 284 is grasped as a use target.

  Here, as described above, a plurality of special decoded image data 284 created by executing decoding processing on one type of special moving image data 282 are all the same image data, and the special decoded image data 284 is referred to as the special decoded image data 284. The contents of the images displayed using the same are the same. On the other hand, when the special decoded image data 284 is used as texture data, the special decoded image data 284 corresponding to the value of the frame counter is used instead of always using one special decoded image data 284. Accordingly, it is possible to use the same processing configuration as that in the case of displaying an image using the normal moving image data 281.

  Thereafter, other image data necessary for displaying an image corresponding to the current update timing is grasped (step S4509). In this case, the image data includes predetermined object data to which the special decoded image data 284 is applied. Thereafter, parameter information to be applied to the image data grasped in step S4508 and step S4509 is calculated and derived (step S4510), and use instruction information of the special moving image data is stored in the register of the display CPU 201 (step S4511).

  When the calculation process for the special moving image use effect is executed as described above, the drawing list transmitted to the VDP 205 in the subsequent drawing list output process (step S2407) includes various images grasped in step S4508 and step S4509. Data is set as an object to be placed in the world coordinate system. In the drawing list, parameter information to be applied to these various image data is set. In addition, use instruction information of special moving image data is set in the drawing list.

  When the VDP 205 receives the drawing list in which the special moving image use effect information or the special moving image data use instruction information is set, the VDP 205 executes a special moving image use effect setting process. In the special moving image use effect setting process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 109, when the special moving image data use instruction information is set (step S4601: YES), the special decoding grasped in step S4508 is performed. The image data 284 is grasped (step S4602). In addition, other image data grasped in step S4509 is grasped (step S4603), and parameter information grasped in step S4510 is grasped (step S4604). Then, the image data grasped in step S4602 and step S4603 is set in the world coordinate system in a state where the parameter information grasped in step S4604 is applied (step S4605). As a result, drawing data for displaying an image for special movie use effect using the special decoded image data 284 as texture data is finally created, and the image for special movie use effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Will be. It should be noted that the setting process for the special video use effect is for the effect in step S2603 in the drawing process (FIG. 70) when the drawing list in which the special video use effect information or the special moving image data use instruction information is set is received. It is executed in the setting process.

  By setting the special moving image data 282 as described above, one texture data can be stored in the memory module 203 as moving image data. As already described, the texture data stored in the memory module 203 in advance as still image data is read from the memory module 203 when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 201 is started, and is used for developing the VRAM 204. It is written in the texture area 211a in the buffer 211. In this case, the required storage capacity in the texture area 211a increases as the type of texture data increases. On the other hand, every time the type of texture data to be used changes, the processing load of the VDP 205 increases if the type of texture data read to the texture area 211a is changed.

  On the other hand, by storing some of the texture data as the special moving image data 282, some texture data can be read out to the VRAM 204 as necessary while replacing the texture area 211a is unnecessary. It becomes. In addition, since texture data is not stored in the memory module 203 but is stored as special moving image data 282, texture data is created from the special moving image data 282 using the moving image data area 211b. Is possible. Furthermore, when the moving image data area 211b is also used as an area for using the texture data, the moving image data area 211b is not read with the texture data itself, but with the special moving image data 282. There is no need to change the handling of the moving image data area 211b in the VDP 205 according to the type of data read to the moving image data area 211b.

  The number of special decoded image data 284 created by executing decoding processing on the special moving image data 282 is one. As a result, unnecessary image data can be prevented from being created.

  A plurality of special decoded image data 284 created by executing a decoding process on one type of special moving image data 282 are all the same image data, and an image displayed using the special decoded image data 284 is displayed. The contents are the same. On the other hand, when the special decoded image data 284 is used as texture data, the special decoded image data 284 corresponding to the value of the frame counter is used instead of always using one special decoded image data 284. Accordingly, it is possible to use the same processing configuration as that in the case of displaying an image using the normal moving image data 281.

  The special moving image data 282 includes only I picture data, and does not include difference data such as B picture data and P picture data. As a result, the data structure of the special moving image data 282 can be simplified.

  The special moving image data 282 is set as the minimum amount of data that can be set as moving image data. As a result, the data capacity of the special moving image data 282 can be kept small.

<Another form regarding the use of special video>
-Not only texture data but also object data may be read from the memory module 203 to the expansion buffer 211 of the VRAM 204 when the supply of operating power to the display CPU 201 is started. In this case, since it is not necessary to read the object data to the VRAM 204 at an appropriate timing, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the VDP 205 at each drawing data creation timing.

  Although a plurality of types of image data are created by executing decoding processing on the special moving image data 282, only one or some of them may be used. Even in this case, the texture data can be handled as moving image data.

  A configuration may be adopted in which only one piece of image data is created by performing a decoding process on the special moving image data 282. In this case, the storage capacity for storing the image data created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 282 can be reduced.

  The special moving image data 282 may have a configuration in which only the same I picture data is set, and when the special moving image data 282 is decoded, image data corresponding to the number of I picture data is created. .

  A plurality of the same type of image data is created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data 282, but only one of the image data may be used. In this case, only one image data among a plurality of image data created by executing the decoding process may be stored and held in the moving image data area 211b, and the rest may be deleted.

  A separate storage area is provided in the development buffer 211 of the VRAM 204, and all or part of the image data created in the moving image data area 211b by executing decoding processing on the special moving image data 282 is stored in the separate storage area. It is good also as a structure transferred. In this case, the image data can be stored and held in the separate storage area even after use, and the special moving image data 282 is configured to read the image data from the separate storage area for the next use. There is no need to perform the decoding process again for.

  The special moving image data 282 includes difference data such as B picture data and P picture data, but the difference data may be set so that the difference becomes “0”. Even in this case, a plurality of the same type of special decoded image data 284 can be created.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of embodiment mentioned above, A various deformation | transformation improvement is possible within the range which does not deviate from the meaning of this invention. For example, you may change as follows. Incidentally, the configuration of another embodiment described below may be applied individually or in combination to the configuration of the above embodiment.

  (1) The processing configuration of the sound light side MPU 62, the processing configuration of the display CPU 72, and the processing configuration of the VDP 76 in the first embodiment are configured to display a 3D image on the symbol display device 41 as in the second embodiment. You may apply to. Further, the processing configuration of the sound light side MPU 62, the processing configuration of the display CPU 201, and the processing configuration of the VDP 205 in the second embodiment are configured to display a 2D image on the symbol display device 41 as in the first embodiment. You may apply.

  (2) In the second embodiment, the camera (viewpoint) is individually set for each image data arranged in the world coordinate system, but instead, all cameras arranged in the world coordinate system are used. A single camera may be commonly set for image data.

  (3) In the second embodiment, the image data arranged in the world coordinate system is projected in units of the background image, the effect image, and the design image. May be configured to be projected together, may be configured to be projected together in units of effect images and design images, or may be configured to be projected all together.

  (4) In the second embodiment, when the color information setting process (step S2609) is performed, the color information may be set such that the texture is pasted only on the projected surface. In this case, the rendering processing load can be reduced. Alternatively, instead of setting color information such as texture mapping before projection, color information such as texture mapping may be set after projection. In this case, at the time of projection, coordinate information of each pixel constituting the projection plane may be stored, and color information such as texture mapping may be set based on the coordinate information.

  (5) Display control based on a command transmitted from the main control device 50 instead of a configuration in which the display control device 90 is controlled by the sound emission control device 60 based on a command transmitted from the main control device 50 The device 90 may be configured to control the sound emission control device 60. In addition, instead of the configuration in which the sound emission control device 60 and the display control device 90 are separately provided, the two control devices may be provided as one control device, and one of the two control devices has a function. May be integrated into the main controller 50, and both functions of these two controllers may be integrated into the main controller 50. The configuration of the command transmitted from the main control device 50 to the sound emission control device 60 and the configuration of the command transmitted from the sound emission control device 60 to the display control device 90 are also arbitrary.

  (6) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right if a player enters, a pachinko machine equipped with other objects, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and other gaming machines.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the active line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body that is supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts rotating the reel.

<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 41a);
Display storage means (memory module 74) for storing image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 201, VDP 205) for displaying an image on the display unit using image data stored in the display storage means;
With
The display storage means is created by executing decoding processing, and special moving image data (special moving image data 282) that is one type of image data to be used by the display control means is the display storage means. A gaming machine characterized by being stored in

  According to the feature A1, the special moving image data having one type of image data to be used is provided by the display control means after the decoding process is performed. It can be handled as image data. This makes it possible to use the one type of image data without increasing the capacity of the image data similar to the one type of image data after the decoding.

  Feature A2. The gaming machine according to Feature A1, wherein the special moving image data is moving image data in which one type of image data is created by executing the decoding process.

  According to the feature A2, when the special moving image data is decoded, a plurality of types of image data are not generated, but one type of image data is generated. Therefore, unnecessary image data is generated. It is possible to achieve the effects as described above while avoiding being done.

  Feature A3. The game according to Feature A1 or A2, wherein the special moving image data is data in which a plurality of special image data (still image data 284) having the same content is created by executing the decoding process. Machine.

  According to the feature A3, when decoding processing is performed on special moving image data, a plurality of special image data having the same content is generated, and thus the same processing as image data generated from other moving image data is performed. The special image data having the same contents can be used at the update timing of a plurality of images.

  Feature A4. When the image update timing is a predetermined update timing, the display control means uses the special image data in a predetermined order created from the special moving image data, and performs the next to the predetermined update timing. The game machine according to Feature A3, wherein the special image data in the next order is used with respect to the predetermined order in the case of the update timing.

  According to the feature A4, a plurality of special image data having the same contents are created by executing a decoding process on the special moving image data, and the special image data is used in a predetermined order. Thus, the special image data created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data, the image data created by executing the decoding process on the moving image data other than the special moving image data, and It can be handled in the same way.

Feature A5. The moving image data other than the special moving image data includes reference data (I picture data) serving as a reference when the image data is created by executing the decoding process on the moving image data, and the reference data. Difference data (B picture data, P picture data) capable of creating image data different from the image data created by the reference data.
The game machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the special moving image data includes the reference data and does not include the difference data.

  According to the feature A5, since the special moving image data has the reference data and does not have the difference data, the data structure of the special moving image data in which only one type of image data is created when the decoding process is executed. Can be simplified. In addition, the data volume of the special moving image data can be reduced.

  Feature A6. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5, wherein the special moving image data is set as a minimum unit data amount that can be set as moving image data.

  According to the feature A6, the data volume of the special moving image data can be reduced.

Feature A7. The display control means executes predetermined processing on the predetermined image data (texture data) stored in the display storage means to display an image corresponding to the predetermined image data (step in the VDP 205). A function of executing the processing of S2609),
A configuration in which the predetermined process is performed on the special image data by the predetermined process execution unit when displaying an image corresponding to the special image data created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data And
When the image data is used in the display control means, the image data is read from the display storage means to the read storage means (VRAM 204).
The reading storage means includes a first reading area (texture area 211a) from which the predetermined image data is read, and a second reading area (moving image data area 211b) from which the special moving image data is read. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A6, wherein:

  According to the feature A7, when image data is used in the display control unit, the image data is not used directly from the display storage unit but is used after being once read out to the reading storage unit. For this reason, when the image data is used in the display control means by reading the image data into the reading storage means in advance, the image data can be used immediately. Further, the reading storage means is provided with a first reading area from which predetermined image data is read and a second reading area from which special moving image data is read, so that reading can be performed according to each application. An area is set, and when image data is used in the display control means, it is possible to designate an area according to the type of the image data.

  In this case, the configuration of the feature A1 is provided, and only one type of special image data is used in the display control means, but the special image data is displayed as special moving image data, not as predetermined image data. It is stored in the storage means. As a result, the special image data is read not to the first reading area but to the second reading area, so that it is not necessary to secure an area for using the special image data in the first reading area. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the first read area.

Feature A8. The display storage means stores a plurality of types of the predetermined image data,
The gaming machine is
First read execution means (a function of executing the processing of step S2402 in the display CPU 201) that reads all of the plurality of types of the predetermined image data to the first read area when the predetermined read timing is reached;
In a situation where image data corresponding to moving image data other than the special moving image data is stored in the second reading area, when storing image data corresponding to the special moving image data in the second reading area, Second read execution means (a function for executing decoding processing in the VDP 205) for overwriting the image data already stored in the second read area with the image data;
The gaming machine according to Feature A7, comprising:

  According to the feature A8, since all of the plural types of predetermined image data are read to the first reading area, it is not necessary to read the predetermined image data as necessary. On the other hand, moving image data is read as needed in the second reading area, and when new moving image data is read, the second reading area is overwritten. This makes it possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the second read area. In this case, the configuration of the feature A1 is provided, and only one type of special image data is used in the display control means, but the special image data is displayed as special moving image data, not as predetermined image data. It is stored in the storage means. As a result, the special image data is read not to the first reading area but to the second reading area, so that it is not necessary to secure an area for using the special image data in the first reading area. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the storage capacity required in the first read area.

  Feature A9. The gaming machine according to Feature A8, wherein the first read execution unit reads all of the plurality of types of the predetermined image data to the first read area when supply of operating power is started.

  According to the feature A9, it is possible to cause a state in which all of a plurality of types of predetermined image data are read to the first reading area at an early stage.

  Feature A10. Any one of features A1 to A9 is characterized in that the special image data created by executing the decoding process on the special moving image data is texture data used for displaying a three-dimensional image. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature A10, when the texture data is used, an excellent effect as described above can be obtained.

  In addition, with respect to any one configuration of the features A1 to A10, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. Any one or a plurality of configurations of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 41a);
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display unit;
In a gaming machine equipped with
Data that determines the display mode of the individual image at each update timing of the image when the display unit performs specific variation display on the individual image (the symbols displayed in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3) for a predetermined period of time. Information storage means (memory module) that stores in advance the mode determination information (execution target table T10 for the acceleration period, execution target table T11 for the first high speed period, execution target table T12 for the first low speed period) 74)
The display control means includes
Object determination means (display CPU 72) that determines at least one of the types of the individual images to which the mode determination information is applied in the plurality of types of individual images and the order in which the mode determination information is applied to the plurality of types of individual images. In step S908 and step S1011).
Application execution means (function of executing the processing of steps S1012 to S1014 in the display CPU 72) for performing the specific variation display by applying the mode determination information according to the content determined by the target determination means;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature B1, the mode determination information is commonly applied to a plurality of types of individual images. As a result, the mode determination information can be commonly used for various situations in which the specific variation display is executed, and the number of mode determination information can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity necessary for storing the mode determination information in the information storage unit.

Feature B2. When the specific variation display is newly started, the individual image of the type displayed at the start of the specific variation display is controlled to display the variation display in a predetermined variation start mode, and is displayed at the start. The type of the individual image to be changed is a configuration that can change,
As the mode determination information, at least information for causing the individual image to perform a variation display according to the predetermined variation start mode is set,
The object determining means applies the mode determination information to a plurality of types of individual images according to the type of the individual images displayed at the start of the specific variation display, and the types of the individual images and the plurality of types of the images The gaming machine according to Feature B1, wherein at least one of the order in which the mode determination information is applied to an individual image is determined.

  According to the feature B2, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the specific variation display has been started by making the variation display mode at the start of the specific variation display constant in a predetermined variation start mode. . In addition, even when the variation display mode at the start of the specific variation display is constant, the specific variation display is started by changing the type of the individual image displayed at the start. It is possible to diversify the aspects in (1).

  In this configuration, the mode determination information is set with information for causing the individual image to be displayed in a predetermined manner at the start of the specific variation display, and is displayed at the start of the specific variation display. At least one of the type of the individual image to which the mode determination information is applied and the order of the individual images is determined in a mode corresponding to the type of individual image. Thereby, even if the type of the individual image displayed at the start of the specific variation display can be changed, it is possible to commonly use the mode determination information for performing the specific variation display.

  Feature B3. The individual image of a type corresponding to the type of the individual image that was displayed when the specific variation display ended last time is displayed at the start of the specific variation display in the next execution time. A gaming machine according to Feature B2.

  According to the feature B3, since the individual image of the type corresponding to the type of the individual image displayed when the specific variation display was completed last time is displayed at the start of the specific variation display in the next execution time, the specific variation is displayed. When the display is repeatedly executed, continuity can be given to each execution time of the specific variation display. In this case, at the start of the specific variation display, the type of individual image for which the variation display is started according to the predetermined variation start mode is different. Even in a configuration in which the type of the individual image displayed at the start of the variable display can be changed, it is possible to use in common the mode determination information for performing the specific variable display.

Feature B4. In the mode determination information, mode information (task contents) for determining the mode of the specific variation display is set in time series,
The target determining means changes the type of the individual image to which each of the aspect information is applied, and the type of the individual image to be executed of the specific variation display changes with the progress of the specific variation display. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein the game machine is determined in accordance with the situation.

  According to the feature B4, the aspect information set in time series in the aspect determination information is applied even if the type of the individual image to be executed for the specific fluctuation display changes with the progress of the specific fluctuation display. The type of individual image to be processed is determined. As a result, it is possible to use the mode determination information in common even in a configuration in which the type of individual image to be subjected to the specific variation display changes with the progress of the specific variation display.

  Feature B5. Any one of the characteristics B1 to B4, wherein the mode determination information is set as information corresponding to a period longer than a longest duration assumed as a situation in which the mode determination information is used. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature B5, the mode determination information can be used in common regardless of the duration of various situations in which the mode determination information is used.

  Feature B6. The duration of the situation in which the mode determination information is used is a predetermined timing from one switching timing to the next switching timing of the individual image type to which the mode determination information is applied. The gaming machine according to Feature B5, wherein the game machine is set so as to end use of the aspect determination information.

  In the case where the mode determination information is set corresponding to the duration of various situations in which the mode determination information is used, the mode determination is performed in the middle of the time-series information set in the mode determination information. It is assumed that the next control information is to be used as the end timing of the usage information. In this case, according to the feature B6, the end timing of use of the mode determination information is determined in advance from one switching timing to the next switching timing of the individual image type to which the mode determination information is applied. It will be the timing. As a result, it is possible to make the situation where the use of the next control information starts constant, and the design of the control information can be facilitated.

  In addition, “predetermined timing from one switching timing to the next switching timing of the individual image type to which the mode determination information is applied” includes “the application target of the mode determination information” The timing at which the type of the individual image is switched is also included.

Feature B7. The aspect determining information is
A mode information group (task contents) in which mode information for determining the mode of the specific variation display is set in time series,
A target information group (display pattern adjustment area) in which a plurality of pieces of target information in which information of the type of the individual image to which the aspect information is applied is set in correspondence with the aspect information;
With
The target determining means sets the information of the type of the individual image for each of the target information included in the target information group when starting to use the mode determination information. The gaming machine according to any one of B1 to B6.

  According to the feature B7, since the mode information group and the target information group are set in the mode determination information, it is only necessary to refer to the mode determination information. It is possible to grasp the type of image. In this case, when the use of the mode determination information is started, the information of the individual image type is set for each of the target information included in the target information group of the mode determination information. Thereby, since it is not necessary to execute the process of adjusting the type of the individual image to be applied during the execution of the specific variation display, the processing configuration during the execution of the specific variation display can be simplified.

Feature B8. The specific variation display is configured to be performed in each of a plurality of variation display areas,
The game according to any one of features B1 to B7, wherein the mode determination information is commonly used as information for controlling the specific variation display in each of the plurality of variation display regions. Machine.

  According to the feature B8, since the mode determination information is commonly used for the specific variation display in each of the plurality of variation display areas, the number of the mode determination information can be suppressed.

  In addition, with respect to any one of the features B1 to B8, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. Any one or a plurality of configurations of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 41a);
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display unit;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means is a simultaneous display control means (in the display CPU 72) for causing the first type image (loop display character G4) and the second type image (loop display background G5) to be simultaneously displayed on the display unit. A function for executing a calculation process for a character loop and a calculation process for a background loop, VDP76),
The gaming machine includes first mode determination information (character movement table 123) in which first mode information for determining a display mode of the first type image is set in time series, and a display mode of the second type image. Information storing means (memory module 74) for storing in advance second mode determination information (background table 124) in which second mode information for determining the time is set in time series,
When simultaneously displaying the first type image and the second type image on the display unit, the simultaneous display control unit determines a display mode of the first type image according to the first mode determination information, and A gaming machine, wherein a display mode of the second type image is determined according to second mode determination information.

  According to the feature C1, in the configuration in which the first type image and the second type image are displayed at the same time, the mode determination information for determining the display mode of the first type image and the second type image is one mode. Rather than being provided as determination information, first mode determination information for determining the display mode of the first type image and second mode determination information for determining the display mode of the second type image Are provided separately. As a result, in the situation where one of the first type image and the second type image is stopped and displayed, the other is displayed in a variably displayed state, and then the image on the stopped and displayed side is changed from the stopped and displayed state. Even when the display is resumed, it is possible to independently control display of each type of image using each of the first mode determination information and the second mode determination information. Therefore, it is possible to suitably control the display effect in which both the first type image and the second type image are displayed simultaneously.

Feature C2. The first mode determination information is:
A first reference information group (pointer information) in which a plurality of pieces of first reference information in which reference objects by the simultaneous display control unit are sequentially updated each time the first type image is updated are set;
A first mode information group (task information) in which first mode information for determining a display mode of the first type image at each update timing of the first type image is set corresponding to each of the first reference information. Content) and
With
The second mode determination information is:
A second reference information group (pointer information) in which a plurality of second reference information in which reference objects by the simultaneous display control means are sequentially updated each time the second type image is updated is set;
A second mode information group (task information) in which second mode information for determining the display mode of the second type image at each update timing of the second type image is set corresponding to each of the second reference information. Content) and
The gaming machine according to Feature C1, further comprising:

  According to the feature C2, a dedicated first reference information group is set in the first mode determination information, and a dedicated second reference information group is set in the second mode determination information. Thereby, while not using one of the information for determining the first mode and the information for determining the second mode, the updating of the reference information to be the other reference target is continued, or the reference information to be the other reference target is changed. It is possible to hold the predetermined reference information.

Feature C3. The first mode determination information is information in which the first mode information for causing the first type image to be displayed in a first variation mode is set in time series,
The information storage means includes third mode determination information (character retention table 122) in which information for causing the first type image to be displayed in a variation mode different from the first variation mode is set in time series. Is stored in advance, and the gaming machine according to the feature C1 or C2.

  According to the feature C3, even when the first type image is displayed, different mode determination information is provided corresponding to the difference in the content of the variation mode. Thereby, when switching between the situation in which the first type image is displayed in the first variation mode and the situation in which the first type image is displayed in a variation mode different from the first variation mode, the mode to be used is determined. It is only necessary to switch the usage information between the first mode determination information and the third mode determination information, and it is possible to suitably switch these fluctuation modes.

Feature C4. The simultaneous display control means includes
First simultaneous display control means (steps S1102 to S1104, step S1109 to step S1113 and step S1113 in the display CPU 72) for controlling the display so that both the first type image and the second type image are variably displayed. S1202 to step S1206)
Second simultaneous display control means (steps S1105 to S1113 in the display CPU 72 and the display CPU72) controls the display so that one of the first type image and the second type image is variably displayed and the other is stopped and displayed. The function of executing the processing of step S1207 to step S1208),
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, wherein:

  According to the feature C4, there are a situation in which both the first type image and the second type image are variably displayed, and a situation in which one of the first type image and the second type image is variably displayed and the other is stopped. As a result, the display mode can be diversified even in a situation where both the first type image and the second type image are displayed. In this case, the configuration of the feature C1 is provided, and the first mode determination information and the second mode determination information are separately provided, so that when switching the display status, the first mode determination information and It is only necessary to switch the usage status of the second mode determination information, and it is possible to suitably switch the display status.

Feature C5. The first simultaneous display control means controls the display so that the first type image is displayed in a first variation mode, and the second type image is displayed in a second variation mode,
The second simultaneous display control means performs display control on the display unit so that the first type image performs display in a variation mode different from the first variation mode, and the second type image performs stop display.
The first mode determination information is information in which the first mode information for causing the first type image to be displayed according to the first variation mode is set in time series,
The information storage means stores in advance third mode determination information (character retention table 122) in which information for causing the first type image to be displayed according to the different variation modes is set in time series. The gaming machine according to Feature C4, wherein:

  According to the feature C5, the situation where the first type image is variably displayed according to the first variation mode and the second type image is variably displayed according to the second variation mode, and the first type image is different from the first variation mode. Diversification of display modes even in a situation where both the first type image and the second type image are displayed due to occurrence of a situation in which the second type image is stopped and displayed depending on the change mode Can be achieved. In this case, the first mode determination information and the third mode determination information are individually provided for the first type image, and the second mode determination information is individually provided for the second type image. ing. As a result, when switching the display status, the use target is switched between the first mode determination information and the third mode determination information for the first type image, and the second mode determination is performed for the second type image. It is only necessary to switch between a situation in which information to be used is updated and a situation in which it is fixed in the business information. Therefore, it is possible to suitably switch these display conditions.

Feature C6. In the first mode determination information, information necessary to display the first type image in a series of the first variation mode for one round is set in time series,
The simultaneous display control means can repeatedly display the series of first variation modes by the first type image by repeatedly using the first mode determination information. The gaming machine according to any one of C1 to C5.

  According to the feature C6, it is possible to repeatedly display a series of first variation modes on the first type image by repeatedly using the first mode determination information. If the information for variably displaying the first type image and the information for variably displaying the second type image are integrated and set as one aspect determining information, a series of first information is set in the first type image. When the display of the variation mode is completed and the next cycle is started, the first type image is displayed in the first type image as long as the display content for the first cycle is not displayed. It is necessary to set more information for displaying one variation mode than for one round. In this case, information for more than one round is wasted. On the other hand, since the configuration of the feature C1 is provided and the first mode determination information and the second mode determination information are individually provided, it is not necessary to set such useless information.

Feature C7. In the second mode determination information, information necessary to display the second type image in a series of second variation modes for one round is set in time series,
The simultaneous display control means can repeatedly display the series of second variation modes by the second type image by repeatedly using the second mode determination information,
The number of update timings of the first type image necessary for causing the first type image to be displayed in the first variation mode for one round, and the display of the second type image in the second variation mode is 1 The gaming machine according to Feature C6, wherein the number of update timings of the second type image necessary for performing the rounds differs.

  According to the feature C7, only the information corresponding to one round of each of the first variation mode and the second variation mode is provided by providing the first mode determination information and the second mode determination information separately. Can be set in each mode determination information, and there is no need to set useless information.

Feature C8. The simultaneous display control means includes
When the display of the first type image according to the first mode determination information is started, start information is set in a start information storage unit (linkage flag 125), and the first mode determination information is set according to the first mode determination information. Means for erasing the start information from the start information storage means when terminating the display of the first type image (function for executing the processing of steps S1103 and S1107 in the display CPU 72);
Means for displaying the second type image according to the second mode determination information when the start information is set in the start information storage means (affirmative determination is made in step S1201 in the display CPU 72) Function)
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C7, comprising:

  According to the feature C8, when the display of the first type image according to the first mode determination information is started, the start information is set and the start information is erased when the display is ended. Is set, the second type image is displayed according to the second mode determination information. Therefore, as long as the information on the use start timing of the first mode determination information is prepared in advance. The second mode determination information can be used in accordance with the use of the first mode determination information. This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information on the use start timing in the configuration in which the first mode determination information and the second mode determination information are individually provided.

  In addition, with respect to any one configuration of the features C1 to C8, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. Any one or a plurality of configurations of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 41a);
Display storage means (memory module 74) for storing image data in advance;
Creating drawing data based on setting the image data in the setting storage means (first frame area 82a, second frame area 82b), and outputting an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display unit,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means includes
First setting range control means (display CPU 72) configured to display the first setting range image by setting the range set in the setting storage means in the specific image data (decoded image data 132) to the first setting range. A function for executing the processing of steps S1307 to S1309 in VDP76),
Second setting range control means for displaying a second setting range image by setting a range to be set in the setting storage means in the specific image data to a second setting range different from the first setting range. (The function of executing the processing of steps S1311 to S1313 in the display CPU 72, VDP76);
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature D1, the first setting range image and the second setting range are changed by changing the range set in the setting storage unit between the first setting range and the second setting range while using the same specific image data. Each of the two setting range images can be displayed. This makes it possible to change the content of the displayed image even in a situation where the number of types of image data is small.

  Feature D2. The gaming machine according to Feature D1, wherein the first setting range and the second setting range partially overlap each other.

  According to the feature D2, since the first setting range and the second setting range partially overlap each other, the first setting range image and the second setting range image are used while using the same specific image data. A slight image change can be caused.

  Feature D3. The gaming machine according to feature D1 or D2, wherein the second setting range image is displayed at an update timing of the next image on which the first setting range image is displayed.

  According to the feature D3, when the second setting range image is displayed at the update timing of the next image after the first setting range image is displayed, the first setting range image and the second setting range image are converted into a series of images. Can be used.

Feature D4. The first setting range image and the second setting range image both include a predetermined individual image (group display character G11) as a display target, and the predetermined individual image is displayed so as to move in a predetermined direction. The first setting range image and the second setting range image are displayed on the screen,
The display position of the predetermined individual image included in the second setting range image is moved in the predetermined direction with respect to the display position of the predetermined individual image included in the first setting range image. The gaming machine according to Feature D3, wherein the first setting range and the second setting range are set so as to correspond to a display position.

  According to the feature D4, display of an image displayed so that a predetermined individual image moves in a predetermined direction can be realized with a small number of image data.

  Feature D5. The first setting range image and the second setting range image are images that display a large number of the predetermined individual images during an effect period in which a large number of the predetermined individual images are displayed. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature D5, since the first set range image and the second set range image using the same specific image data are displayed in a situation where a large number of predetermined individual images are displayed, the same specific image data is used. It becomes difficult to stand out.

Feature D6. The data size of the specific image data is set larger than the data size of the area to be displayed on the display unit in the setting storage unit,
Any one of the features D1 to D5, wherein the first setting range and the second setting range correspond to a range that fills an entire region to be displayed on the display unit in the setting storage unit. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature D6, it is possible to make the display of the first setting range image and the second setting range image inconspicuous using the same specific image data.

  Feature D7. The specific image data is any one of the features D1 to D6, wherein the specific image data is image data created by executing a decoding process on the moving image data stored in the display storage unit. The gaming machine described.

  Even if the number of image data created by executing decoding processing on moving image data is small with respect to the image update timing, the same specific image data is provided with the configuration of the feature D1. Since different images such as the first setting range image and the second setting range image can be displayed by using the same, it is possible to prevent the same image from being displayed between a plurality of update timings. .

Feature D8. A plurality of image data created by executing the decoding process on the moving image data includes image data for displaying a predetermined individual image so as to move in a predetermined direction, including the specific image data. And
The feature D7 is characterized in that the first setting range control means and the second setting range control means apply the first setting range and the second setting range to each of the plurality of image data. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature D8, a situation in which the number of image data created by executing decoding processing on moving image data is small with respect to the image update timing while using the same processing configuration is handled. It becomes possible to do.

Feature D9. A plurality of image data created by executing the decoding process on the moving image data includes image data for displaying a predetermined individual image so as to move in a predetermined direction, including the specific image data. And
The second setting range image is displayed at the update timing of the next image on which the first setting range image is displayed,
The second display position of the predetermined individual image included in the second setting range image is the second individual display position of the predetermined individual image relative to the first display position of the predetermined individual image included in the first setting range image. The first setting range and the second setting range are set so as to correspond to the display position moved in the direction,
In an image displayed next to the second set range image using next use image data to be used next to the specific image data among the plurality of image data, a display position of the predetermined individual image The predetermined individual image is the same or substantially the same movement amount as the movement amount from the first display position to the second display position with respect to the display position of the predetermined individual image in the second setting range image. The gaming machine according to Feature D7 or D8, wherein the display position is moved in the predetermined direction.

  According to the feature D9, even when the first setting range image and the second setting range image are displayed from the same specific image data, the amount of movement of the predetermined individual image in a predetermined direction between a plurality of update timings is determined. It becomes possible to make it constant.

  In addition, with respect to any one of the configurations of the features D1 to D9, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. Any one or a plurality of configurations of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 41a);
Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display unit;
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means includes
The first display contents (the size position information of the band image G24 and the position information of the blinking image G25) of the predetermined individual image at each update timing when the predetermined individual image (effective period image G22) is subjected to change display in a predetermined manner. First determination means for determining the first predetermined mode information for determining the first display content by using first predetermined mode determination information (band display table 145) set in time series (step in display CPU 72) S1606, step S1615 and step S1616)
The second display content of the predetermined individual image (the type of image data for displaying the blinking image G25) at each update timing when the predetermined individual image is subjected to change display according to the predetermined mode is the first predetermined mode. Second determination means (a function for executing the processing of steps S1608 and S1613 in the display CPU 72) to determine without using the information for determination;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature E1, it is possible to independently control the first display content and the second display content of the predetermined individual image independently when the predetermined individual image is subjected to change display in a predetermined manner. Thereby, when diversifying the display mode of the change display according to the predetermined mode in the predetermined individual image, the first display content and the second display content can be controlled independently, and the diversification is performed. It becomes easy.

  Feature E2. The second determining means determines the second display content of the second display content of the predetermined individual image at each update timing when the predetermined individual image is subjected to change display according to the predetermined mode. The game machine according to Feature E1, wherein the information is determined using second predetermined mode determination information (blinking display table 146) set in time series.

  According to the feature E2, the first predetermined mode determination information for determining the first display content and the second predetermined mode determination information for determining the second display content are individually provided, so that each predetermined mode is provided. It is possible to control the first display content and the second display content independently, while enabling display control to be executed according to the usage information.

Feature E3. The first predetermined mode determination information is:
A first predetermined reference information group (pointer information) in which a plurality of first predetermined reference information is set in which the reference object by the first determining means is sequentially updated each time the first display content of the predetermined individual image is updated. When,
First predetermined mode information for determining the first display content at each update timing of the first display content of the predetermined individual image is set corresponding to each of the first predetermined reference information. Aspect information group (size information and tip position information),
With
The second predetermined mode determination information is:
A second predetermined reference information group (pointer information) in which a plurality of second predetermined reference information in which reference objects by the second determining means are sequentially updated each time the second display content of the predetermined individual image is updated are set. When,
A second predetermined state in which the second predetermined mode information for determining the second display content at each update timing of the second display content of the predetermined individual image is set corresponding to each of the second predetermined reference information Aspect information group (image data information),
The gaming machine according to Feature E2, further comprising:

  According to the feature E3, a dedicated first predetermined reference information group is set in the first predetermined mode determination information, and a dedicated second predetermined reference information group is set in the second predetermined mode determination information. Yes. Thereby, it becomes easy to control the update cycle of the first display content and the update cycle of the second display content independently independently.

  Feature E4. Means (function for executing the processing of step S1610 and step S1612 in the display CPU 72) for changing one update cycle of the first display content and the second display content independently of the other update cycle is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3.

  According to the feature E4, by changing one update cycle of the first display content and the second display content independently of the other update cycle, the display mode of the change display according to the predetermined mode in the predetermined individual image Diversification can be suitably realized.

Feature E5. The display control means creates drawing data by setting image data in a setting storage means (first frame area 82a, second frame area 82b), and sends an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means. Based on the output, display the image on the display unit,
The predetermined individual image is displayed using first predetermined individual image data (band display image data 142) and second predetermined individual image data (lighting image data 143, extinguishing image data 144),
The first display content corresponds to the display content of an image displayed using the first predetermined individual image data in the predetermined individual image,
The second display content corresponds to the display content of an image displayed using the second predetermined individual image data in the predetermined individual image,
In the first predetermined mode determining information, when the second predetermined individual image data is set in the setting storage means, the second predetermined individual image data is set in association with the first predetermined individual image data. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4, characterized in that information (tip position information) is set.

  According to the feature E5, even if the first display content and the second display content can be independently controlled separately, the second predetermined individual image data according to the aspect associated with the first predetermined individual image data Setting to the setting storage means can be easily performed.

Feature E6. One of the first display content and the second display content is at least one of a size, a shape, and a color of the predetermined individual image,
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5, wherein the other of the first display content and the second display content is a type of image data for displaying the predetermined individual image.

  According to the feature E6, at least one of the size, shape, and color of the predetermined individual image and the type of image data for displaying the predetermined individual image can be independently controlled.

  In addition, with respect to any one configuration of the features E1 to E6, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. Any one or a plurality of configurations of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 41a);
Display storage means (memory module 203) for storing image data in advance;
Storage means for setting (VRAM 204) in which the image data is set;
Derivation means (display CPU 201) for deriving parameter information for determining the setting mode when setting the image data in the setting storage means;
Creating drawing data based on setting the image data in the setting storage means according to the parameter information derived by the deriving means, and outputting an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means; Display control means (VDP205) for displaying an image on the display unit based on
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means receives predetermined types of image data (the backmost image data 241, the first background individual image image data 242, the second background individual image image data 243, and the effect character image data 244). After the predetermined type image is displayed over the front period based on setting in the setting storage unit, the display of the predetermined type image based on setting the predetermined type image data in the setting storage unit is performed on the rear side. Provided with a predetermined type control means (function to execute setting processing for separate storage display in the VDP 205) that is not performed over a period of time,
The parameter information derived by the deriving means for application to the predetermined type of image data in the front period is stored in a predetermined storage area of a predetermined storage means (work RAM 202), and the predetermined storage area is the rear period. However, the gaming machine is held as an area for storing parameter information of the predetermined type of image data.

  According to the feature F1, even when the display of the predetermined type image using the predetermined type image data is interrupted, the predetermined storage area in which the parameter information to be applied to the predetermined type image data is stored A process for reserving the predetermined storage area when the display of the predetermined type image using the predetermined type image data is resumed by being held as an area for storing the parameter information of the predetermined type image data is newly performed. There is no need to do it. Accordingly, it is possible to reduce the processing load when the display of the predetermined type image using the predetermined type image data is resumed.

  Feature F2. The gaming machine according to Feature F1, wherein the derivation unit updates parameter information to be applied to the predetermined type of image data even in the rear period.

  According to the feature F2, the parameter information to be applied to the predetermined type image data is updated even in the rear period, so that the display of the predetermined type image using the predetermined type image data after the rear period ends. In the case of resuming, from the state when the change in the content of the predetermined type image is continued for the rear period according to the display pattern defined in time series with respect to the display state immediately before the start of the rear period, the predetermined type It is possible to resume display of the predetermined type image using the image data.

  Feature F3. The predetermined type control means generates pre-created data (first separately stored image data 245, second separate stored image data 247) created based on setting the predetermined type image data in the setting storage means in the front period. ) To create the drawing data in the rear period, the gaming machine according to the feature F1 or F2.

  According to the feature F3, it is possible to display a predetermined type image even in the rear period.

  Feature F4. The predetermined type control means is configured to set the pre-created data and additional image data (image data 246 for additional individual images, effect image data 248) in the setting storage means in the rear period. The gaming machine according to Feature F3, wherein drawing data is created.

  According to the feature F4, since the additional image data is added as the image data to be used in the rear period, the display content can be made flashy. In addition, in the rear period, since the predetermined type image data is not used as the image data for displaying the predetermined type image, but the pre-created data is used, the additional image data is added as the image data to be used. Even if this is the case, the processing load can be reduced.

Feature F5. The rear period occurs when a predetermined start opportunity occurs in the front period,
The gaming machine according to feature F3 or F4, wherein the predetermined type control means creates the pre-created data before the predetermined start trigger can be generated in the front period.

  According to the feature F5, since the pre-created data is created before the situation where the predetermined start trigger can occur, the predetermined start trigger is less than the configuration in which the pre-created data is created at the timing when the predetermined start trigger occurs. It becomes possible to reduce the processing load of the generated timing.

  Feature F6. The predetermined type control means is continued when the predetermined start trigger does not occur before the branch timing of the pre-created data created before the predetermined start trigger can be generated in the preceding period. The game machine according to Feature F5, wherein the pre-created data is newly created in the front period.

  According to the feature F6, since the pre-created data is newly created as necessary, it is possible to use the pre-created data created at a timing closer to the timing of actually using the pre-created data. Become.

  Feature F7. One of the features F3 to F6, wherein the predetermined type control means creates a plurality of types of the pre-created data so that contents of images displayed by the pre-created data are different in the front period. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature F7, by creating a plurality of types of pre-created data, it is possible to diversify the situation in which image display is executed using the pre-created data.

Feature F8. At least first pre-created data (second separately stored image data 247) and second pre-created data (first separate stored image data 245) are created as the pre-created data,
As the rear period, there is a first rear period and a second rear period that can occur after the first rear period,
The predetermined type control means includes:
First pre-creation means (a function for executing the processing of steps S3910 to S3912 in the VDP 205) that creates the drawing data using the first pre-creation data in the first rear period;
Second pre-creation means (a function for executing the processing of steps S3906 to S3909 in the VDP 205) that creates the drawing data using the second pre-creation data in the second rear period;
The gaming machine according to Feature F7, comprising:

  According to the feature F8, it is possible to use pre-created data suitable for each rear period.

Feature F9. The first rear period occurs when a predetermined start opportunity occurs in the front period,
The first pre-created data and the second pre-created data are created before the predetermined start opportunity can occur in the front period,
The second pre-creation means newly creates the second pre-creation data in the continued front period when the predetermined start opportunity does not occur in the front period. Game machines.

  According to feature F9, when the first rear period does not occur, the second pre-created data is newly created before the second rear period occurs. It is possible to use the second pre-created data created at a timing closer to the use timing.

Feature F10. The display control means includes
Arrangement means for arranging object data as three-dimensional information as the image data in the virtual three-dimensional space in the setting storage means (function for executing the processing of steps S2602 to S2604 in the VDP 205);
Viewpoint setting means for setting a viewpoint in the virtual three-dimensional space (function for executing the processing of steps S2605 to S2606 in the VDP 205);
Drawing setting means for projecting the object data onto a projection plane set based on the viewpoint and creating the drawing data based on the data projected on the projection plane (the processing of steps S2607 to S2612 in the VDP 205 is performed). Function to execute)
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F9, comprising:

  According to the feature F10, it is possible to achieve an excellent effect as described above in the configuration for displaying a three-dimensional image.

  In addition, with respect to any one configuration of the features F1 to F10, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. Any one or a plurality of configurations of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  Each invention of the above-mentioned feature A group-the above-mentioned feature F group can solve the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. It becomes.

  Here, in the gaming machines such as the above-described examples, a configuration capable of suitably performing display control is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature G group>
Feature G1. First control means (main-side MPU 52) and second control means (sound light side MPU 62, display CPU 72, VDP 76),
The first control means includes
Grant determination means (function to execute special figure special power control processing in the main MPU 52) for determining whether to grant a privilege to the player,
Information transmitting means for transmitting predetermined correspondence information (variation command and type command) corresponding to the result of the assignment determination (function for executing special figure special power control processing in the main MPU 52);
With
The second control means includes
Content determining means (function for executing the processes of steps S404 and S406 to S408 in the sound light side MPU 62) for determining the content of the unit effect (game play effect) corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information;
Effect execution control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for controlling the effect execution means (symbol display device 41) so that the unit effect corresponding to the effect content determined by the content determination means is executed;
With
As production contents that can be determined by the content determination means based on the predetermined correspondence information of the same type, the first production content in which the duration of the production corresponds to the first duration, and the duration of the production corresponds to the second duration. The game machine is characterized by including at least a second effect content.

  According to the feature G1, it is possible to diversify the production contents by selecting the production contents with different durations of the production from the same type of predetermined correspondence information, and the process for determining the production contents It becomes possible to raise the freedom degree of a structure.

  Feature G2. The effect execution control means ends the unit effect when the duration corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information has elapsed regardless of which effect content is determined by the content determination means. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature G2, since the unit effect ends when the duration corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information elapses regardless of the content of any effect, the duration of the effect differs from the same type of predetermined correspondence information. Even if the effect content can be selected, it is possible to set the duration of the unit effect as the duration corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information.

Feature G3. The first control unit includes a duration determination unit (a function for executing a special figure special electric power control process in the main MPU 52) for determining a duration of the unit effect.
The gaming machine according to Feature G2, wherein the predetermined correspondence information includes information that allows the second control means to specify the duration determined by the duration determination means.

  According to the feature G3, even if the second control means performs execution control of the unit effect by determining the duration of the unit effect in the first control means, the second control means to the first control means. It is possible to grasp the duration of the unit effect in the first control means without requiring transmission of information to the first control means. In this case, by providing the configuration of the feature G2, the duration of the unit effect can be selected even if the effect content having a different duration of the effect can be selected from the same type of predetermined correspondence information. It is possible to make the duration determined by one control means.

  Feature G4. The effect content determined by the content determination means is an effect content whose duration corresponding to the effect content is equal to or less than the duration corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information that triggered the determination of the effect content. A gaming machine according to the feature G2 or G3.

  According to the characteristic G4, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the event that the unit effect is ended after the duration of the unit effect elapses during the execution of the effect content determined by the content determination unit.

Feature G5. The effect execution control means causes the effect execution means to perform an effect of holding the design in a predetermined area and performing standby display after the variable display of the pattern is performed as the unit effect.
If the duration of the production content determined by the content determination means is shorter than the duration corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information, means for extending the execution period of the standby display accordingly (in step S504 in the sound light side MPU 62) A gaming machine according to any one of features G2 to G4, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a function of executing a process.

  According to the characteristic G5, by extending the execution period of the standby display, the difference between the duration of the production content determined by the content determination unit and the duration corresponding to the predetermined correspondence information is compensated. Thereby, it is not necessary to greatly modify the production contents of the unit effect in order to compensate for the difference, and the processing configuration for compensating for the difference can be simplified.

Feature G6. The content determining means includes
Means for determining the production content of the first production range among the unit productions by executing the first lottery process (function for executing the process of step S404 in the sound light side MPU 62);
Means for executing the second lottery process to determine the production content of the second production range among the unit productions (function for executing the process of step S406 in the sound light side MPU 62);
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, comprising:

  According to the feature G6, the first lottery process and the second lottery process are executed to determine the production content of the unit production, so that the production content of the unit production can be determined irregularly. In this case, since the content of the production having the configuration of the feature G1 and the duration of the production differ from the same type of predetermined correspondence information can be selected, the degree of freedom in designing the first lottery process and the second lottery process is increased. It is done.

  In addition, with respect to any one of the configurations of the features G1 to G6, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. Any one or a plurality of configurations of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  Each invention of the above-mentioned feature G group can solve the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. It becomes.

  Here, in the gaming machines such as the above-described examples, there is a demand for a configuration capable of suitably performing effects such as display effects, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

<Feature H group>
Feature H1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 41a);
Display control means (for measurement display in the display CPU 72) for controlling the display means so that measurement result information (number display image G31) corresponding to the number of measurement objects (number of game balls acquired) is displayed on the display unit. A function of executing the arithmetic processing of the above, a function of executing arithmetic processing for increase display in the display CPU 72),
With
The display control means is a change value changing means for changing the change value of the value displayed in the measurement result information when the measurement result information is updated (step S2003, step S2007, step S2010 and step S2012 in the display CPU 72). And a function for executing the processing of steps S2102 to S2104 in the display CPU 72).

  According to the feature H1, by displaying the measurement result information corresponding to the number of measurement objects on the display unit, it is possible to make the player recognize the number of measurement objects. In this case, the change value of the value currently displayed in the measurement result information when the measurement result information is updated is changed. Thereby, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the measurement result information changes.

Feature H2. The display control means starts the display of the measurement result information when a measurement start trigger occurs, and ends the display of the measurement result information in the measurement round when a measurement end trigger occurs,
The gaming machine according to Feature H1, wherein the change value changing means can change the change value within a range of one measurement time.

  According to the feature H2, since the change value of the measurement result information can be changed within the range of one measurement time, the manner in which the measurement result information changes even within the range of one measurement time is diversified. It becomes possible.

Feature H3. The display control means starts the display of the measurement result information when a measurement start trigger occurs, and ends the display of the measurement result information in the measurement round when a measurement end trigger occurs,
The game machine according to claim H1 or H2, wherein the change value changing means can change the change value between one measurement time and another measurement time.

  According to the feature H3, it is possible to diversify the manner in which the measurement result information changes in each measurement time.

  Feature H4. The game machine according to Feature H3, wherein the change value changing means sets a value corresponding to a result of dividing a value finally displayed as the measurement result information by a predetermined value as the change value.

  According to the feature H4, the change value of the value corresponding to the measurement result information can be made irregular according to the value finally displayed as the measurement result information.

  Feature H5. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4, wherein the change value changing unit changes the change value in accordance with a value to be reflected in a value displayed in the measurement result information.

  According to the feature H5, the change value is changed according to the value to be reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information, so that the change value of the value of the measurement result information is related to the value to be reflected. It can be changed.

  Feature H6. In any one of the features H1 to H5, the change value changing unit sets the value of the change value to a larger value as the value to be reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information is larger. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature H6, the larger the value to be reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information, the larger the value of the change value, thereby completing the reflection of the value to be reflected in the measurement result information. It is possible to diversify the manner in which the measurement result information changes while shortening the period required until the time.

Feature H7. The display control means includes
When the value to be reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information is a value corresponding to an increase in the value to be measured, the value to be reflected is displayed in the measurement result information divided into a plurality of update timings. First reflecting means (function for executing the processing of steps S2005 to S2013 in the display CPU 72) to be reflected in the value being performed;
When the value to be reflected in the value displayed in the measurement result information is a value corresponding to the decrease in the value to be measured, the value to be reflected is displayed in the measurement result information at one update timing. Second reflecting means (function for executing the processing of step S2003 and step S2004 in the display CPU 72) to be reflected in the existing value;
With
The change value changing means, when the value to be reflected by the first reflecting means is reflected in the values displayed in the measurement result information divided into a plurality of update timings, at the respective update timings The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H6, wherein the change value can be changed.

  According to the feature H7, when the value of the measurement target increases, it is possible to emphasize that the value of the measurement target is increased by reflecting the value to be reflected in a plurality of update timings. Thus, when the value of the measurement target decreases, the value to be reflected is reflected at one update timing, so that the decrease in the value of the measurement target can be made inconspicuous. In this case, since the change value at each update timing can be changed when the value of the measurement target increases, the measurement result information changes in a situation that emphasizes that the value of the measurement target is increasing. Various aspects can be diversified.

  Feature H8. One of the features H1 to H7, wherein the measurement target is a difference between an increase in the number of game media usable by the player and a decrease in the number of game media usable by the player. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature H8, when the difference between the increase and decrease in the number of game media that can be used by the player is displayed as measurement result information, the manner in which the measurement result information changes is diversified. It becomes possible.

  In addition, with respect to any one of the configurations of the features H1 to H8, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. Any one or a plurality of configurations of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  Each invention of the above-mentioned feature group H can solve the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. It becomes.

  Here, in the gaming machines such as the above-described examples, a configuration capable of suitably performing display control is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature I group>
Feature I1. Production execution means (design display device 41) for performing the production;
Production control means (sound light side MPU 62, display CPU 201, VDP 205) for controlling the production execution means,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The production control means is a time correspondence control means (sound light side) that causes the production execution means to start a special production (production of a special period) when a start condition is met when a predetermined start correspondence time is reached. (MPU 62 has a function of executing the processing of step S3010 and step S3011).

  According to the feature I1, a special effect is started when a predetermined start corresponding time is reached, so that it is possible to perform an effect when the predetermined time is reached. In addition, for example, the same effect can be started simultaneously in a plurality of gaming machines installed in the gaming hall. In addition, it is not preferable to start the special effect from the viewpoint of facilitating understanding of processing load and game contents by starting the special effect when the start corresponding time is satisfied and the start condition is satisfied. It is possible to prevent the special performance from being started in the situation.

  Feature I2. The gaming machine according to claim I1, wherein the time-related control means starts the special effect after a preparatory period has elapsed when the start-corresponding time is reached.

  According to the feature I2, when the start corresponding time is reached, the special effect is started after the preparatory period has elapsed, so the start time of the special effect can be set to a predetermined time. In addition, it is possible to distribute and execute processes necessary for executing the special effects during the preparation period, and it is possible to distribute the processing load.

Feature I3. The effect control means is an arbitrary response control means (step S3208 in the sound light side MPU 62) that causes the effect execution means to execute an arbitrary response effect (game play effect) when an arbitrary opportunity that occurs at an arbitrary timing occurs. ~ Function of executing the process of step S3213),
The gaming machine according to I2, wherein the preparation period is set as a period longer than the longest execution period among the execution periods of the arbitrary corresponding effects.

  According to the feature I3, since the preparation period is set as a period longer than the longest execution period of the optional corresponding effect, the special effect is started even if the start corresponding time is reached in the situation where the optional corresponding effect is being executed. The arbitrary corresponding performance in the middle of the execution ends before it is time to execute. As a result, it is possible to limit the execution status of the optional performance when the special performance is started to a predetermined situation, and the occurrence of an event that causes an extremely high processing load at the timing when the special performance is started. It becomes possible to stop.

Feature I4. The effect control means is an arbitrary response control means (step S3208 in the sound light side MPU 62) that causes the effect execution means to execute an arbitrary response effect (game play effect) when an arbitrary opportunity that occurs at an arbitrary timing occurs. ~ Function of executing the process of step S3213),
The arbitrary correspondence control means restricts the content of the arbitrary correspondence effect to a predetermined content when the arbitrary correspondence effect is started after the start corresponding time and before the start condition is satisfied. The gaming machine according to Feature I3, wherein:

  According to the feature I4, it is possible to limit the production content of the optional production production when the special production is started to the predetermined production content. As a result, the processing load at the timing when the special effect is started becomes extremely high while it is possible to start the optional response effect after the start corresponding time and before starting the special effect. Can be prevented.

  Feature I5. The effect control means is a preparation response control means (sound light) that causes the effect execution means to execute a preparation response effect (effect of a preparation period) until the start condition is satisfied when the start response time is reached. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4, further comprising: a function of executing steps S2806, S2807, S3006, and S3007 in the side MPU 62).

  According to the feature I5, it is possible to cause the player to recognize that the special effect will be executed from now on by executing the preparation corresponding effect.

  Feature I6. The preparation handling control means, when the restriction condition is satisfied when the start handling time is reached, does not start the preparation handling effect until the restriction condition is canceled. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature I6, when the restriction condition is satisfied, even if the start corresponding time is reached, the preparation corresponding effect is not started, so that the preparation corresponding effect is started in an unfavorable situation from the viewpoint of processing load. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.

  Feature I7. The game machine according to Feature I6, wherein when the restriction condition is satisfied, the preparation handling control unit performs a corresponding notification (display of a remaining time notification image G63).

  According to the feature I7, it is possible to make the player recognize that the preparation-related effect and the special effect are to be executed even in a situation where the restriction condition is satisfied.

Feature I8. The effect control means is an arbitrary response control means (step S3208 in the sound light side MPU 62) that causes the effect execution means to execute an arbitrary response effect (game play effect) when an arbitrary opportunity that occurs at an arbitrary timing occurs. ~ Function of executing the process of step S3213),
When the start corresponding time is reached in a situation where the arbitrary corresponding effect is being executed, the preparation corresponding control means determines that the restriction condition is satisfied and displays the preparation corresponding effect until the arbitrary corresponding effect ends. The gaming machine according to Feature I6 or I7, wherein the gaming machine is not started.

  According to the feature I8, it is possible to prevent the preparation corresponding effect from being started during the execution of the arbitrary corresponding effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which the processing load at the timing when the preparation-response effect starts is extremely high.

Feature I9. The effect execution means is a display means having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 41a),
When the preparation corresponding effect and another effect (game turn effect) are executed simultaneously, the preparation corresponding effect is executed in a part of the area of the display unit, and the other area (partition display) of the display unit. The gaming machine according to any one of features I5 to I8, wherein the other effects are executed in a region G66).

  According to the feature I9, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize each of the preparation corresponding effect and the other effects.

  Feature I10. The preparation response control means causes the effect execution means to notify the remaining time information (remaining time notification image G63) corresponding to the remaining time until the special effect is started as the preparation response effect. The gaming machine according to any one of features I5 to I9.

  According to the feature I10, the player can recognize that the start of the special effect is approaching by checking the remaining time information.

Feature I11. The preparation handling control means includes:
Regardless of the timing at which the preparation-response effect is started, the remaining time information is updated until the remaining time information starts to display from a predetermined initial value information and becomes a predetermined end value information. (A function for executing the process of step S3404 in the display CPU 201),
Means for changing the one-time update value of the remaining time information according to the timing at which the preparation-response effect is started (function of executing steps S3402 and S3403 in the display CPU 201);
A gaming machine according to Feature I10, comprising:

  According to the feature I11, it is possible to diversify the update mode of the remaining time information in relation to the timing at which the preparation corresponding effect is started.

  Feature I12. When the predetermined time before the start condition is satisfied at or after the start corresponding time, an effect execution means (display light emitting unit 44, speaker unit 45) different from the effect execution means The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I11, comprising means for starting an effect (a function of executing the processing of step S2801 in the sound light side MPU 62).

  According to the feature I12, it is possible to reliably start a predetermined effect when the start corresponding time is reached. Thus, for example, it is possible to start a predetermined effect at the same time in the plurality of gaming machines regardless of the effect execution status of the effect execution means in the plurality of gaming machines installed in the game hall.

  In addition, with respect to any one configuration of the features I1 to I12, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. Any one or a plurality of configurations of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  Each invention of the above-mentioned feature group I can solve the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery. Moreover, the structure by which the effect for making a player predict or recognize the result of the said internal lottery is performed is common.

  Specifically, with regard to the pachinko machine, a lottery is performed based on the game ball entering the entrance part provided in the game area, and the display of the display device displays a variation of the pattern. A configuration is known in which when a winning result is obtained, a combination of specific patterns is finally stopped and displayed on the display surface, and the game state is shifted to a special game state advantageous to the player. When the game state is shifted to the special game state, for example, the opening and closing of the ball entering device provided in the game area is started, and the game ball is paid out based on the ball entering the ball entering device.

  Here, it is necessary to provide a novel game content in the gaming machine such as the above example, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

<Feature J group>
Feature J1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 41a);
Display storage means (memory module 74) for storing image data in advance;
Creating drawing data based on setting the image data in the setting storage means (first frame area 82a, second frame area 82b), and outputting an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means Display control means (display CPU 72, VDP 76) for displaying an image on the display unit,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display control means includes
Using the first still image data (first character image data 171) stored in advance in the display storage means, specific individual images (first pseudo moving image character G42, second pseudo moving image character G43, pseudo image data). A function of executing the processing of steps S2204 to S2207 in the display CPU 72 for displaying the first frame image (first character image G41, first pseudo moving image G52) including the moving image character G51. )When,
A second frame image (second character image G48, second pseudo image) including the specific individual image using second still image data (second character image data 173) stored in advance in the display storage means. Second frame control means (function for executing the processing of steps S2217 to S2220 in the display CPU 72) for displaying the moving image G53);
In the update timing of the image after the first frame image is displayed and before the second frame image is displayed, the intermediate image data (effects) stored in advance in the display storage means Using the image data 172), midway control means (steps S2211 to S2214 in the display CPU 72) for displaying a halfway image (effect image G45, pseudo moving image effect image G54) that does not include the specific individual image is executed. Function)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature J1, the specific individual image is inserted between the update timing at which the first frame image including the specific individual image is displayed and the update timing at which the second frame image including the specific individual image is displayed. A halfway image that does not include is displayed. Thereby, even in a situation where there is not enough image data for the player to recognize that a moving image is displayed for a specific individual image, the specific individual image can be obtained by interposing an intermediate image. It is possible to make the player recognize that the moving image is displayed.

  Feature J2. The first frame control means displays the first frame image in a different display mode at a plurality of update timings by changing the setting mode of the first still image data in the setting storage unit. A gaming machine described in the feature J1.

  According to the feature J2, by using the first still image data, it is possible to cause a situation in which the display mode is changed at a plurality of update timings while displaying a specific individual image.

  Feature J3. The second frame control unit displays the second frame image in a different display mode at a plurality of update timings by changing a setting mode of the second still image data in the setting storage unit. A gaming machine according to the feature J1 or J2.

  According to the feature J3, by using the second still image data, it is possible to cause a situation in which the display mode is changed at a plurality of update timings while displaying a specific individual image.

Feature J4. In the specific effect period, the intermediate image is displayed next to the first frame image, and the second frame image is displayed next to the intermediate image.
The first still image data is used in a first period different from the specific effect period,
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3, wherein the second still image data is used in a second period different from the specific effect period and the first period.

  According to the feature J4, an effect of displaying a specific individual image in the specific effect period is executed using the first still image data used in the first period and the second still image data used in the second period. The As a result, the still image data can be used in a plurality of situations, and the storage capacity necessary for the display storage means can be suppressed. In this case, since the configuration of the feature J1 is provided, the moving image of the specific individual image in the specific effect period even if the configuration uses the first still image data and the second still image data. When the display is performed, it is possible to make the player recognize.

Feature J5. With respect to a predetermined part (predetermined part G51a) of the specific individual image displayed in the first frame image, the predetermined part of the specific individual image displayed in the second frame image is a predetermined operation path. The first still image data and the second still image data are set so as to be displayed at a position on the front side of
Any one of the characteristics J1 to J4 is characterized in that the intermediate image data is set so that the intermediate individual image (individual image G54a) displayed in the intermediate image is displaced according to the predetermined operation path. Game machines.

  According to the feature J5, the first still image data is displayed such that the intermediate individual image is displaced in accordance with the operation path of the predetermined part in the specific individual image based on the first still image data and the second still image data, whereby the first still image is displayed. Even when the display position of the predetermined part in the specific individual image based on the image data is separated from the display position of the specific part in the specific individual image based on the second still image data, the predetermined part is displaced according to the predetermined operation path. It is possible to give an impression that the player is doing.

  Feature J6. The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J5, wherein the first frame image and the second frame image are real images, and the intermediate image is a non-real image.

  According to the feature J6, it is possible to give the player an impression that a moving image is displayed for a specific individual image by using the non-real image even in a situation where there are few types of the real image. Become.

  In addition, with respect to any one of the features J1 to J6, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. Any one or a plurality of configurations of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

<Feature K group>
Feature K1. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 41a);
Display storage means (memory module 203) for storing image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 201, VDP 205) for displaying an image on the display unit using image data stored in the display storage means;
With
The display storage means includes
First moving image data (A-angle first moving image data group 261) that makes it possible to display a series of specific moving images by using image data created by executing the decoding process;
Second moving image data (A angle) that enables the display of a specific midway video starting from the middle of the specific video by using image data created by executing the decoding process. The second moving image data group 262),
Is stored in advance.

  According to the feature K1, since not only the first moving image data but also the second moving image data is provided, the first moving image data and the second moving image are used as objects to be used according to the timing at which the display start trigger occurs. One of the data can be selected. Thereby, the display of the specific moving image can be started from the beginning of the specific moving image and the display of the specific moving image can be started from the middle of the specific moving image only by switching the moving image data to be used.

Feature K2. The first moving image data includes a plurality of first unit moving image data (moving image data 271a) with different display periods corresponding to the specific moving image,
The second moving image data has a plurality of second unit moving image data (moving image data 271b) with different display periods corresponding to the specific intermediate moving image,
Each of the second unit moving image data includes a moving image that starts from a timing in the middle of a moving image displayed by using the first unit moving image data in the corresponding order in the plurality of first unit moving image data. The gaming machine according to Feature K1, which is set as data to be displayed.

  According to the feature K2, it is possible to set many timings at which the specific moving image can be started from the middle, and it is easy to start the specific moving image from the display content corresponding to the generation timing of the display start trigger.

  Feature K3. In the first unit moving image data and the second unit moving image data in the corresponding order, the start timing of the moving image displayed by using the first unit moving image data and the second unit moving image data are The amount of deviation of the image update timing from the start timing of the moving image displayed by use is the same for each combination of the first unit moving image data and the second unit moving image data in the corresponding order. Or the gaming machine according to the feature K2, characterized by being substantially identical.

  According to the feature K3, it is possible to easily design the timing at which the moving image display using the first unit moving image data can be started and the timing at which the moving image display using the second unit moving image data can be started. It is done.

  Feature K4. The first unit moving image data and the second unit moving image data are data in which the number of image data created by executing the decoding process is a minimum number that can be set as moving image data. A gaming machine according to the feature K2 or K3.

  According to the feature K4, it is possible to set many timings at which switching to the moving image display by the first moving image data and switching timings to the moving image display by the second moving image data can be performed. Further, it is possible to reduce the data amount of moving image data read at a time.

  Feature K5. The display control means, when a predetermined operation is performed by a player at a timing before the timing corresponding to the start of the specific video, to start display of the specific video using the first moving image data, When the predetermined operation is performed at a timing later than the timing corresponding to the start of the specific moving image, target switching means (step in the display CPU 201) for starting the display of the specific midway moving image using the second moving image data. The game machine according to any one of features K1 to K4, which includes a function of executing the processing of S4105 to S4117.

  According to the feature K5, even when a predetermined operation by the player occurs at an arbitrary timing, it is possible to start displaying the specific moving image from a situation corresponding to the generation timing of the predetermined operation.

  Feature K6. The target switching means is a case where the predetermined operation is performed at a timing after the timing corresponding to the start of the specific moving image and before the timing corresponding to the start of the specific midway video. If the predetermined operation is performed after the timing before the period necessary for starting the use of the second moving image data with respect to the timing corresponding to the start, the second moving image data The gaming machine according to the feature K5, wherein the display of the specific midway moving image using is not started.

  According to the feature K6, the display of the specific moving image can be started from the situation corresponding to the occurrence timing of the predetermined operation within the range in which the use of the second moving image data can be smoothly started.

Feature K7. The display control means is a target switching means (in the display CPU 201 for switching to a situation in which another video is displayed when a predetermined operation is performed by a player in a situation where any one of a plurality of types of videos is being displayed. Steps S4105 to S4117)
The combination of the first moving image data and the second moving image data is provided as moving image data for displaying the first moving image among the plurality of types of moving images.
The display storage means includes
Third moving image data (B-angle first moving image data group 264) that allows a series of predetermined moving images to be displayed by using image data created by executing the decoding process;
Fourth moving image data (B angle) that enables displaying a predetermined halfway moving image that starts from the middle of the predetermined moving image by using image data created by executing the decoding process. The second moving image data group 265),
Is stored in advance,
The combination of the third moving image data and the fourth moving image data is provided as moving image data for displaying a second moving image among the plurality of types of moving images. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature K7, it is possible to set many timings at which the moving image to be displayed can be switched between the first moving image and the second moving image.

Feature K8. The first moving image data and the third moving image data have the same timing at which a start image can be displayed in a predetermined effect period,
The game machine according to Feature K7, wherein the second moving image data and the fourth moving image data have the same timing at which a start image can be displayed in the predetermined effect period.

  According to the feature K8, when one of the first moving image and the second moving image is switched from one to the other, it is possible to start displaying the switching destination moving image from the display content corresponding to the display content of the switching source.

  Feature K9. The gaming machine according to feature K7 or K8, wherein the first moving image and the second moving image are moving images with different angles for displaying special individual images.

  According to the feature K9, it is possible to achieve an excellent effect as described above in the configuration in which the display target is switched between a plurality of moving images with different angles for displaying the special individual image.

Feature K10. Display means (symbol display device 41) having a display unit (liquid crystal display unit 41a);
Display storage means (memory module 203) for storing image data in advance;
Display control means (display CPU 201, VDP 205) for displaying an image on the display unit using image data stored in the display storage means;
With
The display storage means uses predetermined moving image data (various moving image data groups 261 to 269) that can display a series of special moving images by using image data created by executing decoding processing. ) In advance,
The predetermined moving image data includes a plurality of special unit moving image data (moving image data 271a to 273c) with different display periods corresponding to the special moving image,
The game machine according to claim 1, wherein the special unit moving image data is data in which the number of image data created by executing the decoding process is a minimum number that can be set as moving image data.

  According to the feature K10, it is possible to set many timings at which switching to moving image display using predetermined moving image data is possible. Further, it is possible to reduce the data amount of moving image data read at a time.

  In addition, with respect to any one of the features K1 to K10, the features A1 to A10, the features B1 to B8, the features C1 to C8, the features D1 to D9, the features E1 to E6, the features F1 to F10, and the features G1 to G6. Any one or a plurality of configurations of the features H1 to H8, the features I1 to I12, the features J1 to J6, and the features K1 to K10 may be applied. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

  The inventions of the feature J group and the feature K group can solve the following problems.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko gaming machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. As these gaming machines, those equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device are known. The gaming machine is equipped with a memory in which image data is stored in advance, and a predetermined image is displayed on the display unit of the display device using the image data read from the memory. It becomes.

  Here, in the gaming machines such as the above-described examples, a configuration capable of suitably performing display control is required, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied or applied to each feature is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, the game machine is configured such that the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped when a predetermined time elapses and a privilege is given to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 41 ... Symbol display apparatus, 41a ... Liquid crystal display part, 44 ... Display light emission part, 45 ... Speaker part, 52 ... Main side MPU, 62 ... Sound light side MPU, 72 ... Display CPU, 74 ... Memory module 76 ... VDP, 82a ... first frame area, 82b ... second frame area, 122 ... character stopping table, 123 ... character moving table, 124 ... background table, 125 ... interlocking flag, 132 ... decoded image data , 142 ... Image data for band display, 143 ... Image data for lighting, 144 ... Image data for extinction, 145 ... Table for band display, 146 ... Table for blinking display, 171 ... Image data for first character, 172 ... Effect image Data, 173 ... second character image data, 201 ... display CPU, 202 ... work RAM, 203 Memory module, 204 ... VRAM, 205 ... VDP, 211 ... VRAM, 211a ... Texture area, 211b ... Movie data area, 241 ... Backmost image data, 242 ... First background individual image data, 243 ... Image data for second background individual image, 244 ... Image data for effect character, 245 ... First separately stored image data, 246 ... Image data for additional individual image, 247 ... Second separately stored image data, 248 ... Effect Image data, 261 to 269 ... moving image data group, 271a to 273c ... moving image data, 282 ... special moving image data, 284 ... still image data, G4 ... character for loop display, G5 ... background for loop display, G11 ... group display Character, G22 ... valid period image, G24 ... band image, G25 ... flashing image, G31 ... pieces Display image, G41 ... first character image, G42 ... first pseudo moving image character, G43 ... second pseudo moving image character, G45 ... effect image, G48 ... second character image, G51 ... pseudo moving image character, G51a ... predetermined part, G52 ... first pseudo video image, G53 ... second pseudo video image, G54 ... pseudo video effect image, G54a ... individual image, G63 ... remaining time notification image, G66 ... partition display area, T10 ... Execution target table for acceleration period, T11... Execution target table for first high speed period, T12... Execution target table for first low speed period.

Claims (2)

Display means having a display unit;
Display storage means for storing image data in advance;
Display control means for creating drawing data based on setting the image data in a setting storage means, and outputting an image signal corresponding to the drawing data to the display means; ,
In a gaming machine equipped with
The display storage means stores moving image data in which a plurality of specific image data is created by executing a decoding process,
The plurality of specific image data is image data for displaying a predetermined individual image so as to move in a predetermined direction,
The display control means includes
A first set range control means to ensure that the first set range image is displayed by setting the range to be set in the setting storing section in the specified image data to the first set range,
Second setting range control means for displaying a second setting range image by setting a range to be set in the setting storage means in the specific image data to a second setting range different from the first setting range. When,
Equipped with a,
After the first setting range image is displayed by setting the first setting range for one specific image data, the second setting by setting the second setting range for the specific image data. When the range image is displayed, the predetermined individual image is displayed so as to move in the predetermined direction.
The first setting range control unit and the second setting range control unit are configured to apply the first setting range and the second setting range for each of the plurality of specific image data.
Displaying the first setting range image by setting the first setting range and displaying the second setting range image by setting the second setting range are performed on the specific image data corresponding to a predetermined display order. Thereafter, display of the first setting range image by setting the first setting range and display of the second setting range image by setting the second setting range for the specific image data corresponding to the next display order. gaming machine, characterized in that is carried out. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein a game is played using a game medium.

Images